JP7338594B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area .

For example, a variable ball entry means is provided, and when a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) provided in the internal area, the player There is known a pachinko machine that generates a special game state that is advantageous to players (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-11-197312

However, in conventional gaming machines, games tend to be monotonous, and further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter;
a special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined ball is entered in the special ball entry means, the gaming machine comprising:
a first trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter;
a second trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter;
a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific region can flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means and cannot flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific region can flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means and cannot flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means;
route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route;
It is possible to flow down to the special ball entry means by changing the state in the internal area of the variable ball entry means between at least an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state. a variable means capable of changing the value of the game ball flowing down a predetermined route,
The variable means, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery process executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first opportunity ball entry means or the second opportunity ball entry means, a predetermined configured to be able to execute the advantageous state based on the establishment of a switching condition,
This game machine is
When the predetermined switching condition is established, the value of the game ball flowing down the predetermined route is changed by the variable means,
The specific area is provided only at one location through which game balls can pass one by one,
A ball passage capable of guiding game balls one by one to the specific area is provided only at one place,
In the specific area, while allowing the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction, a regulation means is provided that regulates the passage of the game ball in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
A game ball that has entered the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means is configured to be unable to flow down to the special ball-entering means after that,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the special game state is granted by being controlled to the advantageous state by the variable means, the predetermined type of game most advantageous to the player is given, rather than being controlled to the non-advantageous state by the variable means. It has a structure that makes it easy to determine the special game state,
making the period from at least a predetermined trigger to the control to the advantageous state by the variable means variable;
At least when controlled to the advantageous state by the variable means, effect means capable of executing a preceding effect corresponding to the operation standby period,
The effect means is configured to execute the preceding effect corresponding to the type of the operation standby period to be executed when executing the preceding effect,
The gist of this is that the first route or the second route is provided with delay means capable of delaying the flow speed of the game ball .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to dramatically improve amusement.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame, the game board, and the like. It is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like are opened. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of the various counters used for game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows starting prize-winning processing. It is a flow chart which shows right or wrong judging processing. 9 is a flow chart showing fluctuation time determination processing. 4 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing; It is a flow chart which shows entering ball count processing. It is a flow chart which shows a special winning a prize process. It is a flow chart which shows non-special prize-winning processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special gate passage process. It is a flow chart which shows a kind entry process. It is a flow chart which shows V prize big hit setting processing. 8 is a flowchart showing first display control processing; 10 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a discrimination|determination information setting process. It is a flow chart which shows variable winning a prize device control processing. 9 is a flowchart showing end setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows blade member opening and closing processing. 9 is a flowchart showing second display control processing; It is a flow chart which shows starting prize winning section control processing. 9 is a flowchart showing third display control processing; 4 is a flowchart showing bypass mechanism control processing; It is a flowchart which shows a remaining ball monitoring process. 4 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing of a sub-controller; It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information storage process. It is a front view of a central winning unit. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the operation of the route sorting member. It is an exploded perspective view showing a route distribution member. It is an exploded perspective view showing a rotating body unit. (a) is a front view showing a rotating body unit in which a movable accessory is housed, and (b) is a front view showing a rotating body unit in which a movable accessory is in a projecting state. (a) is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram showing a movable accessory in an accommodated state and its related configuration, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram showing a movable accessory in a projected state and its related configuration. It is a front view for explaining a route distribution member etc. concerning another embodiment. FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional front view for explaining route distribution areas and the like according to another embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows a start winning a prize pre-process. It is a flow chart which shows the 4th display control processing. It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows the structure, such as an inner frame and a game board. It is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like are opened. It is a front view of a variable display device unit. 3 is a perspective view of a variable display device unit; FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the variable display device unit in a state in which the performance accessory unit has appeared; It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of the various counters used for game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows starting prize-winning processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows a reach determination process. 4 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing; It is a flow chart which shows game state check processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the correspondence of a lottery mode flag, a support mode flag, a game state specific counter, and a game state determination value. 8 is a flowchart showing first display control processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a process for setting fluctuation end time; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows variable winning a prize device control processing. 9 is a flowchart showing second display control processing; It is a flow chart which shows opening and closing accessory control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing of a sub-controller; It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of the various counters used for the determination of a decorative design. 10 is a flowchart showing counter update processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing of a sub control device; 10 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows a reservation display setting process. It is a figure for demonstrating a jackpot classification. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 1st jackpot classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 2nd jackpot classification determination table. (a) is a diagram showing the storage configuration of a probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram showing the storage configuration of a complete loss/variation pattern table. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a probability variable jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table in a normal state. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of an opening/closing pattern control table; FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decorative design display apparatus in a normal state. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the decorative symbol display device when a big hit occurs. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decorative design display apparatus in chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decorative design display apparatus in gold mode. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of the decorative symbol display device during the roulette performance; It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of a decorative design display device when pending|holding display change processing is performed. It is a flow chart which shows a part of character object production|presentation setting processing. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a continuation of FIG. 98, which is a part of the role product effect setting process. (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of an "end" time/accessory effect pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of an "until next time" time/accessory effect pattern determination table. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the upper rotating body and the like in a diameter-reduced state; FIG. 4 is a rear view showing a part of the upper rotating body in a diameter-reduced state, etc. FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the upper rotating body and the like in a diameter-expanded state; It is a rear view which shows a part of upper rotary body etc. which are in a diameter-expanding state. FIG. 102 is a sectional view taken along line KK of FIG. 101; It is a front view showing a part of the lower movable accessory (right and left lower rotating bodies, etc.). It is a side view showing a part of the lower movable accessory (left and right lower rotating bodies, etc.). FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect using the upper rotating body; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the upper rotating body and the left and right lower rotating bodies are stopped (a stopped state without enlarged display) according to the first development effect pattern; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the upper rotating body and the left and right lower rotating bodies are stopped (weak/SMALL enlarged stop state) according to the second development effect pattern; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the upper rotating body and the left and right lower rotating bodies are stopped (strong/SMALL enlarged stop state) according to the third development effect pattern; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the upper rotating body and the left and right lower rotating bodies are stopped (weak/BIG enlargement stopped state) according to the fourth development effect pattern; FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mode in which the upper rotating body and the left and right lower rotating bodies are in a stopped state (strong/BIG enlargement stopped state) according to the fifth development effect pattern; It is a schematic diagram which shows the rotating body which concerns on another embodiment.

[First embodiment]
An embodiment of a pachinko machine as a gaming machine will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that constitutes its outer shell. However, in FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, nails and accessories arranged on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, and the like are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame-constituting portion 11a and a lower frame-constituting portion 11b made of wooden plate material, and a left frame-constituting portion 11c and a right side frame-constituting portion 11d made of aluminum alloy by extrusion molding. These frame-constituting parts 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame as a whole by detachable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame-constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. A space formed inside the outer frame 11 accommodates the inner frame 12 and the like.

An extension wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end in the width direction is formed on the right-side frame-constituting portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3 , a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked is provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 . A pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame open detection switch 92 (to be described later) protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the lower receiving portion 85 .

Further, a resin-made curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame-constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 protruding upward is integrally formed in the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87 . This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed with the inner frame 12 .

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically along the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38 .

A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening/closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame set 14 . Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12 . A detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 is provided as a ball receiving tray at the center of the lower portion thereof. can be stored in Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball extracting lever 25 for ejecting game balls from the inside of the lower tray 15 is provided.

A performance button 125 is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15. - 特許庁When the player presses the effect button 125, a predetermined effect is performed on the effect display device 42 or the like, which will be described later, or the content of the effect is changed.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, there is provided a game ball shooting handle (hereinafter simply referred to as "handle") 18 protruding forward. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown), an operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting an operation amount of an operation portion of the handle 18, and the like.

Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is shot by a shooting device 60 as a shooting means, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Also, the handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibition button 18a that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. As shown in FIG. When the shooting prohibition button 18a is pressed, shooting of game balls by the shooting device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is gripped. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the shooting of the game ball, or temporarily stop shooting the game ball while gripping the handle 18.例文帳に追加

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15 . The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a launching device 60, which will be described later, while aligning them in a row. When the upper tray 19 is filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray communication passage 71 and the discharge port 16, which will be described later.

A ball lending button 121 and a returning button 122 are provided on the upper plate 19. - 特許庁As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like, the ball lending button 121 is operated. A rented ball is supplied to the upper tray 19 . On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and return button 122 are unnecessary in a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine.

Furthermore, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123 . By pressing the ball extracting button 123, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 is opened and stored in the upper tray 19. The game ball is guided (dropped) to the lower tray 15. - 特許庁That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123 .

Further, the front face of the front frame set 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it. These light-emitting means play a role of increasing the effect during the game by changing and controlling the light-emitting mode such as lighting and blinking in accordance with the change of the game state at the time of a big win or a predetermined ready-to-win state.

For example, on the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 containing light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In addition, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the ring-shaped decorative portion 102 to light up in the event of a predetermined error. A large number of fine through-holes are formed in the annular illumination portion 102 above the error display lamps 104 so as to correspond to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. .

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14 . The glass unit 137 does not have a conventional front and rear pair of rectangular plate glasses that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but has a round shape as a whole and is attached after being assembled.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3 , a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101 . The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication path 71 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the outlet 16 of the lower tray 15 and an upper tray communication path 73 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the upper tray 19 .

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting game balls positioned in the lower tray communication passage 71 . Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and that the game balls are staying in the lower tray communication passage 71). be able to.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 4 and the like. At the lower front portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), there is a shooting device 60 and a shooting rail 61 for guiding game balls immediately after being shot from the shooting device 60. installed. In this embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is adopted as the launcher 60 .

In this embodiment, control is performed such that launching of the launching device 60 is prohibited based on the game ball being continuously detected for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch. On the other hand, when the stagnation of the game balls in the lower tray communication passage 71 is eliminated and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game balls are no longer detected continuously for a predetermined time), the launching of the shooting device 60 is permitted.

A ball feeder 63 is provided above the launcher 60 . The ball feeding device 63 guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the shooting position of the shooting device 60 by driving means such as a solenoid.

3 and 4, reference numeral 67 denotes a payout passage for guiding game balls paid out by a payout mechanism 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and an upper tray communication passage 73 (upper tray 19). and a passage leading to the lower tray communication passage 71 (lower tray 15).

Further, a shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like so as to close the outlet of the payout passage 67. It has become.

On the other hand, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the inlet-side rear end of the lower tray communication passage 71 . In the closed state of the front frame set 14, the inlet portions (ball inlet portions) of the lower tray communicating passage 71 and the upper tray communicating passage 73 and the dispensing passage 67 are adjacent to each other with a predetermined distance therebetween. A game ball can pass through the gap. As a result, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be put out flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side, pass through the lower tray communication path 71, and are paid out to the lower tray 15. It will happen.

As described above, the game board 30 is attached behind the window hole 39 to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral portion in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30, which serves as a game area, is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. As shown in FIG.

Here, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The game board 30 is provided with a rail 50 which is composed of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52 and guides the game ball shot from the shooting device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30 . The rail 50 may be a ball passage. As a result, the game ball shot with the rotating operation of the handle 18 is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the shooting rails 61 and 50 .

A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail constituting portion 51 . As a result, the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area is prevented from returning into the rail 50 again. Moreover, a return rubber 54 is attached to substantially the tip portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail-constituting portion 52 . A game ball shot with a force greater than or equal to a predetermined amount hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30 .

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 ends at the upper right portion of the game board 30 , and the inner rail component 51 ends at the lower right portion of the game board 30 . Therefore, the play area is defined by the rails 50 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the window holes 39 of the resin base 38 . However, until the game ball hit by the launching device 60 passes through the return ball preventing member 53 as a restricting means, it may flow backward on the rail 50. Excluded from the domain.

In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined distance between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball passage unit 70 receives a game ball dropped from the gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed leading to the plate 15 . The specific area may be the area where the return ball prevention member 53 is arranged. If a game ball shot from the shooting device 60 does not reach the return ball preventing member 53 and travels back along the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is discharged to the lower tray 15 through the foul ball passage 72. .

In addition, the game board 30 includes a general winning section 31, a variable winning device 32, a starting winning section 33 (specifically, a first starting winning section 33a and a second starting winning section 33b) as a starting ball winning means, a through A gate 34, a central winning unit 37 as variable ball entry means, and the like are arranged in through holes formed by router processing and attached from the front side of the game board 30 .

Further, the game board 30 is provided with ball entry detection switches (ball entry detection means) for detecting game balls entering the various ball entry means corresponding to the various ball entry means such as the general winning section 31. ing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning section 31, a count switch 223 is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 32, and the first starting A first start-up prize switch 224a is provided at a position corresponding to the prize-winning portion 33a, a second start-up prize switch 224b is provided at a position corresponding to the second start-up prize portion 33b, and a position corresponding to the through gate 34 is provided. A through gate switch 225 is provided.

As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins a prize) in various winning means such as the general winning section 31, the variable winning device 32, and the starting winning section 33, it is detected by various detection switches, and a predetermined number of balls are sent to the upper tray 19 or the lower tray 15. prize balls (game balls) are paid out. For example, if a ball enters the starting prize winning section 33, there are three prizes, if a ball enters the general prize winning section 31, there are five prizes, and if a ball enters the variable prize winning device 32, there are ten prizes. A ball is paid out.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that do not win various prize winning means such as the general prize winning portion 31 are discharged out of the game area through the out port 36. . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails and various members such as windmills in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls.

Here, the configuration of the central winning unit 37 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4, 40 to 45, and the like.

The center prize winning unit 37 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area (game board 30). The central winning unit 37 includes a housing (center frame) 400 forming an internal area 401 into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter, and a front panel 402 attached to the front opening of the housing 400. ing. The front panel 402 is made of a transparent member, and the internal area 401 can be seen through the front panel 402 .

A pair of left and right ball entry openings 403 are formed in the upper part of the housing 400 to serve as entrances for game balls flowing down the game area to enter the internal area 401 . In addition, the central winning unit 37 is provided with a pair of left and right blade members 404 for opening and closing the entrance opening 403, and a blade solenoid 405 (see FIG. 7) for operating the blade members 404. there is The "blade member 404" constitutes the "opening/closing member" in this embodiment.

Each blade member 404 is rotatably displaceable between a closed position for closing the corresponding ball entry opening 403 and an open position for opening it. When the blade member 404 is displaced to the closed position and the ball entry opening 403 is closed, the central winning unit 37 is closed and the game ball cannot enter the internal area 401 (ball cannot be entered). On the other hand, when the blade member 404 is displaced to the open position and the ball entry opening 403 is opened, the central prize winning unit 37 is in an open state, and the game ball can enter the internal area 401 (enter the ball). becomes.

Although details will be described later, the blade member 404 has a winning ball in the starting winning part 33 (the first starting winning part 33a or the second starting winning part 33b), and a winning lottery based on the winning ball. When winning a prize, it is in an open state for a predetermined time. In other words, the predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) in the present embodiment is when a small winning lottery is won based on the ball entering the starting winning part 33 (first starting winning part 33a or second starting winning part 33b). Equivalent to the case of establishment. Further, in this embodiment, the pair of left and right blade members 404 are configured to operate in synchronization with each other. is also in the closed position.

On the other hand, the internal area 401 includes a route sorting area 406 in which a game ball entered from the ball entry opening 403 is first guided, a winning lottery area 407 provided at the lower position, and further provided at the lower position. It is divided into a type lottery area 408 as a type lottery area and an accessory actuation lottery area 409 provided on the right side of the winning lottery area 407 .

First, the route distribution area 406 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42 and the like. In the route distribution area 406, a game ball entering the inner region 401 from the entrance opening 403 is temporarily guided to the rear side of the upper rear wall portion 400a of the housing 400, and then guided to the center of the route distribution area 406 in the left-right direction. An introduction passage 601 that guides, a drop passage 602 that causes game balls to fall downward from an exit portion 601a of the introduction passage 601 that opens in the center of the route distribution area 406 in the left-right direction, and a drop passage 602 A route distributing member 603 as a route distributing means provided, a normal guide passage 604 provided at a left position of the route distributing member 603 and capable of guiding game balls to the lottery area 407, and the route distributing member 603. A special guide passage (special passage) 605 is provided at the right position and can guide the game ball to the accessory operation lottery area 409 .

In this embodiment, the normal guide passage 604 and the like constitute a "first route", and the special guide passage 605 and the like constitute a "second route".

A pair of left and right inlets 601b of the lead-in passage 601 are provided with internal ball detection switches 437 as predetermined detection means for detecting passage of game balls that have entered from the ball entry opening 403, respectively.

In this embodiment, a game ball that enters the left ball entrance opening 403 always passes through the left entrance portion 601b, and a game ball that enters the right ball entrance opening 403 always passes through the right entrance portion 601b. A game ball entering the internal area 401 is always detected by either the left or right internal ball detection switch 437 .

In addition, in this embodiment, when game balls are detected by the internal ball detection switch 437, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 42, the route distribution member 603 includes a cylindrical shaft portion 611 having an axial hole 611a extending in the front-rear direction, a central piece portion 613 projecting upward from the shaft portion 611, and a shaft portion. A left piece 614 protruding leftward from 611 and a right piece 615 protruding rightward from shaft 611 are provided.

A shaft pin 610 is inserted through the shaft hole 611 a of the shaft portion 611 . The shaft pin 610 has its rear end supported by the upper rear wall portion 400a defining the back side of the drop passage 602, and its front end supported by the front panel 402 (bearing hole 402a) defining the front side of the drop passage 602. It is As a result, the route distribution member 603 is rotatably supported around the shaft pin 610 .

A projecting portion 617 having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front is formed below the route distribution member 603 . Normally, as shown in FIG. 41(a), the route distribution member 603 is positioned so that the central piece 613 is positioned at the center in the left-right direction (axial pin) by biasing means (maintaining means) such as a weight and a coil spring (not shown). 610 ), and the right piece 615 is tilted downward from the horizontal direction, and is maintained in the right tilted state by being biased by the right tilted surface of the protrusion 617 .

In this right tilted state, the tip 613a of the center piece 613 comes into contact with or comes close to the right side wall 602a of the drop passage 602, and the game ball falling down the drop passage 602 moves toward the special guide passage 605 on the right side. It becomes a state in which it is impossible to flow down to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side and a state in which it is possible to flow down to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side.

In other words, when the route sorting member 603 is tilted to the right in the normal state, the special guide passage 605 is closed by the route sorting member 603, while the normal guide passage 604 is open, and the ball falls down the drop passage 602. The game ball is guided to the left normal guide passage 604 along the left guide surface formed by the left side surface of the central piece portion 613 and the upper surface of the left piece portion 614 of the route distribution member 603 .

Along with this, the route distribution member 603 is rotated counterclockwise against the biasing force of the biasing means by the force received from the game ball contacting the left piece 614 (see FIG. 41(b)). ].

As a result, the route distribution member 603 tilts the center piece 613 leftward from the center position in the horizontal direction (the position of the shaft pin 610) for a predetermined time, and tilts the left piece 614 downward from the horizontal direction to form a protrusion. The left tilted state is urged by the left tilted surface of the portion 617 .

In such a left inclined state, the tip portion 613a of the center piece portion 613 comes into contact with or comes close to the left side wall portion 602b of the drop passage 602, and the game ball falling down the drop passage 602 moves toward the normal guide passage 604 on the left side. It becomes a state where it cannot flow down to the right side, and it becomes a state where it can flow down to the special guide passage 605 on the right side.

In other words, during the predetermined time period in which the route sorting member 603 is tilted to the left, the normal guide passage 604 is closed by the route sorting member 603, while the special guide passage 605 is opened. As a result, the game ball falling down the drop path 602 at this timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 41, the second game ball B1 that is normally guided to the guide path 604 and the If there is a game ball B2), the game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side along the right guide surface composed of the right side surface of the central piece portion 613 and the upper surface of the right piece portion 615 of the route distribution member 603. will be taken.

Once the route distribution member 603 is in the left tilted state, the biasing force of the biasing means (when the game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side, the game ball from contacting the right piece portion 615 41(c)].

In this embodiment, the state in which the route distribution member 603 is in the right tilted posture, which is the first posture, corresponds to the first state, and the state in which the route distribution member 603 is in the left tilted posture, which is the second posture, corresponds to the second state. Equivalent to. In addition, in the present embodiment, the route distribution member 603, such as the first state and the second state, directs the game ball to the first route including the normal guide passage 604 and the like, and the second route including the special guide passage 605 and the like. A flowable state constitutes a specific state. Of course, the specific state is not limited to these, and other configurations may be adopted.

Next, the structure of the accessory operation lottery area 409 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 40, the accessory activation lottery area 409 is provided with a special gate 650 through which game balls guided by the special guide passage 605 can enter (pass). The passage widths of the special guide passage 605 and the special gate 650 are set to a width through which game balls can pass one by one. Also, the game ball that has passed through the special gate 650 is discharged outside the internal area 401 (on the back side of the game board 30) through a discharge passage (not shown). The "special gate 650" constitutes the "opportunity ball entry means" in this embodiment.

The special gate 650 is provided with a special gate switch 651 for detecting game balls passing therethrough. The "special gate switch 651" constitutes the "momentary ball entry detection means" in this embodiment.

When a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651, an operation assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to operate a movable accessory 722, which will be described later. Then, when winning the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 operates for a predetermined time. The details of the configuration and operation mode of the movable accessory 722 will be described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if game balls are detected by the special gate switch 651, no prize balls are paid out (the number of prize balls is 0). Not limited to this, when game balls are detected by the special gate switch 651, a predetermined number of prize balls may be paid out.

Next, the configuration of the lottery area 407 will be described in detail. A winning/failing lottery area 407 is provided with a rotary unit 410 as a winning/failing sorting means. The rotator unit 410 has a function of distributing the destination of game balls guided from the route distribution area 406 via the normal guide passage 604 to either the type lottery area 408 or outside the internal area 401 . The passage width of the normal guide passage 604 is set to a width through which game balls can pass one by one.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the rotator unit 410 includes a unit base 411 serving as a base portion, and a unit cover 412 attached to the unit base 411 so as to cover the upper surface thereof.

The unit base 411 has a substantially disc-shaped rotating body 414 mounted on an installation table 413 projecting from the upper surface thereof, and a rotating body motor 415 for rotating the rotating body 414 is mounted. . On the other hand, a gear mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the driving force of the rotating body motor 415 to the rotating body 414 is provided on the lower surface side of the unit base 411 .

The rotating body 414 is installed such that the rotating shaft is inclined with respect to the vertical direction so that the upper surface thereof faces obliquely upward on the front side. The rotator motor 415 is composed of a stepping motor and is driven and controlled by pulse signals output from the main controller 261 . With such a configuration, the rotating body 414 is configured to always rotate in a constant direction (counterclockwise direction in this embodiment) at a constant cycle.

The rotating body 414 is formed with pocket portions 416 each capable of receiving one game ball at three locations on the outer peripheral edge thereof. The three pocket portions 416 are divided into one special pocket portion 416a and the other (two) non-special pocket portions 416b.

The non-special pocket portion 416 b has a bottom wall portion 417 and opens to the outer peripheral side and upper side of the rotating body 414 . The upper surface of the bottom wall portion 417 is inclined downward toward the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414 .

On the other hand, the special pocket portion 416a is open to the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414, upward and downward, and does not have the bottom wall portion 417 like the non-special pocket portion 416b. In addition, the peripheral portion of the special pocket portion 416a is made of a colored resin material different from that of other portions. This makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the special pocket portion 416a and the non-special pocket portion 416b.

The unit cover 412 includes a substantially cylindrical cylindrical wall portion 431 arranged to surround the rotating body 414, and a stage portion 432 formed to extend outward from the cylindrical wall portion 431. ing.

An upper edge portion of the cylindrical wall portion 431 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the stage portion 432, and a gate portion 435 is provided on the front side thereof to allow communication between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical wall portion 431. .

In addition, the upper surface of the stage portion 432 is configured so that a game ball can roll. A portion of the stage portion 432 located behind the gate portion 435 is inclined downward toward the front and toward the cylinder wall portion 431 side, and a portion located in front of the gate portion 435 is inclined backward (toward the gate portion 435 side). downward sloping.

As a result, the game ball guided to the rear side of the stage portion 432 through the outlet portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604 opened in the central rear wall portion 400b of the housing 400 defining the back side of the lottery area 407 is While the movement toward the rotating body 414 is restricted by the cylindrical wall portion 431 , it rolls clockwise or counterclockwise on the stage portion 432 toward the near side, swings left and right several times in front of the gate portion 435 , and so on. Then, when the relative positions of the gate portion 435 and the pocket portion 416 (the special pocket portion 416a or the non-special pocket portion 416b) of the rotating body 414 match, they enter the pocket portion 416. .

Further, the unit base 411 includes a first V prize passage 427 for guiding game balls housed in the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 to the type lottery area 408, and a game ball housed in the non-special pocket portion 416b. and an out passage 428 for discharging to the outside of the internal region 401 is provided.

The first V winning passage 427 is formed slightly downstream of the gate portion 435 with respect to the rotating direction (counterclockwise direction) of the rotor 414 , that is, on the right side of the gate portion 435 . On the other hand, the out passage 428 is formed further downstream than the first V winning passage 427 , that is, at the right back position of the first V winning passage 427 .

In addition, the entrance side of the first V winning path 427 is opened on the upper surface of the installation table 413, and is configured so that the pocket portion 416 of the rotating body 414 can pass thereabove. Then, the game ball entering the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 through the gate portion 435 moves to the position between the special pocket portion 416a and the entrance portion of the first V winning passage 427 as the rotating body 414 rotates. match, the ball drops downward from the special pocket portion 416 a and enters the first V prize passage 427 . At a position corresponding to the first V winning path 427 , a cylindrical wall portion 431 protruding downward from the back surface of the stage portion 432 restricts game balls from falling out of the side surface of the rotating body 414 .

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414 through the gate portion 435, as the rotating body 414 rotates, the non-special pocket portion 416b and the entrance portion of the first V winning passage 427 Even if the positions match, the game ball housed in the non-special pocket portion 416b is prevented from falling (entering) into the first V winning passage 427 by the bottom wall portion 417 provided in the non-special pocket portion 416b. It's becoming

A notch portion 431 a is formed in the lower edge portion of the cylindrical wall portion 431 at a position corresponding to the out passage 428 . As a result, the rotating body 414 rotates further, and when the positions of the non-special pocket portion 416b containing the game ball and the out passage 428 match, the game ball contained in the non-special pocket portion 416b moves toward the bottom wall. Due to the inclination of the portion 417 , the ball moves to the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414 and falls (enters) into the out passage 428 through the notch portion 431 a of the cylindrical wall portion 431 .

The housing 400 is formed with a connection passage 429 connected to the exit of the first V prize passage 427, and the connection passage 429 establishes communication between the first V prize passage 427 and the type lottery area 408.

Also, the first V winning path 427 is provided with a first special ball entry detection switch 461 as special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball passing therethrough. When a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 and is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, the right to generate a jackpot state (special game state) is granted. becomes. Therefore, the "1st V winning path 427" constitutes the "special ball entry means" in this embodiment.

When a game ball enters the 1st V winning path 427 and generates a big hit, the regulation time of 30 seconds elapses after the big winning opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Alternatively, on the condition that a prescribed number of eight game balls are won in the variable prize winning device 32, one opening/closing operation until the variable prize winning device 32 is closed is regarded as one prize state, and this is repeated for a predetermined number of times (predetermined rounds).

In this embodiment, as the types of the big win state, the "3 round big win" in which the above-mentioned special prize state (round) is repeated three times, the "7 round big win" in which the above-mentioned special prize state (round) is repeated seven times, and the above-mentioned special prize state A "15-round jackpot" is set in which (round) is repeated 15 times.

However, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the first special ball detection switch 461 detects the ball, instead of immediately starting the jackpot state, the jackpot is won in the type lottery area 408. After the type of state is determined, the jackpot state is initiated.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game ball that enters the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and passes through the first V winning passage 427 is detected by the first special entering ball detection switch 461, You will be guided to area 408 .

On the other hand, the out passage 428 is provided with a non-special entering ball detection switch 462 for detecting game balls passing through and discharged out of the internal region 401 .

In addition, in the upper edge of the cylindrical wall portion 431, a predetermined circumferential section including the upper side of the entrance portions of the first V winning passage 427 and the out passage 428 is formed so as to extend toward the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical wall portion 431. A formed ledge 440 is provided.

The protruding portion 440 is configured to cover from above a part of each pocket portion 416 located therebelow (an area of about half of the rotating body 414 in the radial direction). As a result, another game ball rides on the upper side of the game ball that has entered the predetermined pocket portion 416, and the two game balls that are vertically overlapped are continuously connected to the first V winning passage 427 or the out passage 428. To avoid a situation in which a game ball enters or jumps over a cylindrical wall part 431 for some reason and directly enters a pocket part 416 at a position coinciding with a first V winning passage 427 and an out passage 428.例文帳に追加can be done.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, a bypass mechanism section 721 is provided at the rear portion of the rotor unit 410. As shown in FIGS. The bypass mechanism section 721 includes a movable accessory 722 as a movable body (movable member) assembled in an opening accommodating section 433 formed at the most upstream portion of the stage section 432, and a movable mechanism for operating the movable accessory 722. It is provided with a movable accessory solenoid 725 as member driving means. The movable accessory solenoid 725 is driven and controlled by the main controller 261 constituting movable body control means.

The movable accessory 722 is assembled so as to be slidable (elevating) in the vertical direction. In a normal state in which the movable accessory solenoid 725 is in a non-excited state, the movable accessory 722 is almost entirely accommodated in the opening accommodating portion 433, and its upper surface is substantially continuous with the upper surface of the stage portion 432. It is in a state [see FIGS. 44(a) and 45(a)]. The accommodation state of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to the non-advantageous state in this embodiment.

On the other hand, when the movable accessory solenoid 725 is energized and the bypass mechanism 721 is activated, the movable accessory 722 rises and a part of it protrudes upward from the upper surface of the stage 432 [Fig. 44(b) and FIG. 45(b)]. The action of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to the predetermined action in this embodiment, and the operating state of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to the advantageous state in this embodiment.

On the upper surface of the movable accessory 722, there are a left inclined portion 727 that gently slopes downward toward the left from the approximate center in the horizontal direction, and a right inclined portion 727 that gently slopes downward toward the right from the approximate center in the horizontal direction. A ramp 728 is formed.

In a normal state in which almost the entire movable accessory 722 is accommodated in the opening accommodation portion 433, the exit portion of the normal guide passage 604 opened in the middle rear wall portion 400b of the housing 400 at a position above the movable accessory 722. The game ball drawn out from 604 a is guided to the left or right of stage section 432 by left inclined portion 727 or right inclined portion 728 on the upper surface of movable accessory 722 .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b), inside the movable accessory 722, a second V winning path 730 is provided. The passage width of the 2nd V winning passage 730 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one by one.

When the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage portion 432, the movable accessory 722 blocks the front of the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604, and the entrance portion 730a of the second V prize passage 730 and the normal guide passage 44(b) and 45(b)]. As a result, the game ball can enter from the normal guide path 604 to the second V winning path 730, and both paths 604 and 730 are in a communicating state.

In addition, when the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage portion 432, the exit portion 730b of the second V prize passage 730 faces the entrance portion 737a of the bypass passage 737 formed on the rear side of the middle rear wall portion 400b of the housing 400. It will be in the facing state. As a result, the game ball can enter the bypass passage 737 from the second V winning passage 730, and both passages 730 and 737 are in a communicating state.

That is, when the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage portion 432, the normal guide passage 604 and the bypass passage 737 are in communication through the second V winning passage 730 so that the game ball can pass through.

The passage width of the bypass passage 737 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one by one. An exit portion 737 b of the bypass passage 737 opens in a lower rear wall portion 400 c of the housing 400 that defines the back side of the type lottery area 408 above the 15R ball entrance 731 . As a result, when the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage portion 432, the game balls normally guided to the guide passage 604 are directly guided to the guide passage 604 without going through the rotor unit 410 and the type sorting mechanism portion 741, which will be described later. It becomes possible to guide to the ball entrance 731. That is, by activating the movable accessory 722, it is possible to avoid sorting by the rotator unit 410 and the type sorting mechanism section 741. FIG.

The bypass passage 737 is provided with a second special ball entry detection switch 738 as special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball passing therethrough. When the game ball enters the bypass passage 737 and is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the right to generate a big hit state (special game state) is granted. .

However, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a ball is detected by the second special ball detection switch 738, the jackpot state is not immediately started, and the game ball is 15R ball. After the ball hits the mouth 731, the jackpot state is started.

In addition, when the game ball remains in the second V winning passage 730 and the movable accessory 722 descends and returns to the accommodation state, the remaining ball is guided to the bypass passage 737 through the lower passage 739. , and is configured to be detected by the second special incoming ball detection switch 738 .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the first special ball-entering detection switch 461 or the second special ball-entering detection switch 738, the upper plate 19 (or the lower plate 15) is 10 It is configured such that one game ball is paid out. Of course, the number of game balls to be paid out in response to these entering ball detection switches is not limited to ten, and may be any other number. Further, it may be configured such that no game ball is paid out when the game ball is detected by these entering ball detection switches (the number of prize balls is 0).

Hereinafter, the above-mentioned "jackpot caused by a game ball entering the 1st V winning passage 427" and "jackpot caused by a game ball entering the bypass passage 737 via the 2nd V winning passage 730" are common. It may be called a "V winning jackpot".

Next, the type lottery area 408 will be described in detail. In the type lottery area 408, there are a 15R ball entrance 731 that gives a "15 rounds" jackpot state (15 rounds jackpot) when a game ball enters, and a "7 rounds" when a game ball enters. A 7R ball entrance 732 where a jackpot state (7 round jackpot) is awarded, and a 3R ball entrance 733 where a "3 round" jackpot state (3 round jackpot) is awarded when a gaming ball enters. is provided. Here, the "15R ball entrance 731", the "7R ball entrance 732" and the "3R ball entrance 733" constitute the "type corresponding ball entrance means" in this embodiment.

In addition, the 15R ball entrance 731 is provided with a 15R ball entrance detection switch 734 for detecting a game ball that has entered here. Similarly, the 7R ball entrance 732 is provided with a 7R ball entrance detection switch 735 that detects a game ball that has entered here, and the 3R ball entrance 733 is provided with a 3R that detects a game ball that has entered here. A ball entry detection switch 736 is provided.

In the type lottery area 408, the destination of the game ball led to the type lottery area 408 via the 1st V winning passage 427 and the connection passage 429 is indicated by a 15R entrance 731, a 7R entrance 732, or a 3R entrance. 733 is provided as a type sorting means (type determining means).

The type sorting mechanism unit 741 includes a start table 742 guided by the game balls drawn out from the outlet part 429a of the connection passage 429, a first bridge plate 744 guided by the game balls passing through the start table 742, and the A second bridge plate 745 to which the game ball that has passed through the first bridge plate 744 is guided, and a 15R guide that guides the game ball that has passed through the second bridge plate 745 and guides the game ball to the 15R ball entrance 731. A passageway 746 is provided.

The start table 742 is installed in the upper left part of the type lottery area 408, and its upper surface slopes downward to the right.

The first bridge plate 744 is installed on the right side of the start table 742 and slightly below the start table 742. The left end portion of the first bridge plate 744 is supported so as to be rotatable with the longitudinal direction as the axial direction, and the right end side is provided as a free end. It is

The rotation shaft of the first bridge plate 744 is connected to a swinging mechanism (not shown) consisting of a motor or the like on the back side of the lower rear wall portion 400c of the housing 400, and the swinging mechanism is controlled by the main controller 261. The first bridge plate 744 is configured to swing up and down by being driven and controlled.

Specifically, the upper surface of the first bridge plate 744 is tilted slightly downward to the right, and the forward position guides the game ball to the second bridge plate 745. , and a drop position that guides the game ball to the 3R entrance 733 so as to be displaceable.

Then, when the game ball guided to the first bridge plate 744 via the start table 742 rolls to the right end of the first bridge plate 744, if the first bridge plate 744 is in the advance position, The game ball is guided to the second bridge plate 745 .

On the other hand, when the game ball guided by the first bridge plate 744 rolls to the right end of the first bridge plate 744, if the first bridge plate 744 is in the falling position, the game ball enters 3R. It is guided to mouth 733 .

In other words, the first bridge board 744 has a function of allocating the destination of the game ball guided via the start stand 742 to either the 3R ball entrance 733 or the second bridge board 745 .

The second bridge plate 745 is installed to the right of and slightly below the first bridge plate 744, and its left end is pivotally supported with the front-rear direction as the axial direction, and the right end is a free end. is provided in

The rotation shaft of the second bridge plate 745 is connected to a swinging mechanism (not shown) consisting of a motor or the like on the back side of the lower rear wall portion 400c of the housing 400, and the swinging mechanism is controlled by the main controller 261. The second bridge plate 745 is configured to swing up and down by being driven and controlled.

Specifically, the upper surface of the second bridge plate 745 is slightly downwardly inclined toward the right, and the forward position where the game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746, and the upper surface is greatly downwardly inclined, It is configured to be displaceable between the falling position that guides the game ball to the 7R entrance 732 .

Then, when the game ball guided by the second bridge plate 745 rolls to the right end of the second bridge plate 745, if the second bridge plate 745 is in the advance position, the game ball moves to the 15R guide path. You will be directed to 746.

On the other hand, when the game ball guided to the second bridge plate 745 rolls to the right end of the second bridge plate 745, if the second bridge plate 745 is in the falling position, the game ball enters 7R. It is guided to mouth 732 .

That is, the second bridge plate 745 has a function of distributing the destination of the game ball guided through the first bridge plate 744 to either the 7R entrance 732 or the 15R guide passage 746 .

The 15R guide passage 746 is installed on the right side of the second bridge plate 745 and slightly below, and its upper surface slopes downward toward the 15R entrance 731 on the right.

In this embodiment, the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 745 are configured to swing at different cycles. For example, the first bridge plate 744 is configured to swing slightly faster than the second bridge plate 745 .

In addition, in this embodiment, after the first special ball detection switch 461 detects the ball, any one of the 15R ball ball detection switch 734, the 7R ball ball detection switch 735, or the 3R ball ball detection switch 736 is activated. When the entry detection is performed, the jackpot state of the corresponding type is started. Also, after the second special ball detection switch 738 is detected, when the 15R ball detection switch 734 is detected, the jackpot state corresponding to the 15 round jackpot is started. It has become.

From here, the description of the game board 30 is returned to. As shown in FIG. 4, the first starting prize winning section 33a is provided on the lower left and lower right sides of the central prize winning unit 37. As shown in FIG. In addition, the second starting prize winning section 33 b is provided directly below the central prize winning unit 37 .

Further, the second starting winning portion 33b has a pair of opening/closing members 33c that can be opened and closed on both sides thereof. In this embodiment, when the starting opening opening/closing member 33c is in the closed state, the game ball is configured to be unable to enter the second starting winning portion 33b.

In other words, the first start winning part 33a allows the game ball to enter at all times, while the second start winning part 33b is used for the entry assist lottery based on the game ball passing through the through gate 34. When the game is won, the starting port opening/closing member 33c is opened, and the game ball can enter the second starting winning part 33b.

Not limited to this, when the starting opening opening/closing member 33c is in a closed state, the game ball becomes difficult to enter the second starting winning part 33b, and when winning the ball assist lottery, opening and closing the starting opening It may be configured such that the member 33c is in an open state and the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning portion 33b.

As described above, the first start-up winning section 33a is provided with the first start-up winning switch 224a for detecting a game ball that has entered the first start-up winning section 33a. Similarly, the second start prize winning section 33b is provided with a second start prize winning switch 224b for detecting a game ball entered here. Each starting winning switch 224a, 224b constitutes the "starting winning ball detection means" in the present embodiment.

Then, although the details will be described later, when the game ball is detected by the first start winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b, it becomes a "hit" or a "loss" advantageous to the player. A lottery will be held to determine whether or not

The "hit" in the win/fail lottery includes a "small win" in which the blade member 404 of the central prize winning unit 37 is opened and a "big win" in which the big prize opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is opened.

In addition, when a winning lottery is performed based on detection of a ball by the first start winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b, the result of the winning lottery is indicated on the special display device 43, which will be described later. A variable display and a stop display are performed for this purpose.

In the present embodiment, a common lottery is performed when the first start winning switch 224a detects the entry of a ball and when the second start winning switch 224b detects the entry of a ball. , The common special display device 43 is configured to perform variable display, but the first variable display for teaching the result of the lottery performed based on the detection by the first start winning switch 224a is performed. A special display device and a second special display device that performs variable display for teaching the result of the winning lottery performed based on the detection by the second start winning switch 224b may be provided separately. The first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b may be used as the first or second opportunity winning ball detection means. Furthermore, when adopting such a configuration, each variable display is stored separately, and the corresponding variable display is digested in the order in which it was stored, or one is prioritized over the other. It may be configured as In addition, when adopting such a configuration, the distribution ratio of the type of the big win state to be given when winning the winning lottery may be made different or may be made the same.

In the game areas on both the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, there are formed downflow areas in which game balls can flow down. The through gates 34 are arranged in the flow-down areas on the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, respectively, and are configured so that the game balls flowing down here can pass through one by one. The flow area on the right side of the central winning unit 37 may be set as the first flow route, and the flow area on the left side may be set as the second route. Also, the through gate 34 is provided with a through gate switch 225 for detecting game balls passing through the through gate 34 . When a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball-entering assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not the second starting winning portion 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is to be opened. Then, when the player wins the ball-entering assist lottery, the second start winning portion 33b (the start opening opening/closing member 33c) is opened for a specified time.

In the upper right part of the game board 30, there is a through-gate display device (ordinary symbol display device) 41 that displays the lottery result of the ball-entering assist lottery based on the ball entering (ball passing) into the through-gate 34, and each start winning part. A special display device (special symbol display device) 43 for displaying the lottery results of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the 33a and 33b, and the lottery for the operation assist lottery based on the ball entering the special gate 650 (ball passing). A special gate display 44 is provided for displaying the results. The "special gate display device 44" constitutes the "display means" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the through gate display device 41 is composed of two lamps, the special display device 43 constituting the first display means is composed of eight lamps, and the special gate display device 44 is composed of two lamps. It is

The configuration of these display devices 41, 43, and 44 is not particularly limited to the configuration described above. It may be configured by a different display device such as a display device.

In addition, in the special display device 43, when a game ball enters the starting winning portion 33 (first starting winning portion 33a or second starting winning portion 33b), a variable display (switching display) is started, and after a predetermined time, when the variable display is stopped, a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery is displayed. The first starting winning part 33a or the second starting winning part 33b may be used as the first or second opportunity ball entry means. Furthermore, the display contents of the special display device 43 are directly controlled by the main control device 261, which will be described later, so that the result of the winning lottery is definitively displayed.

In the case of winning a jackpot in such a winning lottery, the specified time of 30 seconds has elapsed after the large winning opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 was switched from the closed state to the open state, or the variable winning device 32 On the condition that a specified number of 8 game balls wins, one opening and closing operation until the closed state is regarded as one special prize state, and this is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). ) is given.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, only when a "jackpot" is won in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the starting prize winning section 33 (the first starting prize winning section 33a or the second starting prize winning section 33b). Instead, when a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414, and the game ball is detected by the first special entering ball detection switch 461, the movable accessory 722 ( A game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the second V winning passage 730), and when the game ball is detected by the second special entering detection switch 738, a big win state (V winning big win) also occurs.

Also, during the variable display of the special display device 43, when a new game ball enters the starting winning section 33 (first starting winning section 33a or second starting winning section 33b), the corresponding variable display is , after the end of the variable display being performed at that time. That is, the variable display of the special display device 43 is put on standby (suspended). The maximum number of times that the variable display is suspended is determined for each pachinko machine model. , a total of four variable displays are reserved.

Further, the number of suspension times of the variable display of the special display device 43 is displayed by a special display device suspension lamp 47 provided in the vicinity of the special display device 43 . The special display device suspension lamp 47 of the present embodiment is composed of four lamps, and the number of suspensions is indicated by appropriately switching the ON/OFF state of each lamp.

In addition, when a game ball newly wins the start winning part 33 during the big win or the small win, the variable display for that amount is also suspended, and the variable display is executed after the big win state or the small win state ends. be done.

In the through-gate display device 41, when a game ball passes through the through-gate 34, a variable display (switching display) for displaying the lottery result of the ball entry assist lottery is started, and after a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped. When doing so, a mode corresponding to the result of the entry assist lottery is displayed. Here, when the lottery result of the ball-entering assist lottery is a lottery result corresponding to the opening of the starting port opening/closing member 33c, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through-gate display device 41, and the variable display is stopped. After that, the starting port opening/closing member 33c is opened. Further, the through-gate display device 41 is directly controlled by the main control device 261, which will be described later, to display the result of the ball-entering assist lottery.

Further, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display of the display device 41 for the through gate, the variable display for that amount is performed after the end of the variable display being performed at that time. It is configured. That is, the variable display of the through-gate display device 41 is put on standby (suspended). The maximum number of times the variable display is suspended is determined for each pachinko machine model. The gate holding lamp 48 is turned on to display. The through-gate suspension lamp 48 of the present embodiment is composed of four lamps, and the number of suspensions is taught by appropriately switching the ON/OFF state of each lamp.

In the special gate display device 44, when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, a variable display (switching display) for displaying the lottery result of the operation assist lottery is started, and after a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped. At that time, a mode corresponding to the result of the operation assist lottery is displayed. Here, when the lottery result of the operation assist lottery is the winning result of activating the movable accessory 722, after the predetermined stop result is displayed on the special gate display device 44 and the variable display is stopped, the movable Role 722 is activated. Further, the display contents of the special gate display device 44 are directly controlled by the main control device 261, which will be described later, so that the result of the operation assist lottery is definitively displayed.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 and during the operation of the movable accessory 722, the game ball newly passes through the special gate 650 and is activated by the special gate switch 651. Even if it is detected, the variation display (actuation assist lottery result) for that amount is not withheld.

A performance display device 42 is provided above the central winning unit 37 . The effect display device 42 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. In the effect display device 42, auxiliary display contents are determined by the sub-control device 262 based on commands from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the variable display and lottery results displayed on the special display device 43. , the display is performed by a display control device 45, which will be described later.

The variable winning device 32 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area (game board 30). In addition, the variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and when a big win occurs, the big winning opening opening/closing member 32a is opened so that the game balls can enter the big winning opening. It is in an open state.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, and some of them are arranged so as to be overlapped in the front and back, and a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. and a resin protective cover, etc. are attached. Since the dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally called the back pack, the unit is called "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the rear configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the rear surface of the game board 30, a resin-made frame cover 213 that covers the center winning unit 37 and the like from behind is provided so as to protrude rearward. A display control device 45 and a sub-control device 262 are detachably attached to the back side of the frame cover 213 .

The display control device 45 is housed in a substrate box 45 a and fixed to the rear side of the frame cover 213 . The sub-controller 262 is accommodated in a substrate box 262a and fixed to the rear side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). Also, the board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning section 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning section 33 and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball recovery mechanism (not shown) for recovering game balls that have won prizes in various prize winning means. The game balls collected by this ball collecting mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 which will be described later, and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 .

Also, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261 . More specifically, a substrate box 263 having a main controller 261 mounted thereon is rotatably pivoted to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and these box base and box cover are connected by a sealing member. The circuit board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

Further, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board (not shown) electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223 and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. . This first board relay board relays the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main controller 261, and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 via a cable connector.

Further, the back frame set 215 is provided with a second board relay board (not shown) electrically connected to various switches provided in the central winning unit 37 via cable connectors. Specifically, the second board relay board includes an internal ball entry detection switch 437, a first special ball entry detection switch 461, a non-special entry ball detection switch 462, a round ball entry detection switch (15R entry detection switch 734, 7R entry It is electrically connected to the ball detection switch 735, the 3R ball entry detection switch 736), the second special ball entry detection switch 738, and the special gate switch 651, respectively. This second board relay board relays various switches provided in the central winning unit 37 and the main controller 261, and like the first board relay board, it connects with the main controller 261 via a cable connector. electrically connected.

On the other hand, the start winning switches 224a and 224b for detecting the ball entering the start winning portions 33a and 33b are directly connected to the main controller 261 via a connector cable without going through the relay board.

Under the above configuration, the detection results detected by the various incoming ball detection switches are taken into the main controller 261 . Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation of each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls is sent. are paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225, the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, the round entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, and the special gate switch 651).

In addition, although not shown, on the back side of the game board 30, a solenoid for opening and closing the large winning opening opening/closing member 32a is provided by the variable winning device 32. A starting port solenoid is provided for opening and closing the pair of starting port opening/closing members 33c. The back frame set 215 is also provided with a third board relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and the main controller 261 .

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is formed by integrating a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 . The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external terminal plate 240 is provided on the upper left portion of the back pack unit 203 (upper right portion in FIG. 5).

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying transmission of various kinds of information to a game hall computer or the like, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For the sake of convenience, no reference numerals are attached, but for example, terminals for outputting information about the current game state (jackpot state, time reduction mode, etc.), front frame set 14 detected by open detection switches 91 and 92 described later, and inner A terminal for outputting information about the opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information about various error states such as ball entry error, lower tray full error, no ball error, payout error, payout from payout control device 311 A terminal or the like is provided for outputting information about the number of winning balls.

The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and has a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which left and right side surfaces and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213 . However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to cover the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It will happen.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354 . Namely, above the protective cover portion 354, a tank 355 which opens upward is provided, and the tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. Below the tank 355 is connected a tank rail 356 which has, for example, two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and is gently inclined toward the downstream side. Concatenated. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and payout of the required number of game balls is appropriately performed by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

In the payout mechanism section 352, a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power supply from the outside is installed. there is The power switch board 382 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and that can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow in. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging the pachinko machine 10 to the outside is formed.

That is, the game balls that have won prizes in the general prize winning section 31 and the like are collected via the ball recovery mechanism of the back frame set 215 and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217 . The out port 36 is similarly connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and game balls that have not won any winning means are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute.

In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also possible to

In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 are detachably attached in a state of being stacked back and forth. It is

The firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313 a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251 . For the sake of convenience, the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices, but they are actually configured by one substrate (printed circuit board).

Also, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board box 311a housing the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 housing the above-described main control device 261, so that a trace of the opening of the board box 311a remains. It's becoming

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313).

The board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Also, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 projecting outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball clogging occurs in the payout motor, the payout motor is rotated forward or reverse to clear the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 projecting outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and even in the event of a power failure, it can retain the state at the time of the power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. to put in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 . The locking device 600 is provided with a cylinder lock 600a (see FIG. 1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. A key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and turned to one side to open the lock. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating it in the other direction. In this embodiment, inner frame 12 is locked to outer frame 11 and front frame set 14 is locked to inner frame 12 .

As described above, the right-side frame-constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). reference). As a result, it becomes difficult to insert a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right portion of the front side of the inner frame 12 (the right side of the launching device 60), and FIG. As shown in , an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection part that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection part faces forward, The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection portion faces rearward. When the detector is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detector is pushed toward the switch body and retracted into the switch body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261 . That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14 and is turned off. It turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is turned off by pressing the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch 92 is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The main controller 261 (main substrate) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The main controller 261 constitutes special game state imparting means, opening/closing control means, and the like in this embodiment.

The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. Also, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be formed into one chip, but may be formed into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like. ) and a backup area 503a.

The RAM 503 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. All data stored in the

The backup area 503a is designed to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned off when the power is turned off due to a power cut or the like. (similarly)) and the values of each register, I/O, etc. are stored. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and conversely, restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is performed when the power is turned on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation; the same applies hereinafter). is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when power is shut off due to power failure. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus, a data bus, and the like. Connected to the input/output port 505 are a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, a through gate display device 41, a special display device 43, a special gate display device 44, and the like, which will be described later. With this configuration, the through gate display device 41 , the special display device 43 and the special gate display device 44 are directly controlled by the main controller 261 . On the other hand, the effect display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262 .

In addition, although illustration of various relay boards etc. is omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes a general winning switch 221, a count switch 223, a start winning switch 224a, 224b, a through gate switch 225, an internal ball detection switch 437, Special entry detection switches 461, 738, non-special entry detection switch 462, round entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, special gate switch 651, various detection switches that can constitute predetermined detection means, various substrates, blades A blade solenoid 405 that opens and closes the member 404, a rotating body motor 415 that rotates the rotating body 414, a movable accessory solenoid 725 that vertically moves the movable accessory 722, and swings the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 745. Various electric parts such as a motor that drives the motor are connected. In other words, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. It includes a RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc., an input/output port 554, a bus line 555, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown). It has The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 551 .

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551 , the ROM 552 and the RAM 553 via a bus line 555 and also to the display control device 45 . Further, the input/output port 554 is connected with the speaker SP, the performance button 125, various illumination parts, and the lamps 102 and 104. FIG.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to perform display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a production pattern command such as a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and displays on the production display device 42 Let As described above, in the present embodiment, the special display device 43 controlled by the main control device 261 displays whether or not it is a hit, and the effect display device 42 controlled by the sub-control device 262 , a display matching the display of the special display device 43 is performed.

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358 . A CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 storing control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory and the like.

Similar to the RAM 503 of the main controller 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. data is backed up. If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

Backup area 513a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned on again, the stack pointer at the time of power cut, each register, This is an area for storing values such as I/O. Writing to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In the work area, a payout permission flag is set to allow the payout of prize balls by the payout control device 311, a command reception flag is set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and the main control device 261 A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of prize balls, and is turned on when a specific command permitting the payout of prize balls is transmitted from the main controller 261 and the specific command is received. or when it returns to the state before power-off. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initialization process of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a There are three payout return commands sent in the case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. It is turned off when returning to the previous state, and is turned off when the received command is determined by the command determination process.

The command buffer consists of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 . The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the RAM erasing switch circuit 543, the main controller 261, the firing controller 312, the dispensing device 358, and the like.

The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (ball rental unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. and are electrically connected to each other, take in the command of the player's ball lending operation, and output it to the card unit. Note that the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted in a cash machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit.

The shooting control device 312 permits or prohibits shooting of game balls by the shooting device 60, and the shooting device 60 is allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing prohibition button 18a ( 1) is not operated, the shooting device 60 is driven, and game balls are shot at predetermined intervals with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18. FIG. In this embodiment, it is configured so that it can be fired at intervals of about 0.6 seconds (about 100 shots per minute).

The display control device 45 follows the instruction from the sub-control device 262 and executes the variable display of the decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 . The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. and An input/output port 554 of the sub-controller 262 is connected to the input port 527 . Also, the CPU 521 , program ROM 522 , work RAM 523 and VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530 . An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and the effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529. FIG.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command, and controls the VDP 526. (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the effect display device 42 is performed.

A program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and a work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 521. is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the effect display device 42. By rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the effect display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the effect display device 42 .

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 42 . Since the VDP 526 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

In addition, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM deletion switch 323. and

The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating power to each of the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24V power supply supplied from the outside, and generates +12V power supply for driving various switches, motors, etc., +5V power supply for logic, backup power supply for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+12V power source, +5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311 . Similarly, various switches, motors, and the like are supplied with operating power through the control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout controller 311 when the power is shut off due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. A power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. By the output of this power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the power failure processing. configured to maintain value. Therefore, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323 . When the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erasing switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erasing signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (including the power turned on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. be.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as main control means performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, based on the detection of the starting winning switches 224a and 224b, the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening opening and closing member 32a) is opened, the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404 ) and a variable time selection counter used to determine the variable display time (variable time) performed by the special display device 43. C2, an initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the success/fail random number counter C1, and based on the detection of the through gate switch 225, whether to open the second start winning portion 33b (start opening opening/closing member 33c) A ball-entering assist random number counter C3 used for the entry assist lottery to determine whether or not, and an operation assist random number used for the operation assist lottery to determine whether to operate the movable accessory 722 based on the detection of the special gate switch 651. A counter C4 is used.

Each of the counters C1, C2, CINI, C3, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 has a special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage area in which the values of the hit/fail random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2 are stored, and a normal fluctuation holding area in which the value of the entry assist random number counter C3 is stored. is provided. Both the special variable reservation area and the normal variable reservation area have one execution area and four reservation areas (first reservation to fourth reservation area).

In addition, in each reservation area of the special variable reservation area, the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are set according to the winning history of the game balls to the first and second start winning parts 33a and 33b. Stored sequentially. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display on the special display device 43 up to four times in total as described above.

Further, in each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the values of the ball-entering assist random number counter C3 are stored in chronological order according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34.例文帳に追加By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display on the through-gate display device 41 up to four times as described above.

To explain each counter in detail, the hit/fail random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 399. It is configured to return to Normally, when the yes/no random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the corresponding no random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter (value=0 to 399) similar to the success/failure random number counter C1, and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the success/failure random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success/failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start prize winning portion 33a or the second start prize winning portion 33b (the timing detected by the first start prize winning switch 224a or the second start prize winning switch 224b), it is stored in the hit/fail random number counter buffer. The value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 is stored in the special change holding area.

In this embodiment, in the win/loss lottery performed based on the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 stored in the special change holding area, one of the lottery results of 'small win', 'big win' and 'loss' is obtained. Winning lottery processing related to the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery constitutes the open lottery processing in the present embodiment.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the number of random number values that are "jackpots" is one, and the value is "0". That is, the "jackpot" is won with a probability of 1/400, and the special display device 43 performs a stop display in a mode (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to the "jackpot", and a 15-round jackpot state occurs. It will happen.

In addition, the number of random number values that become the "minor win" is 398, and the values are "2 to 399". That is, the "small hit" is won with a probability of 398/400.

In particular, the "small win" of this embodiment includes a "short win" in which the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and a "long small win" in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. Hit" exists. Therefore, among the values of the success/failure random number counter C1, "2 to 21" correspond to the "long small win", and "22 to 399" correspond to the "short small win".

Then, when the "short-term small prize" is won, the special display device 43 performs a stop display in a mode (combination of lighting lamps) corresponding to the "short-term small prize", and the blade members 404 are opened for 0.5 seconds. It will happen. In addition, when the "long small win" is won, the special display device 43 performs a stop display in a manner (combination of lighting lamps) corresponding to the "long small win", and the blade member 404 opens for 1.5 seconds. It will happen. Here, the function of the main controller 261 that executes the small winning lottery and the big winning lottery and determines the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing members such as the blade member 404 constitutes the opening/closing pattern determination means in this embodiment.

Also, "1" among the values of the success/failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to "missing". combination) to give a stop indication.

In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a hit/fail judgment table that is referred to when judging whether or not the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 corresponds to a "small win" or a "big win".

Further, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state, while the special display device 43 performs four times of the variable display, a game state is provided in which the variable display time (variation time) on the special display device 43 is shortened. be. Even if the next big win state does not occur after the end of the big win state, this game state ends when the special display device 43 performs four fluctuation displays, and after that, the normal game state is reached. back to

Hereinafter, the game state in which the variable time of the special display device 43 is shortened is called "time shortening mode", and the normal game state in which normal variable display is performed without shortening the variable time is called "normal mode". Specific fluctuation times of the special display device 43 in the "time reduction mode" and the "normal mode" will be described later.

Furthermore, in the "time reduction mode", the start opening opening and closing member 33c of the second start winning part 33b is opened relatively frequently, and the "high ball entry state" that makes it easy to enter the game ball into the second start winning part 33b. becomes. As a result, the starting opening opening/closing member 33c is hardly opened, and the game ball is hard to enter the second starting winning part 33b. , making it easier to enter the game ball into the second start winning part 33b.

Specifically, in the "normal mode", the fluctuation time of the through-gate display device 41 for displaying the result of the ball entry assist lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball through the through-gate 34 is 10 seconds. , the opening time of the starting port opening/closing member 33c in the case of winning the ball-entering assist lottery is 0.4 seconds. On the other hand, in the "time reduction mode", the change time of the through gate display device 41 is 0.5 seconds, and the opening time of the opening opening/closing member 33c in the case of winning the ball-entering assist lottery is 2 seconds.

That is, in the "time shortening mode", the change time of the through-gate display device 41 is shorter and the opening time of the starting port opening/closing member 33c is longer than in the "normal mode". Since the time zone in which the starting port opening/closing member 33c is in an open state becomes longer, the game balls enter the second starting winning portion 33b frequently, and the lottery is continuously performed. It will be in a good state of ball retention.

In this way, in the "time reduction mode", when the variable display of the reserved special display device 43 continuously wins a small hit (the blade member 404 is closed once, the variable display is performed, Although the flow of opening is the same, the blade member 404 is opened almost continuously (in quick succession) because the fluctuation time is short. For this reason, it is easy to collectively enter a plurality of game balls into the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the "big hit" or "small hit (short small win and long small win)" in the lottery based on the ball entering the start winning part 33, and the "small win (short The opening time of the blade member 404 at the time of occurrence of "small hit and long small hit" is the same in any mode (time shortening mode and normal mode).

In addition, the winning probability of the ball entry assist lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 34 and the winning probability of the operation assist lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball through the special gate switch 651 mode is the same.

The variable time selection counter C2 is configured such that it is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The variable time selection counter C2 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the variable time selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning part 33a or the second starting winning part 33b (the timing detected by the first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b), the variable time selection counter buffer The stored value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM503.

In this embodiment, the variation time of the special display device 43 is set to "2 seconds" or "3 seconds" when a "small win" is obtained in the winning lottery in the "normal mode". Note that the ROM 502 stores in advance a variable time selection table that is referred to when determining which of the "two-second variation" and the "three-second variation" the value of the variable time selection counter C2 corresponds to. Therefore, the ROM 502 that stores the variation time selection table and the like constitutes the first variation pattern storage means in this embodiment.

Further, the variation time of the special display device 43 is "7 seconds" in the case of "big hit" or "loss" in the lottery in the "normal mode".

On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 in the "time reduction mode" is uniformly "0.1 second" regardless of the result of the lottery ("small win", "big win" or "loss"). . It should be noted that the variation time associated with the special display device 43 is not limited to the four variations of the 2-second variation, 3-second variation, 7-second variation, and 0.1-second variation according to the present embodiment, and different variation times are employed. You may

Also, the size and range of each counter is merely an example and can be arbitrarily changed. However, it is desirable that the magnitudes of the success/failure random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are different prime numbers and that they are not synchronized in any case.

Also, the ball-entering assist random number counter C3 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially adds 1 within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The ball-entering assist random number counter C3 is periodically updated (once per timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the ball-entering assist random number counter C3 is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. be.

Usually, there are 8 random number values to be won, and the range is "1 to 8". Then, when the value of the entry assist random number counter C3 is acquired, after a variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the display device 41 for the through gate, it stops in a manner corresponding to winning or losing (a combination of lamps that light up). A display is made, and if the winning is won, the second starting winning part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is opened for a predetermined period of time.

Further, the actuation assist random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 19, for example, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 19). The activation assist random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the activation assist random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the special gate 650.

Usually, there are 15 random number values to be won, and the range is "1 to 15". Then, when the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 is acquired, after a variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the special gate display device 44, a stop display is performed in a manner corresponding to winning or losing (a combination of lamps that light up). is performed, and if the player wins, the movable accessory 722 of the bypass mechanism 721 will be in a projecting state for a predetermined time. Therefore, the operation assist lottery constitutes the operation lottery process in this embodiment, and the function of the main controller 261 that executes the operation assist lottery constitutes the "lottery process executing means" and the "status lottery means".

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to flowcharts. The processing of the CPU 501 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of . For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the main processing will be explained.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 every 2 msec, for example.

In FIG. 11, first, in step S301, various prize winning switches are read. That is, it reads the states of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261, judges the states of the switches, and saves detection information. When game balls are to be paid out in response to the detection of the switch, the value of the prize ball counter corresponding to this is added, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal has not been input, the process ends. In addition, in the external output processing of the normal processing to be described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311 . Also, when this prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example).

Also, in step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the hit/fail random number counter C1, the variation time selection counter C2, the entry assist random number counter C3, and the actuation assist random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are set to their maximum values (in this embodiment, they are "399", "9", "9", "19") are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C3 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503. FIG.

After that, in step S304, the starting winning process accompanying the winning to the starting winning part 33 (first starting winning part 33a or second starting winning part 33b) is executed, and in step S305, the game ball passes through the through gate 34. In step S306, a ball count process accompanying a ball entering the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 is executed.

In the subsequent step S307, detection by the first special ball-entering detection switch 461 (entering the first V prize passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414) or the second special ball-entering detection switch 738 Executes a special winning process associated with the detection by (entering the bypass passage 737 through the second V winning passage 730 of the movable accessory 722).

Further, in step S308, non-special winning processing accompanying detection by the non-special ball detection switch 462 (entering the out passage 428 via the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414) is executed, and in step S309. , special gate passage processing accompanying the passage of the game ball to the special gate 650 is executed.

After that, in step S310, the ball type entry processing accompanying detection by the round entry detection switches 734, 735, and 736 (entering the 15R entry hole 731, 7R entry hole 732, and 3R entry hole 733) is executed. , once terminates the timer interrupt processing.

Here, the starting winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In addition, in the execution area and each reservation area of the special variation reservation area, the success/failure random number storage area that stores the value of the success/failure random number counter C1, the variation time random number storage area that stores the value of the variation time selection counter C2, and the suspended variation A start prize determination flag is provided for determining whether the display is based on the entry of a ball into the start prize portion 33 of either the first start prize portion 33a or the second start prize portion 33b.

In addition, in the special variable holding area in the present embodiment, in addition to the area for storing the values of the above-described win/fail random number counter C1 and variable time selection counter C2, in the win/fail lottery based on the ball entering the start winning section 33, the "jackpot "Jackpot occurrence flag indicating that you have won", "Out" flag indicating that you have won, Long small hit occurrence flag indicating that you have won "Long small hit", Short indicating that you have won "Short small hit" A small hit occurrence flag is provided. In addition, a 2-second variation flag, a 3-second variation flag, and a 7-second variation flag that indicate the variation time on the special display device 43 are provided.

First, in step S501, the value of the suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions of the variable display triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first and second start winning portions 33a and 33b is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, " 4”) Determine whether it is less than If a negative determination is made in step S501, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S501 is affirmative, in step S502, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first start prize winning section 33a based on the detection information of the first start prize winning switch 224a. If the determination in step S502 is negative, the process proceeds to step S509, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the determination in step S502 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S503, and the suspension counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step S504, the values of the hit/fail random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 updated in the random number update process of step S303 are stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas of the special variable reservation area. Here, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when various counter values corresponding to the big win are stored in the special change holding area during a predetermined big win state. Alternatively, in a predetermined jackpot state, when various counter values corresponding to the jackpot are stored in the special variable holding area, the predetermined condition may be satisfied at a predetermined rate, for example, 60% probability.

In step S505, the starting prize determination flag in the holding area storing the values of the win/fail random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 is turned on. In addition, the starting winning determination flag of the present embodiment is set to ON when the suspended variable display is based on the winning of the ball into the first starting winning section 33a, and the flag of winning into the second starting winning section 33b is set to off if it is based on

In the following step S506, the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reservation area is a value corresponding to a "small hit" or "big hit" or not. In addition, the details of the success/failure determination process will be described later.

In the subsequent step S507, a variable time determination process for determining the variable time in the special display device 43 is performed based on the value of the variable time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variable reservation area. Details of the fluctuation time determination process will be described later.

After that, in step S508, setting processing of the preceding command is performed. It should be noted that, in the starting command, the reserved and stored variation information (predetermined information used for determining the contents of the variation display) indicates whether the ball is entered in either the first start prize winning section 33a or the second start prize winning section 33b. Information indicating whether it is based on fluctuation information, information indicating "small hit" or "big hit", information indicating fluctuation time, etc. Output to the sub control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201) be done.

Here, the details of the success/failure determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to determine also the types of small hits (long small hits, short small hits) in the propriety determination process.

First, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reservation area matches the value "0" corresponding to the "jackpot". In addition, during a predetermined jackpot state, for example, various counter values corresponding to specific jackpots that can be given a specific game mode such as a high probability mode or a high support mode after the end, such as a variable jackpot, are stored in a special variable reservation area. A predetermined condition may be satisfied when the Then, if the determination in step S5101 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined that a big win state will occur, the process ends after turning on the big win occurrence flag in step S5102.

Also, if the determination in step S5101 is negative, in step S5103 it is determined whether the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change holding area matches the value "1" corresponding to "out". determine whether or not If the determination in step S5103 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined to be "out", the out flag is turned on in step S5104, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if it is determined to be a "small hit", then in step S5105 the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change holding area is changed to "long small". It is determined whether or not it matches any of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to "hit". If the determination in step S5105 is affirmative, the process ends after turning on the long small hit generation flag in step S5106.

Also, if the determination in step S5105 is negative, that is, if it is determined to be a "short-time small win", in step S5107, the short-time small win occurrence flag is turned on, and then this process ends.

Next, the variation time determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. The function of executing the fluctuation time determination process and the like in step S507 constitutes the first fluctuation pattern selection means in this embodiment.

First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the time reduction mode is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5201, in step S5202, the 0.1 second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is 0.1 seconds is set to on. , the process ends. That is, in the time shortening mode, regardless of whether the lottery result is a big win, a small long win, a small short win, or a loss, the fluctuation time of the corresponding fluctuation display is uniformly set to 0.1 second.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5201, in step S5203, it is determined whether or not a long small hit occurrence flag has been set in the winning determination processing performed immediately before. If the determination in step S5203 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined to be a "long small win", in step S5204, the value of the variation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variation reservation area is set to "0". , 1”.

If a negative determination is made in step S5204, that is, if the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is any one of "2 to 9", then in step S5205, the variable display performed by the special display device 43 is displayed as a variable time. After turning on the 3-second variation flag indicating that the time is 3 seconds, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination in step S5204 is affirmative, in step S5206, after turning on the 2-second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is 2 seconds, this processing is executed. finish.

Also, if the determination in step S5203 is negative, it is determined in step S5207 whether or not the short-circuit small hit occurrence flag is ON. If the determination in step S5207 is affirmative, that is, if a "short hit" occurs, in step S5208, the value of the variable time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area is "0, 1". Determines whether or not it matches with either of

If the determination in step S5208 is affirmative, in step S5205, the 3-second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is set to ON for 3 seconds, and then this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5208, in step S5206, the 2-second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is set to ON for 2 seconds, and then this process is executed. finish. That is, there is a higher possibility that a longer variation time (3 seconds) is selected when a "long small win" occurs than when a "short small win" occurs.

In addition, if the determination in step S5207 is negative, that is, in the case of a "jackpot" or "loss", in step S5209, the variable display performed on the special display device 43 is displayed for 7 seconds. After turning on the second fluctuation flag, this processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, after the process of step S508, or when a negative determination is made in step S502, in step S509, whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning section 33b is determined by the second start It is determined by the detection information of the winning switch 224b. If a negative determination is made in step S509, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the suspension counter Na is incremented by one in step S510.

In the following step S511, each value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas of the special variable reservation area. In step S512, a win/fail determination process is performed. The success/failure determination process in step S512 is the same as the success/failure determination process in step S506, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In subsequent step S513, fluctuation time determination processing is performed. The suitability determination process in step S513 is the same as the variation time determination process in step S507, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. After step S513, in step S514, a preceding command setting process is performed, and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S601, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination in step S601 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, then in step S602, the number of suspensions of the variable display performed by the through gate display device 41 is counted. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the determination in step S602 is affirmative, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, and if the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S603, and the normal reservation is performed. The counter Nc is incremented by one.

In addition, in the following step S604, a random number related to success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the entry assist random number counter C3 updated in the random number updating process of step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage areas of the normal variation holding area of the RAM 503. FIG. After that, the through gate passage processing ends.

Next, the entering ball counting process in step S306 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7201, it is determined whether or not the internal ball entry detection switch 437 provided at the inlet portion 601b of the lead-in passage 601 is detected. determine whether it did. If a negative determination is made in step S7201, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7201 is affirmative, in step S7202, a ball entry command is set to the sub-control device 262 to notify that the game ball has entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. When the sub-control device 262 receives a ball entry command, it outputs a ball entry effect sound and lights and blinks a ball entry lamp (not shown) to inform the player that a ball has been entered. configured to notify.

After that, in step S7203, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter for grasping the number of game balls in the internal area 401 is incremented by one. In the following step S7204, setting processing of a monitoring timer that is taken into account in the remaining ball monitoring processing is performed. In this embodiment, "10000" is set to the watchdog timer each time the internal ball entry detection switch 437 is detected. Also, even if a predetermined numerical value has already been set in the watchdog timer, it will be overwritten with "10000". Note that the monitor timer is decremented by one in normal processing (remaining ball monitoring processing in step S212, which will be described later) performed every 4 mecs. After step S7204, this process ends.

Next, the special winning process in step S307 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7301, it is determined whether or not there is game ball detection information by the first special entering ball detection switch 461 or the second special entering ball detection switch 738. FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S7301, this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S7301, in step S7302, it is determined whether or not it is in a big hit state by referring to a flag during a big hit, which will be described later. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7302, this processing ends. That is, during the jackpot state, when a game ball enters the first V prize passage 427 through the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and the game ball is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, or , The game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the movable accessory 722 (second V winning passage 730), and even if the game ball is detected by the second special entering ball detection switch 738, The right to generate a jackpot condition is not granted.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7302, in step S7303, the special winning flag indicating that the first special entering ball detection switch 461 or the second special entering ball detection switch 738 has detected the entering ball has already been set. Determine whether or not it is turned on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7303, this processing ends. That is, in a state where it has already been decided to generate a jackpot state (the right to generate a jackpot state has been granted), the first special ball detection switch 461 or the second special ball detection switch 738 Even if the ball is detected, the jackpot for that amount is invalidated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7303, the special prize winning flag is turned on in step S7304, and then this processing ends.

In this embodiment, at the stage when the first special ball detection switch 461 detects the ball, only the right to generate the jackpot state is given, and which type of jackpot state is given Since it is not determined until the type is determined, the jackpot state is not started until the type is determined.

Similarly, at the stage when the second special entrance ball detection switch 738 is detected, the right to generate a jackpot state is only granted, and the game ball is still entering the 15R entrance ball opening 731. Since there is no state, the big win state is not started until the game ball enters the 15R ball entrance 731 and the "15 round big win" is confirmed.

Next, the non-special winning process of step S308 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7401, it is determined whether or not there is detection information of a game ball by the non-special entering ball detection switch 462 or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball is ejected outside the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) through the out passage 428 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S7401, this processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S7401 is affirmative, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1 in step S7402, and then this processing ends.

Next, the special gate passage processing in step S309 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S7501, whether or not the game ball has passed through the special gate 650 is determined based on the detection information of the special gate switch 651. If a negative determination is made in step S7501, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7501 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650, in step S7502, it is determined whether or not the third display flag to be described later is on, that is, the special gate It is determined whether or not the display device 44 is performing variable display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7502, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7502, in step S7503, it is determined whether or not the role product operating flag, which will be described later, is on, that is, whether or not the movable accessory 722 is in operation (protruding state). determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7503, this processing ends.

As a result, even if the game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 during the variable display on the special gate display device 44 or during the operation of the movable accessory 722, The operation assist lottery is invalidated, and the right to operate the movable accessory 722 is not newly granted.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7503 is negative, in step S7504, the value of the actuation assist random number counter C4 updated by the random number updating process in step S303 is stored in the predetermined actuation assist random number storage area set in the RAM 503. do.

In the next step S7505, the special gate passage flag is turned on, and in step S7506, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter, and then this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 21, a description will be given of the type entry processing in step S310. First, in step S7601, it is determined whether or not the special prize winning flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S7601, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7601, it is determined in step S7602 whether or not the 15R entering ball detection switch 734 has detected entering a ball. When the determination in step S7602 is affirmative, in step S7603, the 15R jackpot flag indicating that the 15 round jackpot is set to ON. After that, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and then this processing ends.

If the determination in step S7602 is negative, it is determined in step S7605 whether or not the 7R entrance detection switch 735 has detected an entrance. When the determination in step S7605 is affirmative, in step S7606, a 7R jackpot flag indicating that the game is a 7 round jackpot is turned on. After that, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and then this processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7605, it is determined in step S7608 whether or not the 3R entering detection switch 736 has detected entering a ball. If a negative determination is made in step S7608, this processing ends. On the other hand, when the determination in step S7608 is affirmative, in step S7609, the 3R jackpot flag indicating the 3 round jackpot is turned on. After that, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and then this processing ends.

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power failure is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. FIG.

That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. FIG. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing. finish.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 311 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by such NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. to start the NMI interrupt processing in FIG. The contents are as described above.

Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable, for example, 1 Execute wait processing for about a second. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501 . That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON). do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the following step S104 whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if it is not set, backup data is not stored, so in this case also, the process proceeds to step S111. If the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure, the backed-up data is destroyed, and in this case also, the process proceeds to step S111.

In the processing of step S111, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, the payout control device 311, etc., which are sub-side control devices. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S112, etc.). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 503 . Instead of using this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S112, etc.). Also, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S112, etc.) is similarly performed. That is, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0 in step S112, and the initial value of the RAM 503 is set in the subsequent step S113. After that, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the normal processing described later is performed.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the condition is that power failure occurrence information is set and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the power recovery process (power recovery process) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S108, power-off occurrence information is cleared. In step S109, a command is transmitted to return the sub-side control device to the game state at the time of power failure, and in step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM503. After that, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the normal processing described later is performed.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The main processing of the game is executed in this normal processing. As an overview, the processes of steps S201 to S212 are executed as regular processes with a period of 4 msec, and the initial value random number counter update process of step S215 is executed during the remaining time.

First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display device 43 and the second start winning section 33b updated in the previous process is transmitted to each device, or output data such as a command is sent to each device on the sub side. Execute external output processing such as sending to the control device.

For example, when the effect display device 42 starts the variable display, a variable pattern command is transmitted to the sub-controller 262 . In other words, the variation pattern command is a command signal output to the sub-control device 262 to cause the effect display device 42 to perform a display effect matching the display performed by the special display device 43 . On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command determines the display mode of the effect display device 42 based on the command, and causes the display control device 45 to display the display mode on the effect display device 42. give instructions to

On the other hand, when stopping the variable display on the effect display device 42 , a confirmation command is transmitted to the sub-control device 262 . In response to this, the sub-control device 262 that has input the confirmation command instructs the display control device 45 to end the variable display (display effect) being performed by the effect display device 42 based on the command. put out.

However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, when the state is in the jackpot state, or when the right to the jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, the central winning unit 37 is open. In the case of (during the small hit state), since the subtraction process of the first display timer for measuring the fluctuation time in the special display device 43 is not performed (see FIG. 23), it is assumed that the special display device 43 During the variable display of (effect display device 42), when the first special winning ball detection switch 461 or the second special winning ball detection switch 738 is detected and the special winning flag is turned on, the special winning flag is turned on. The determination command is not transmitted to the sub-control device 262 until the V winning jackpot related to the flag ends, and is transmitted after the jackpot ends.

In step S202, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S203, the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

In the subsequent step S204, a V winning jackpot setting process is executed. In this process, a game ball entering the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 enters the first V winning passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414, and the game ball enters the first V winning passage 427. When detected by the special entering ball detection switch 461, the game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the movable accessory 722 (second V winning passage 730), and the game ball enters the second special entering ball detection switch 738 The setting of the jackpot that occurs based on the detection is performed. The details of this V winning jackpot setting process will be described later.

In step S205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is to be performed on the special display device 43, the control details of the special display device 43 are set, and hit determination and effect patterns for the effect display device 42 are set. Details of the first display control process will be described later. The function of the main controller 261 that executes the first display control process constitutes the first display control means in this embodiment.

In step S206, a variable winning device control process is executed. In this processing, setting of control contents of the variable winning device 32 is performed as to what kind of control is performed in the variable winning device 32 . As a result, when the jackpot state (special game state) is reached, the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening opening/closing member 32a) is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. The details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, blade member opening/closing processing is executed. In this process, the control contents of the blade member 404 (blade solenoid 405) of the central winning unit 37 are set. Details of the blade member opening/closing process will be described later.

In step S208, a second display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is to be performed on the through-gate display device 41, the control contents of the through-gate display device 41, and the like are set. The details of this second display control process will be described later.

In step S209, a starting winning section control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the starting port opening/closing member 33c of the second starting winning section 33b are set. The details of the starting winning section control process will be described later.

In step S210, a third display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is to be performed on the display device 44 for special gates, the content of control of the display device 44 for special gates, and the like are set. Details of the third display control process will be described later. The function of the main controller 261 that executes the third display control process constitutes the display control means in this embodiment.

In step S211, a role product driving control process related to the central winning unit 37 is executed. In this processing, drive control processing related to the rotating body unit 410, drive control processing related to the bypass mechanism section 721, drive control processing related to the type sorting mechanism section 741, and the like are performed.

For example, in the drive control processing related to the rotator unit 410, control such as rotating the rotator 414 in the counterclockwise direction at a constant speed is performed. Control such as swinging the plate 744 and the second bridge plate 745 at a predetermined rhythm is performed.

Further, in the drive control processing related to the bypass mechanism section 721, control such as projecting the movable accessory 722 is performed when a predetermined condition is established. Details of the drive control process (hereinafter referred to as "bypass mechanism control process") relating to the bypass mechanism unit 721 will be described later.

In step S212, a remaining ball monitoring process is executed. In this process, a process of confirming whether or not a game ball exists in the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 is performed. The details of the remaining ball monitoring process will be described later.

After that, in step S213, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step S214, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has come. Then, it is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, an affirmative determination is made in step S214, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S214 is negative, the process advances to step S215 to update the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example). After this process, the process proceeds to step S213. That is, at the time of determination in step S214, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated within the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing. will be executed repeatedly.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S212 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the success/failure random number counter C1) can be randomly updated.

Now, if the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S213: YES), it means that the power has been shut off, so the processes from step S216 onward are performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. will be In the power failure process, first, in step S216, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step S217, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area. memorize to After that, in step S219, a power cutoff notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (payout control device 311, etc.). Then, in step S220, the RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 503 . Thereafter, in step S221, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

It should be noted that the processing of step S213 is the timing at which the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in steps S201 to S212 ends, or the timing at which one cycle of the processing in step S215 performed within the remaining time ends. is running on Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, since information on occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is less than when each processing is in progress. and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before data is stored (step S216), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and the state before the power cut-off can be reliably stored. .

Next, the V winning jackpot setting process in step S204 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1501, whether the special winning flag (see special winning processing in FIG. 18) indicating that the game ball has been detected by the first special winning ball detection switch 461 or the second special winning ball detection switch 738 is ON. determine whether or not If a negative determination is made in step S1501, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the process advances to step S1503 to determine whether or not the 15R jackpot flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the 15R entering ball detection switch 734 is set to ON.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, in step S1504, "15" is set in the round number counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds in the jackpot state, and then the process proceeds to step S1505.

In step S1505, the special prize winning flag is turned off, and the during-big-hit flag indicating that the big-hit state is in progress is turned on. After that, in the following step S1506, the first variable flag indicating that the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 32 is underway is set to ON, and in step S1507, the first variable timer used for opening/closing control of the variable winning device 32 is set to " 7500" is set, and in step S1508, the winning counter is set to "8", and then this process is terminated.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S1503, in step S1509, it is determined whether or not the 7R jackpot flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the 7R entering ball detection switch 735 is set to ON. If the determination in step S1509 is affirmative, in step S1510, the round number counter is set to "7", and then the process proceeds to step S1505 to perform the same processing as described above.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S1509, in step S1513, it is determined whether or not the 3R jackpot flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736 is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S1513, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1513 is affirmative, in step S1514, the round number counter is set to "3", and then the process proceeds to step S1505 to perform the same processing as described above.

Next, the first display control processing in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the jackpot state flag is referred to. If the determination in step S801 is affirmative, that is, if the game is in the jackpot state, the process ends. That is, during the jackpot state, a new variable display is not started, and the variable display that has already been started is not terminated.

The big win state includes the middle of the big win state (special game state), the opening period before the start of the big win state, and the ending period after the end of the big win state. In general, during the opening period (for example, the period from when the variable display is stopped in the special display device 43 in a manner corresponding to the big win to when the variable prize winning device 32 starts to open for the first time), The effect display device 42 displays the start of the jackpot state. On the other hand, during the ending period (predetermined period after opening of the final round by the variable winning device 32), the performance display device 42 displays the end of the big win state and the mode given after the big win.

If the determination in step S801 is negative, it is determined in step S802 whether or not the special winning flag is on. In addition, the special winning flag is set to ON when the game ball is detected by the first special winning ball detection switch 461 or the second special winning ball detection switch 738 (see step S7304 of the special winning process), and the flag during the jackpot is set. It is turned off when it is turned on (see step S1505 of the V winning jackpot setting process). If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, this process is terminated. In other words, in a state where the right to generate the jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, the variable display is not newly started and the variable display that has already started is not terminated. .

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S802, in step S803, it is determined whether or not the small hit opening flag is set to ON. Although the details will be described later, the open small winning flag is turned on while the vane member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is open, that is, during the small winning state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, this process is terminated. In other words, while the central prize winning unit 37 is open (during the small win state), the variable display is not newly started, and the variable display that has already been started is not terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S803, it is determined in step S804 whether or not the special display device 43 is performing variable display by looking at the setting state of the first display flag. When the first display flag is set to ON, it is considered that the variable display is being performed, and when the first display flag is OFF, it is considered that the variable display is not being performed. Although the details will be described later, the flag during the first display is turned on when the variable display of the special display device 43 is started (see step S808), and when the variable display of the special display device 43 is stopped and displayed ( (see step S812).

Then, if a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, it is not in the big win state, the right to the big win state has been granted but the big win state has not yet started, and the central winning unit 37 is being opened (small win state) and not during the variable display of the special display device 43, the process proceeds to step S805, and the value of the suspension counter Na for counting the number of suspensions of the variable display triggered by the entry of the ball into the starting prize winning section 33 is Determine whether it is greater than 0. If a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if not even one variable display is retained and stored, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S805, that is, if at least one variable display is retained and stored, 1 is subtracted from the value of the retention counter Na in step S806.

In subsequent step S807, a process of shifting the data stored in the special change reservation area is executed. This shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserve areas of the special variable reserve area to the execution area side, and the first reserve area→execution area, the second reserve area→hold. The data in each area is shifted such as the first area, the third reserved area→the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area→the third reserved area, and so on. In the shift process, not only the values of the success/failure random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2, but also the big hit occurrence flag, the outlier flag, the long small win occurrence flag, the short small win occurrence flag, the 2-second variation flag, and the 3-second The ON/OFF setting states of the fluctuation flag and the 7-second fluctuation flag are also shifted.

In the subsequent step S808, variable display setting processing is performed. Details of the variable display setting process will now be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the variation information corresponds to "big hit" by determining whether or not the big hit generation flag in the execution area of the special variation reservation area is set to ON. In addition, as a modification, the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot, by referring to the success/failure determination table again in the same way as the success/failure determination process of the start winning process. It may be determined whether or not it is "0".

If affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, if a "jackpot" is won in the lottery, in step S902, a direct hit indicating that a "jackpot" has been won in the lottery (a "direct hit"). Turn on the jackpot flag. After step S902, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the 7-second variation flag in the execution area of the special variation reservation area is set to ON.

If the determination in step S903 is affirmative, in step S904, a variation pattern command to determine a variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) to be a jackpot and to transmit the variation pattern (variation information) to the sub-control device 262 settings. In the following step S905, the first display timer used for variation control of the special display device 43 is set to a value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds. The first display timer is means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display device 43, and is taken into account when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. . After step S905, the process proceeds to step S938.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S903, in step S906, a variation pattern (jackpot shortening pattern) that shortens the variation time and becomes a big hit is determined, and further, the variation pattern (variation information) is sent to the sub control device. In order to transmit also to H.262, a variation pattern command is set. In the following step S907, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set to the first display timer used for variation control of the special display device 43. FIG. After step S907, the process proceeds to step S938.

Also, if the determination in step S901 is negative, it is determined in step S908 whether or not the deviation flag in the execution area of the special variation holding area is set to ON, thereby determining whether or not it is "out". As a modification, in the same way as the success/failure determination process of the starting winning process, it is again determined whether or not the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 in the execution area is "1". It may be determined.

If the determination in step S908 is affirmative, that is, if it is "out", in step S909 it is determined whether or not the 7-second variation flag in the execution area of the special variation reservation area is set to ON. If the determination in step S909 is affirmative, in step S910, a variation pattern to be out (outlier variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262. I do. Thereafter, in step S911, after setting the value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds to the first display timer, the process proceeds to step S938.

If a negative determination is made in step S909, in step S912, a variation pattern (loss shortening pattern) that shortens the variation time is determined, and the variation pattern (variation information) is sent to the sub-controller. In order to transmit also to H.262, a variation pattern command is set. In the following step S913, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set to the first display timer used for variation control of the special display device 43. FIG. After step S913, the process proceeds to step S938.

If a negative determination is made in step S908, that is, if it is a "small win", the blade open flag is turned on in step S914. In the following step S915, it is determined whether or not the long small hit occurrence flag in the execution area of the special change reservation area is ON. As a modification, in the same way as the success/failure determination process of the starting winning process, it is determined again whether the value of the variable time selection counter C2 in the execution area matches any one of "2 to 21". It may be determined whether or not the "Long Small Win" has been won.

If the determination in step S915 is affirmative, that is, if it is a "long small win", it is determined in step S916 whether or not the 3-second variation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If the determination in step S916 is affirmative, in step S917, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 3 seconds, followed by a variable pattern in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. A variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set in order to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262 as well.

In the subsequent step S918, a value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S919, the open/close control timer used for the open/close control of the blade member 404 is set to "750" corresponding to 3 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 3 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

Further, if the determination in step S916 is negative, it is determined in step S920 whether or not the 2-second variation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S920, in step S921, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 2 seconds, followed by a variable pattern in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (long small per 2 seconds A variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set in order to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262 as well.

In the following step S922, a value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S923, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500" corresponding to 2 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 2 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S920, in step S924, a variation pattern (long small hit shortening pattern) that shortens the variation time and becomes a long small hit is determined, and further, the variation pattern (variation information) is also sent to the sub-controller 262, a variation pattern command is set.

In the subsequent step S925, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set to the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S926, "25" corresponding to 0.1 second is set to the opening/closing control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 0.1 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

Also, if the determination in step S915 is negative, that is, if it is a "short hit", it is determined in step S927 whether or not the 3-second variation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If the determination in step S927 is affirmative, in step S928, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 3 seconds and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. A variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set in order to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262 as well.

In the following step S929, a value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S930, the open/close control timer used for the open/close control of the blade member 404 is set to "750" corresponding to 3 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 3 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

If the determination in step S927 is negative, it is determined in step S931 whether or not the 2-second variation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If the determination in step S931 is affirmative, in step S932, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 2 seconds, followed by a variable pattern in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds A variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set in order to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262 as well.

In the subsequent step S933, a value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set to the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S934, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500" corresponding to 2 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 2 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S931, in step S935, a variation pattern (short small winning shortening pattern) that shortens the variation time and becomes a short small winning is determined, and further, the variation pattern (variation information) is also sent to the sub-controller 262, a variation pattern command is set.

In the following step S936, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set to the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S937, "25" corresponding to 0.1 second is set to the opening/closing control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 0.1 second. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In step S938, the first display flag indicating that the special display device 43 is performing variable display is turned on. After step S938, the process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 23, if the determination in step S804 is affirmative, that is, if the variable display is in progress, the process advances to step S809 to perform first display timer subtraction processing. That is, the value of the first display timer is decremented by one every 4 msec.

Subsequently, in step S810, the value of the first display timer after the subtraction is taken into account to determine whether or not the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", affirmative determination is made in step S810.

If a negative determination is made in step S810, in step S811, switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display (switching display) of the special display device 43, and this processing ends. Based on the contents of the switching display setting, a control signal is output to the special display device 43 to perform switching display in the next external output process in the normal process. Specifically, the combination of lamps to be lit is set to be switched sequentially. As a result, the variable display (switching display) of the special display device 43 is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S810 is affirmative, that is, if the time has come to stop the variable display in the special display device 43, the first display flag is turned off in step S812.

In the following step S813, the stop display setting for performing the stop display on the special display device 43 is performed. Based on the setting contents of this stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. That is, in the case of a "jackpot", a plurality of lamps constituting the special display device 43 are stopped and displayed (for example, lit only for a few seconds) in a mode (combination) corresponding to the "jackpot", resulting in a "loss". If it is a "long small win", it is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to "out", and if it is a "long small win", it is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to "long small win", and if it is a "short small win". Stop and display in a mode corresponding to "short win".

Further, in the stop display setting process in step S813, a setting process for transmitting a confirmation command to the effect display device 42 to stop display to the sub-control device 262 is performed.

Then, in the following step S814, after the determination information setting process is performed, this process is terminated.

Here, the determination information setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the direct hit big hit flag is set to ON. If affirmative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that a big win has been won in the winning lottery, the big win setting after step S1002 is performed.

Specifically, in step S1002, a flag during a jackpot indicating whether or not a jackpot state as a special game state is set to ON. In subsequent step S1003, the first variable flag indicating whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in the open state is turned on. In this embodiment, the variable winning device 32 is opened when the first variable flag is turned on.

Subsequently, in step S1004, a first variable timer, which is a means for measuring the opening time of the variable winning device 32 and the like and indicates whether or not a specified time has passed since the start of opening, is set. In this example, "7500" corresponding to 30 seconds is set as the value for the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum open time per round (the longest time the variable winning device 32 is open) is 30 seconds.

Next, in step S1005, a round number counter indicating the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot state (the number of occurrences of the special prize state, that is, the number of executions of the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32) is set. Here, "15" indicating the total number of rounds is set as the value corresponding to the "direct hit big win".

In the subsequent step S1006, setting processing of a winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32 is performed. In this example, the value is set to "8", which indicates the maximum number of balls entered per round. After that, this process is terminated. In the switch reading process (see step S301 in FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223. If it is determined that there is a winning counter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning counter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation number counter is set. The fluctuation number counter is means for measuring the duration of the time reduction mode (high ball entry state). In the present embodiment, the time shortening mode is until the special display device 43 performs four fluctuation displays after the end of the jackpot state, and as will be described later, "4" is set as the counter value after the end of the jackpot. .

Here, if the counter value of the variation number counter is "0", this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the fluctuation number counter is set (when the counter value is other than "0"), it is considered that the time reduction mode is in progress, and in step S1008, the value of the fluctuation number counter is subtracted by 1, and step The process proceeds to S1009.

In step S1009, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the fourth variation display after the end of the big win (after the time reduction mode is applied). Here, if the value of the fluctuation number counter is "0", a process of turning off the time reduction mode flag is performed in step S1010, a process of turning on the normal mode flag is performed in step S1011, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1009 that the counter value of the variation number counter is not "0", this processing ends.

Next, the variable winning device control processing in step S206 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1201, the flag during the big hit is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the game is in the middle of the big hit. If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

If the determination in step S1201 is affirmative, the count value of the first variable timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1202. In the subsequent step S1203, it is determined whether or not the first variable flag is ON.

If the determination in step S1203 is affirmative, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is open, the process proceeds to step S1204 to determine whether or not the count value of the first variable timer is "0". That is, in step S1204, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the variable winning device 32 per round, which is set when the first variable flag is turned on, remains.

If the determination in step S1204 is negative, the process advances to step S1205 to determine whether or not the value of the winning counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls winning the variable winning device 32 has reached a specified number per round (eight in this example). If a negative determination is made in step S1205, that is, if the timing for closing the variable prize winning device 32 (timing for ending the round) has not yet arrived, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1204 or step S1205, the process advances to step S1206 to determine whether or not the counter value of the round number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) has reached the specified number of times.

If the determination in step S1206 is affirmative, end setting processing is performed in step S1207, and this processing ends. Details of the end setting process will be described later.

If the determination in step S1206 is negative, that is, if the number of rounds has not reached the specified number of times, in step S1208, round forward processing is performed, and this processing ends. In the round forwarding process, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter. In other words, the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly performed until the number of executed rounds reaches the predetermined number of times. Also, in the round forwarding process, the first variable flag is turned off, and a wait time (interval time) until the next round is started is set for the first variable timer.

Then, if the determination in step S1203 is negative, that is, if it is during the interval period between rounds, the process advances to step S1209 to determine whether or not the value of the first variable timer is "0". .

If the determination in step S1209 is affirmative, that is, if the interval period has ended and the timing for starting the next round has arrived, round start processing is performed in step S1210. In the round start process, the first variable flag is turned on, the opening time of the variable winning device 32 per round ("7500" in this example) is set for the first variable timer, and the winning counter is set to The maximum winning number per round ("8" in this example) is set. If the determination in step S1209 is negative, or if the round start process is completed in step S1210, this process ends.

Various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the external output process of the next normal process based on the on/off state of the first variable flag. When the first variable flag is ON, a control signal for opening the variable winning device 32 is output, and the variable winning device 32 is in an open state. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is off, a control signal for closing the variable winning device 32 is output, and the variable winning device 32 is closed.

Here, the end setting processing in step S1207 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1301, the first variable flag is turned off. In the following step S1302, the jackpot middle flag is turned off. After that, in step S1303, the time reduction mode flag is set to ON. That is, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot state of all jackpot types of "direct hit jackpot" and "V prize jackpot" ("15 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot", and "3 round jackpot") , the time reduction mode is provided.

After step S1303, in step S1304, the normal mode flag is turned off, and in step S1305, "4" is set in the fluctuation number counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1306. That is, after the end of the jackpot, the time shortening mode is set until the variable display is performed four times. In step S1306, processing for turning off various jackpot flags is performed. After step S1306, the process ends.

Next, the blade member opening/closing process in step S207 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the blade open flag (see step S914 of the variable display setting process) is turned on. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1801, in step S1802, it is determined whether or not the flag during opening of the small hit indicating that the blade member 404 is being opened is on. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, that is, if the blade member 404 is to be released by winning the "small win", the process proceeds to step S1803.

In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the value of the open/close control timer is "0". In addition, as described above, when it is determined that the "small winning" is won in the variable display setting process, the opening/closing control timer corresponds to the same time as the variable display variable time performed by the special display device 43. A value is set (see steps S919, S923, S926, S930, S934, and S937). Therefore, at the same time when the corresponding variable display ends, the determination is also affirmative.

If the determination in step S1803 is negative, the value of the open/close control timer is decremented by 1 in step S1804, and this process ends. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S1803, that is, if the timing to open the blade member 404 has arrived, in step S1805, while turning on the small hit open flag, in step S1806, the blade member 404 Perform processing to open.

After that, in step S1807, it is determined whether or not the long small hit occurrence flag in the execution area of the special change reservation area is set to ON. If the determination in step S1807 is affirmative, in step S1808, a value "375" corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set for the open/close control timer, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1807 is negative, in step S1809 a value "125" corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for the open/close control timer, and this processing ends.

If the determination in step S1802 is affirmative, it is determined in step S1810 whether or not the value of the open/close control timer is "0". If the determination in step S1810 is negative, the value of the opening/closing control timer is decremented by 1 in step S1811, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1810, that is, if the timing for closing the blade member 404 has arrived, the small hit open flag is turned off in step S1812, and the blade open flag is turned off in step S1813. It is turned off, and in step S1814, a process for closing the blade member 404 is performed, and then this process ends. Therefore, the function of executing the blade member opening/closing process in step S207 can execute the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means in the present embodiment a predetermined number of times (the open game state in which the variable ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner can be executed). This constitutes opening/closing control means.

Next, the second display control processing of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2101, the setting state of the second display flag indicating whether or not the through-gate display device 41 is performing variable display is checked, and the through-gate display device 41 is performing variable display (switching display). or not. Specifically, when the second display flag is ON, it is assumed that the through-gate display device 41 is performing variable display, and when the second display flag is OFF, the through-gate display device 41 , it is considered to be in the stopped display, which corresponds to the state in which the variable display is stopped.

If the determination in step S2101 is negative, the process advances to step S2102 to determine whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is 0, the process is terminated.

If the variable display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step S2104, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal variation reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserve areas of the normal variable reserve area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

Then, in step S2105, start setting processing is executed. In this processing, processing is performed to indicate that the condition for performing variable display (switching display) in the through-gate display device 41 has been established. Specifically, the setting process of the second display timer is performed while turning on the second display flag. The second display timer is means for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the through-gate display device 41. be considered.

In this embodiment, the time shortening mode in which the ball is in a high ball entry state and the normal mode have different fluctuation times of the variable display in the through-gate display device 41. In the time shortening mode, the second display timer A value "125" corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set, and in the normal mode, a value "1250" corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the second display timer. Of the jackpots, for example, the game state of a specific jackpot in which a specific game mode such as a high probability mode or a high support mode can be given after the end of a variable jackpot, or the opening period may be set as a predetermined open game state. It should be noted that during the jackpot state, "1250" is set for the second display timer as in the normal mode.

After step S2105 ends, the second display control process ends. When a control signal for starting variable display (switching display) is output to the through-gate display device 41 in the next external output processing of the normal processing based on the setting in the start setting processing, A variable display (switching display) is started on the through-gate display device 41 .

If the determination in step S2101 is affirmative, that is, if the through-gate display device 41 is performing variable display, the flow advances to step S2106 to perform second display timer subtraction processing. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, proceeding to step S2107, it is determined whether or not the count value of the second display timer is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the second display flag is turned off in step S2108, and stop display setting for performing stop display on the through-gate display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the through-gate display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing.

It should be noted that, as described above, it is determined whether or not the game is won based on the value of the ball-entering assist random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the normal variation reservation area. Specifically, "1 to 8" among the numerical values 0 to 9 of the entry assist random number counter C3 are the winning values.

Subsequently, the process advances to step S2110 to perform determination information setting processing, and ends this processing. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for opening and closing the second start winning portion 33b (start opening opening/closing member 33c) is performed. Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on and the open time is set in the second variable timer.

The second variable flag is discrimination information for discriminating whether or not the second starting winning part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is in the open state.

The second variable timer is means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting prize winning section 33b, and is taken into account when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed since the start of opening. In the present embodiment, the opening time of the second start winning portion 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) differs between the time shortening mode, which is a high ball winning state, and the normal mode, and in the time shortening mode, the second variable A value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set for the timer, and a value "100" corresponding to 0.4 seconds is set for the second variable timer in the normal mode. Incidentally, during the jackpot state, "100" is set for the second variable timer as in the normal mode.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2107 is negative, in step S2111, switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display (switching display) of the through-gate display device 41, and this processing ends. Then, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the through-gate display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, the combination of lamps to be lit is set to be switched sequentially. As a result, the variable display (switching display) of the through-gate display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

Next, the starting winning section control processing of step S209 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the second variable flag indicating whether or not the second start winning portion 33b (start opening/closing member 33c) is in the open state is turned on. Here, if it is determined that the second variable flag is not ON (the second starting prize winning section 33b is in the closed state), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2201 is affirmative, that is, if the second variable flag is ON, it is assumed that the second start winning section 33b is open, and the second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step S2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2203, and it is determined whether or not the specified open time has elapsed by taking into consideration the value of the second variable timer after the subtraction. Here, when the specified open time has passed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer has become "0", affirmative determination is made in step S2203. If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204, and after performing end setting processing in step S2204, this processing ends. In the end setting process of step S2204, a process of turning off the second variable flag is performed.

Various control signals are output to the second starting winning section 33b in the next external output process of the normal process based on the ON/OFF state of the second variable flag. When the second variable flag is ON, a drive signal for opening the starting opening/closing member 33c is output to the second starting winning portion 33b (starting opening solenoid), and the second starting winning portion 33b is opened. Become. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a drive signal for closing the starting port opening/closing member 33c is output to the second starting winning section 33b, and the second starting winning section 33b is closed.

Next, the third display control process of step S210 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2301, the set state of the third display flag indicating whether or not the special gate display device 44 is performing variable display is checked, and the special gate display device 44 is performing variable display (switching display). or not. Specifically, when the third display flag is ON, it is assumed that the special gate display device 44 is performing variable display, and when the third display flag is OFF, the special gate display device 44 , it is considered to be in the stopped display, which corresponds to the state in which the variable display is stopped.

If the determination in step S2301 is negative, the process advances to step S2302 to determine whether or not the special gate passage flag is on. If the determination in step S2302 is negative, that is, if the special gate passage flag is not ON, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the variable display is not in progress and the special gate passage flag is on, the process advances to step S2303 to turn off the special gate passage flag. In subsequent step S2304, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing variable display (switching display) on the special gate display device 44 have been established. Specifically, the third display flag is turned on, and the third display timer is set. The third display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the special gate display device 44. be considered.

In this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is the time reduction mode or the normal mode, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is uniformly set to 1 second, which corresponds to 1 second for the third display timer. A value of "250" is set.

After step S2304 ends, the third display control process ends. If a control signal for starting variable display (switching display) is output to the special gate display device 44 in the external output processing of the next normal processing based on the setting in the start setting processing, A variable display (switching display) is started on the special gate display device 44 .

If the determination in step S2301 is affirmative, that is, if the special gate display device 44 is performing variable display, the flow advances to step S2306 to perform a third display timer subtraction process. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the third display timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, proceeding to step S2307, it is determined whether or not the count value of the third display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2307, the third display flag is turned off in step S2308, and stop display setting for performing stop display on the special gate display device 44 is performed in step S2309. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal is outputted to the display device 44 for the special gate in the external output processing in the next normal processing to perform the stop display.

As described above, it is determined whether or not the prize is won based on the value of the actuation assist random number counter C4 stored in the actuation assist random number storage area. Specifically, "1 to 15" among the numerical values 0 to 19 of the actuation assist random number counter C4 are the winning values.

Subsequently, the process advances to step S2310 to perform determination information setting processing, and ends this processing. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for driving the movable accessory 722 of the bypass mechanism section 721 is performed. Specifically, the flag during operation of the accessory is turned on, and the operation time is set to the accessory operation timer.

The accessory in operation flag is determination information for determining whether or not the movable accessory 722 is in operation.

The role product operation timer is means for measuring the operating time (remaining time) of the movable role product 722, and is taken into account when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed from the start of operation. In this embodiment, a value "1000" corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the accessory actuation timer.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2307 is negative, in step S2111, switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display (switching display) of the special gate display device 44, and this processing ends. Then, based on the contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special gate display device 44 in the next external output process in the normal process. Specifically, the combination of lamps to be lit is set to be switched sequentially. As a result, the variable display (switching display) of the special gate display device 44 is realized at the timing of the third display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

Next, the bypass mechanism control process performed in the accessory drive control process of step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the role product operating flag indicating whether or not the movable role product 722 is in the operating state is on. Here, if it is determined that the accessory in operation flag is not ON (the movable accessory 722 is in the accommodated state), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2401 is affirmative, that is, if the role product operating flag is ON, the movable role product 722 is considered to be in a projecting state, and the role product operation timer subtraction process is performed in step S2402. Each time this process is performed, the value of the accessory activation timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2403, and it is determined whether or not the prescribed projecting time has elapsed by taking into consideration the value of the accessory actuation timer after the above subtraction. Here, when the defined projecting time has passed, that is, when the value of the accessory activation timer has become "0", step S2403 is positively determined. If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, the process proceeds to step S2404, and after performing end setting processing in step S2404, this processing ends. In the end setting process of step S2404, the process of turning off the accessory in operation flag is performed.

Various control signals are output to the bypass mechanism unit 721 (movable accessory solenoid 725) in the external output process of the next normal process based on the ON/OFF state of the accessory operating flag. When the accessory operating flag is ON, a drive signal is output to excite the movable accessory solenoid 725, and the movable accessory 722 is in a projecting state. On the other hand, when the accessory operating flag is off, a drive signal is output to de-energize the movable accessory solenoid 725, and the movable accessory 722 is placed in the accommodated state.

Next, the remaining ball monitoring processing in step S212 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7101, in order to specify the number of game balls remaining in the internal area 401, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is "0".

As described above, the "remaining ball monitoring counter" is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the internal ball entry detection switch 437, and the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, 15R entry detection switch 734, and 7R entry detection switch 735 , 3R incoming ball detection switch 736 and special gate switch 651 are decremented by one.

If the determination in step S7101 is affirmative, that is, if no game balls remain in the internal area 401, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7101, then in step S7102, the value of the monitoring timer for determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the game ball finally entered the internal area 401. is "0".

If the determination in step S7102 is negative, the value of the watchdog timer is decremented by 1 in step S7103, and this processing ends. In this embodiment, when a ball enters the internal area 401, "10000" is set to the monitoring timer. Therefore, the watchdog timer becomes "0" 40 seconds after the last ball is entered in the internal area 401.例文帳に追加Also, in this embodiment, the time from when the game ball enters the internal area 401 until it is discharged (specifically, after the game ball is detected by the internal ball detection switch 437, the game ball Non-special entry detection switch 462, 15R entry detection switch 734, 7R entry detection switch 735, 3R entry detection switch 736, or time to be detected by special gate switch 651) is approximately 8 seconds to 30 seconds.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7102, that is, even if the time assumed as the time from when the game ball enters the internal area 401 to when it is ejected has passed significantly, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is " 0”, it is assumed that ball clogging has occurred in the inner area 401, and error notification processing is performed in step S7104. For example, control is performed such as lighting the error display lamp 104, outputting an error notification sound, or prohibiting the shooting of game balls. After that, this process is terminated.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, first the reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 34, and then the main processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing reception interrupt processing executed by the payout control device 311. As shown in FIG. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 . When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby for a while, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513 in step S3001, and the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and terminates this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

In this embodiment, the reception processing of the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is performed by the interrupt processing executed when the command is received. In interrupt processing, it is checked whether or not a command has been received before command determination processing (step S3201) is performed. The reception flag may be turned on, and if the command has not been received, the process may proceed to the command determination process. In such a case, whether or not the command has been received is checked by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S3101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

After that, in step S3106, it is determined whether information on the occurrence of power failure is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 or not. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of RAM 513 . It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup by checking whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If power failure occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

At step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and at step S3116 the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3114 the interrupt is permitted.

On the other hand, on the condition that power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106, and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, processing at the time of power recovery process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power cutoff is restored, in step S3110, the power cutout occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag for permitting the payout of prize balls is cleared. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. FIG. Furthermore, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, in the process of step S3122, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is set, it means that the power has been shut off, so the processing from step S3123 onwards is performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. In the power failure process, first, in step S3123, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, and in the next step S3124, command determination processing, which will be described later, is executed. After that, in step S3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area, in step S3126 the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step S3127 the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 513a. , the RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 513 .

In the process of step S3122, the power failure occurrence information is confirmed after the process that is performed when the power is turned on is completed. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, the return can be easily performed, and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S3201, a command from the main controller 261 is acquired, and determination processing of the command is performed.

Here, the command determination processing in step S3201 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 34).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main controller 261, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command reception flag is on in step S3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read out from the RAM 513 is discriminated in the processing of steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 whether it is a prize ball command It is determined whether or not

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307. Since the controller 261 has instructed the initialization of the RAM 513, the work area (area) of the RAM 513 other than the stack area is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. After that, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311, and the payout permission of prize balls is set.

As described above, the main controller 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. is performed, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 is initialized due to the timing of initialization being shifted, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Also, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of prize balls can be reliably set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307, this command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. FIG. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized while the payout permission flag is set. Since the payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is turned on, it will not be paid out if there are prize balls remaining. A bad effect occurs and the player loses, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, the loss to the player can be prevented.

Also, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power shutdown, In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is power-off occurrence information and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power-off, payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), in step S3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to allow the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the commands to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the payout of prize balls. . In addition, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so the prize balls can be paid out early for the win. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

It should be noted that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is ended without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, returning to the flowchart of FIG. 36, description will be made. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is terminated as it is. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main controller 261 .

On the other hand, if the determination in step S3202 is affirmative, the firing control device 312 is set to permit firing in step S3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204. Execute the return operation. By this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated forward and reverse, and the ball clogging is resolved (returned to a normal state). .

Thereafter, in step S3205, setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full cancellation state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower tray 15. FIG. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower tray full switch. When the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state is set. Perform state setting. Further, in step S3206, setting of the no-ball-in-tank state (out-of-ball state) or no-ball-in-tank canceled state (with-ball state) is executed according to the change in the state of the ball in the tank. That is, the no-ball-in-tank state is determined by the detection signal of the no-tank-ball switch, the no-ball-in-tank state, the no-ball-in-tank state are set, the no-ball-in-tank state, and the no-tank-ball canceled state are executed. Run the settings.

After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a prize ball and rental ball payout control process is executed. Specifically, payout number setting processing is performed in step S3208, motor control state acquisition processing is performed in step S3209, and motor driving processing is performed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked, and on the condition that the ball removal is not allowed and the ball removal operation is not started, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process. In subsequent step S3212, control of vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged. After that, it returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt processing.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 in step S3902. A command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 . The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In subsequent step S3903, pending information storage processing is performed to store the variation information included in the preceding command in the pending information storage area provided in the RAM 553. FIG. In the starting command, as described above, whether the first start prize winning portion 33a or the second start prize prize portion 33b is a variable display triggered by the ball entering the start prize prize portion 33 (the start prize determination flag setting), information indicating whether it is fluctuation information corresponding to the jackpot (setting of the jackpot generation flag), information indicating whether it is a fluctuation display corresponding to the long or short information indicating whether the variation display corresponds to the loss (setting of the loss flag), the variation time of the variation display (2-second variation flag, 3-second variation flag, 7-second variation flag, setting of 0.1 second variation flag).

Further, the pending information storage area, like the special variable pending area of the main controller 261, comprises four pending areas (first pending area to fourth pending area) and one execution area. In the pending information storage area, the variation information included in the preceding command is stored chronologically in accordance with the reception history of the preceding command based on the variable display (information stored in the special variable pending area). By adopting this configuration, the sub-controller 262 can also grasp the fluctuation information stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the main controller 261 .

Here, the hold information storage processing in step S3903 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not an advance command has been received (whether or not the advance command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, in step S4102, the pending counter Np for counting the pending number of variation information stored in the pending information storage area is incremented by one.

In the following step S4103, the variation information including the information on whether it is a big win, the information on whether it is a small win, the information on the variation time, etc. included in the starting command is stored in the first open reservation area of the reservation information storage area. Store in area. After that, in step S4104, the values of various counters used for determining the effect display contents are obtained, and the values are stored in the same holding area as the variation information is stored.

After performing the process of step S4104, or when a negative determination is made in step S4101, the process proceeds to step S4105, and whether or not the variation pattern command is received (whether the variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 or not). If the determination in step S4105 is affirmative, in step S4106, the value of the pending counter Np is subtracted by one.

After step S4106, in step S4107, a process of shifting the data stored in the pending information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data (including flag information) stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved information storage area to the execution area side. , second reservation area→first reservation area, third reservation area→second reservation area, fourth reservation area→third reservation area, and so on.

After the processing of step S4107 is performed, or if a negative determination is made in step S4105, this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 38, after step S3903 or if a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed since. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step S3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process moves to step S3911.

In step S3905, update processing of various counters used for determining the effect display contents is executed. In the following step S3906, display setting processing is performed. Here, basically based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 upon reception of the variation pattern command, various arithmetic processing such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and output setting of the command are performed. Therefore, the display mode to be displayed on the effect display device 42 is determined here. At this time, the sub-control device 262 performs processing based on a table that associates the types of various effects (variation types) with variation pattern commands.

In addition, the display command is, for example, a command for specifying a series of display effects from the start to the end of the variable display, or a command for specifying a display effect during the big win, and is information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553. A necessary display command is generated each time. Normally, the display commands related to the variable display generated by the sub-control device 262 are roughly divided into a group of normal variable data and a group of ready-to-win effect data. By sequentially outputting in accordance with a predetermined time order based on , a display effect corresponding to various variation patterns is performed. For example, the normal fluctuation data group consists of normal fluctuation data 1, normal fluctuation data 2, . n, data output is sequentially performed in the order of normal fluctuation data 1→2→ . . . , data output is performed in order of n.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in accordance with a command from the sub-control device 262 and starts variable display, etc. on the effect display device 42 . Once the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, the sub-controller 262 and the display controller 45 cooperate to continue the effect display until the confirmation command is received. Then, when the confirmation command is received, the variable display on the effect display device 42 is stopped.

Further, in step S3906, it is confirmed whether or not the effect button 125 has been operated, and if it is confirmed that the effect button 125 has been operated, settings are made accordingly. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when "4" is set to the variation counter in the end setting process, or when the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 in the determination information setting process, the command including that effect is mainly used. The command information is output from the control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and the sub-control device 262 displays the remaining number of times of the time reduction mode on the effect display device 42 based on the command information.

In addition, in step S3906, when the sub-controller 262 receives an operation notice command output from the main controller 261 based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650, the movable accessory 722 is activated. A configuration may be adopted in which an operation forewarning performance for notifying that it is the intense heat time is performed.

For example, when the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 at what timing by the route distribution member 603, the movable accessory 722 is better. A production or the like is performed to notify that it will operate at the timing.

In the lamp setting process of step S3907, the lighting pattern of lamps/electrical decorations is set in order to synchronize with the effect performed by the central winning unit 37 and the display effect performed by the effect display device .

In the sound setting process of step S3908, the output pattern of the speaker 24 is set in order to synchronize with the effect performed by the central winning unit 37 and the display effect performed by the effect display device 42. FIG. Also, when a command related to sound such as notification of error occurrence is transmitted from the main controller 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step S3908.

In step S3909, a customer waiting effect (for example, a demo screen which is set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses while the display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43 is not being performed on the effect display device 42). display) and other processing such as control settings.

In step 3910, an external output process is executed to transmit control signals based on the settings in steps S3905 to S3909 to each device. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when causing the effect display device 42 to perform a display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43 .

After the processing of steps S3905 to S3910 performed every 1 msec is executed, or if the determination in step S3904 is negative, the process proceeds to step S3911 to determine whether the RAM 553 stores information on occurrence of power failure. determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261 .

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step S3912 to determine whether or not the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 has been destroyed, the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3911 that power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3913. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

As described in detail above, according to the present embodiment, the game ball launched into the game area enters the starting winning portion 33 (first starting winning portion 33a or second starting winning portion 33b), and When a small winning lottery based on the winning ball is won, the vane member 404 of the central winning unit 37 opens and closes, and the ball opening 403 is opened for a predetermined time.

When the ball entry opening 403 is opened, the game ball entering the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 through the ball entry opening 403 is dropped through the introduction passage 601 and into the drop passage 602. be guided to

The destination of the game ball dropped down the drop path 602 is a normal guide path 604 that can be guided to the win/fail lottery area 407 or a special guide path 605 that can be guided to the accessory actuation lottery area 409 by the route sorting member 603. distributed to.

However, normally, the route distribution member 603 is in a right inclined state, and since the special guide passage 605 on the right side is closed, game balls falling down the drop passage 602 are guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side. will be taken.

When the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604, the route distribution member 603 is tilted to the left for a predetermined period of time due to the force received from the contacting game ball. Therefore, if there is a game ball falling down the drop path 602 at this timing, the game ball will be guided to the special guide path 605 .

The game balls guided to the normal guide passage 604 are guided to the success/fail lottery area 407, and their destinations are sorted by the rotator unit 410 (rotator 414). Here, when a game ball enters the first V winning path 427 and is detected by the first special ball entering detection switch 461, the right to generate a jackpot state (V prize jackpot) is granted. The Rukoto.

After that, the game ball detected by the first special entering ball detection switch 461 is guided to the type lottery area 408 and used for determination of the jackpot type. After the jackpot type (number of rounds) is determined here, the jackpot state is started.

On the other hand, the game ball guided to the special guidance passage 605 is guided to the accessory operation lottery area 409 and passes through the special gate 650 . When the game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 of the special gate 650, an operation assist lottery is conducted, and if the player wins the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 operates for a predetermined time.

When the movable accessory 722 is activated and protrudes from the stage portion 432 , the normal guide passage 604 and the bypass passage 737 communicate with each other through the second V winning passage 730 in the movable accessory 722 .

When the game ball enters the second V winning passage 730 while the movable accessory 722 is in operation, the game ball is guided to the bypass passage 737 and detected by the second special ball detection switch 738. By doing so, the right to generate a jackpot state (V prize jackpot) is granted.

After that, when the game ball enters the 15R ball entrance 731 via the bypass passage 737, the 15R jackpot is started.

That is, when the movable accessory 722 is in the operating state (protruding state), the game ball guided to the normal guide passage 604 directly enters the 15R without going through the rotating body unit 410 and the type sorting mechanism 741. You will be guided to the spherical mouth 731 .

Main effects of this embodiment will be described below. As described above, in this embodiment, by providing the movable accessory 722 in the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37, the behavior of the game ball entering the inner area 401 can be changed. Especially in this embodiment, by activating the movable accessory 722, it is possible to perform a game effect that increases the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the V prize jackpot. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball is detected at the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) of the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, an operation assist that determines whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 A lottery is held, and the movable accessory 722 is configured to operate when winning the operation assist lottery.

As a result, the movable accessory 722 does not always move regularly or continuously, and does not operate every time the special gate switch 651 detects the ball entering. It is possible to suppress the monotony of the performance and increase the player's expectation for the movement of the movable accessory 722.例文帳に追加

In addition, by providing a trigger ball entry means (special gate 650) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable accessory 722 in the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37, based on the behavior of the game ball entering the inner area 401, Since it is determined whether or not the movable accessory 722 is in an advantageous state, etc., the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area 401 of the central prize winning unit 37, further improving interest. can be achieved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the special gate 650 is discharged outside the internal area 401, and cannot flow down to the 1st V winning passage 427 or the like (ball cannot enter). If the game ball passing through the special gate 650 flows down toward the first V prize passage 427, etc., there is a risk that the timing at which the movable accessory 722 acts on the game ball will always be constant. There is As a result, the effect of the action of the movable accessory 722 is always the same, and there is a possibility that the player's interest may decrease. Furthermore, there is a possibility that fraud such as vibrating the gaming machine may be easily performed in accordance with the operation timing of the movable accessory 722 . In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the first V winning passage 427 or the like through the normal guide passage 604 without going through the special gate 650 may be disturbed. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the game ball passing through the special gate 650 and the game ball on which the movable accessory 722 acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. can.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the destination of the game ball that entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, the normal guide passage 604 that can guide the winning lottery area 407, or the role product operation lottery area 409 (special gate 650) is provided with a route distribution member 603 for distribution to a special guide passage 605 that can be guided to 650).

Then, for example, when two game balls enter the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 continuously, the preceding first game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604, and the following second game ball is guided to the guide passage 604. The ball is configured to be guided to the special guide passage 605 . As a result, when two game balls enter the internal area 401 in succession, the game balls can be directed to both the normal guide path 604 and the special guide path 605, respectively. The action and effect of will be more effective.

However, in the present embodiment, under the configuration in which game balls are shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds by the shooting device 60, the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds during the "short hit", At the time of "long small win", the blade member 404 is configured to be opened for 1.5 seconds. As a result, during one open state period in which the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404) is in the open state, it is advantageous to the player that a plurality of game balls enter the central winning unit 37 continuously. The configuration makes it difficult for the situation to occur frequently.

Under this configuration, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the central winning unit 37 at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the blade member 404), the action of the movable accessory 722 (assist ), and if the configuration is such that the game ball does not win the V prize with a higher probability, the game is started at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the central winning unit 37 continuously at the same time. There is a risk that people's expectations will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after a predetermined game ball passes through the special gate 650, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the special gate display device 44 (time until the movable accessory 722 starts operating) ) is set to “1 second”, and the operation time of the movable accessory 722 after the start of operation is set to “4 seconds”.

As a result, for example, other game balls do not enter the central prize winning unit 37 together with the game balls that have entered the special gate 650, or enter the central prize winning unit 37 together with the game balls that have entered the special gate 650. Even if the game ball does not win the V prize, the game ball that enters the central prize winning unit 37 after that is given a chance of winning the V prize with a higher probability.

In other words, a game ball other than the game ball entering the central winning unit 37 at the same time as the game ball passing through the special gate 650 (for example, during one open state period of the blade member 404) has a higher probability. It is configured to give you a chance to win a V prize.

More specifically, for example, two game balls enter the internal region 401 during one open state period of the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404), and the preceding first game ball (first identified A game ball that has passed through the entrance portion 601b as a region) flows down into the normal guide passage 604, and the second subsequent game ball (the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion 601b next) flows down into the special guide passage 605. After that, when the game ball that has flowed down to the special guide passage 605 passes through the special gate 650 and the movable accessory 722 is activated, at the time the game ball that has flowed down to the normal guide passage 604 passes through the movable accessory 722, Even if the movable accessory 722 has not yet operated and the game ball that has flowed down to the normal guide passage 604 does not receive the action (assist) of the movable accessory 722 and does not win the V prize, then the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404) during the next open state period, the game ball that entered the inner area 401 (the game ball that passed through the entrance portion 601 after that) flows down to the normal guide passage 604, and due to the action of the movable accessory 722, A chance to win the V prize will be given.

Of course, instead of the above configuration, the variable display time (the time until the movable accessory 722 starts to operate) performed by the special gate display device 44, the operation time of the movable accessory 722 after the start of operation, etc. A game in which various set times are set to times different from the set times, and a predetermined game ball enters the internal area 401 after a relatively long period of time (for example, one minute or more) after passing through the special gate 650. A configuration may be adopted in which the ball normally flows down to the guide passage 604 and the action of the movable accessory 722 gives a chance of winning the V prize.

With such a configuration, the player actively tries to make the game ball enter the central winning unit 37 even after confirming that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650. It is possible to do As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Here, each of the following configurations may be applied to the above embodiment individually, or may be applied to the above embodiment by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described embodiment is of a type in which a jackpot state (direct hit jackpot) occurs in which the variable prize winning device 32 opens and closes when a jackpot win is won in a winning lottery based on the ball entering the starting prize winning section 33. and a central prize winning unit 37 which is opened when a small prize is won in a winning lottery based on the entry of a ball into a starting prize winning section 33, and the central prize winning unit 37 is provided. It also has the function of a type of game machine (so-called old type 2 pachinko machine) in which a game ball entering the unit 37 enters the first V winning path 427 or the like to generate a big win state (V winning big win). , a so-called one-kind-two-mixer.

Not limited to this, it may be implemented as another type of pachinko machine that provides a predetermined game value. The game value includes, for example, game media such as prize balls paid out to the player, a special prize state (round) given during the big win, and a game mode such as a high probability mode given after the big win. In addition to the pachinko machine, it can also be implemented as various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a mammoth ball.

For example, without performing a predetermined lottery process when a game ball enters the starting winning part 33 (or a lottery process with a winning probability of 100% may be performed), based on the ball entering the starting winning part 33 , the central winning unit 37 is in an open state, and a game ball entering the central winning unit 37 enters the 1V winning path 427 or the like to cause a big win state (so-called old type 2 pachinko) machine).

Further, instead of the variable winning device 32, a configuration may be adopted in which a central winning unit 37 as variable ball winning means opens and closes to generate a big winning state. In such a case, the variable winning device 32 may be omitted. In other words, when a big win is won in a winning lottery based on a ball entering a predetermined starting ball-entering means, a predetermined variable ball-entering means (large winning opening as a specific area) opens and closes to create a jackpot state. The machine may have a configuration in which a movable body is provided in the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, a variable ball entry means such as a central prize winning unit 37 which is opened when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery based on the ball entering the starting prize winning section 33 is provided, and a game ball entering the variable ball entry means is provided. may be implemented as a type of gaming machine in which a specific game value is given when a ball enters a special ball entry means such as a V winning hole. In other words, in this type of game machine, a movable body may be provided in the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, in the central winning unit 37 according to the above-described embodiment, a game ball that enters the left ball entry opening 403 always passes through the left entrance 601b that constitutes the specific area, and enters the right ball entry opening 403. A game ball that has entered is configured to always pass through the right entrance portion 601b that constitutes the specific area, and a game ball that has entered the internal area 401 is detected by either the left or right internal ball that constitutes a predetermined detection means. A switch 437 always detects it. However, various configurations related to the specific region and the predetermined detection means, such as the position and number of the specific region and the predetermined detection means, are not limited to the configuration related to the entrance portion 601b and the internal entrance detection switch 437. Other configurations may be employed. For example, one exit portion 601a of the introduction passage 601 is defined as a specific region, and an internal ball entry detection switch 437 as a predetermined detection means is arranged here. It may be configured to be provided at a position different from the portion 601b.

Further, in the central winning unit 37, one of the pair of left and right ball entry openings 403 and the like (including the pair of left and right blade members 404, the introduction passage 601 and the pair of left and right inlets 601b) may be omitted. good. For example, the left ball entrance opening 403 and the like (including the left blade member 404, the left portion of the introduction passage 601 and its left inlet portion 601b) are omitted, and the right ball entrance opening 403 and the like (the right blade (including the member 404, the right portion of the introduction passage 601, and the inlet portion 601b on the right side thereof). As a result, there is one ball passage (the right side of the introduction passage 601) through which the game balls can pass one by one and can guide the game balls one by one to the exit portion 601a as a specific area provided only in one place. It is a configuration provided only for In other words, a game ball that does not pass through the one ball passage cannot enter the internal area 401 through the exit portion 601a. Also, the ball passage (the right part of the lead-in passage 601) is provided at a position through which only the game ball that is shot with a predetermined strength (right-handed) and jumps over the center winning unit 37 can pass.

Instead of or in addition to this, at the outer position (outer position than the blade member 404) on one side (for example, the right side) of the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, the ball entry opening 403 on the one side (one side A ball passage (such as a ball passage member having a ball passage) that can guide game balls one by one to the side blade member 404, one side portion of the introduction passage 601, and the entrance portion 601b on the one side. may be configured as follows.

In addition, in a specific area such as the exit portion 601a and the entrance portion 601b of the introduction passage 601, while allowing the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction (internal area 401 side), the game ball in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction It is good also as a structure provided with the control means (valve-shaped member etc. which change a state from a 1st state to a 2nd state by the force received from a game ball) which controls the passage of.

Incidentally, the winning probability related to various lotteries related to the pachinko machine 10 (soft lottery process, lottery by mechanical mechanism, etc.) is appropriately set for each model, and any value can be adopted. . It goes without saying that the configuration of the board surface of the game board 30 can also be changed as appropriate.

Also, the game machine may be implemented as a type of game machine that circulates game balls in the game machine and does not directly pay out the game balls to the player, that is, a so-called enclosed pachinko machine.

(b) The types of jackpots (the number of rounds, the content of the configuration, etc.) are not limited to the above embodiment, and different configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the types of the jackpot state are "3 round jackpot" in which the grand prize state (round) is repeated three times, "7 round jackpot" in which the grand prize state (round) is repeated seven times, and the grand prize state (round ) is repeated 15 times.

Of course, the gaming machine may be implemented as a gaming machine in which only one type of jackpot state (for example, a 15-round jackpot) occurs, instead of a gaming machine in which a plurality of types of jackpot states can occur.

(c) The configuration of the game mode to be awarded after the end of the jackpot state (granting period, configuration content, etc.) is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state, a time reduction mode is provided in which the time (variation time) of the variable display on the special display device 43 is shortened while the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43. However, the application period of the time reduction mode is not limited to this. For example, after the end of the big win state, the time reduction mode may be continued until the next big win state occurs.

Further, as a game mode after the end of the big win state, a high probability mode or the like may be provided in which the winning probability of the big win state (direct hit big win) is high instead of or in addition to the time shortening mode. A specific game mode such as a time reduction mode or a high probability mode may be set as a special game state. After the end of the jackpot state, when a jackpot with the right to be given a high probability mode, that is, a so-called probability variable jackpot occurs, a special display device 43 or the like is made to perform a stop display in a specific mode corresponding to the probability variable jackpot. may Of course, the game machine may be configured such that the time reduction mode, the high probability mode, etc. are not provided after the end of the jackpot state.

Further, in the above embodiment, the winning probability of the ball entry assist lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 34 and the winning probability of the operation assist lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball to the special gate switch 651 The probability is configured to be the same in any mode.

Not limited to this, as a game mode after the end of the big win state, instead of or in addition to the time reduction mode or the high probability mode, the winning probability of the ball entry assist lottery, the winning probability of the operation assist lottery, the small winning ( In particular, a configuration may be adopted in which a mode (high support mode) in which the winning probability of a long small win is higher than in the normal mode is performed. At least one of these high support modes may be a specific game mode.

(d) The configuration related to the accessory activation lottery (accessory activation lottery area 409, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(d-1) For example, in the above embodiment, whether or not to activate the movable accessory 722 when a game ball is detected at the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) provided in the accessory activation lottery area 409 An actuation assist lottery is held to decide whether or not, and when the actuation assist lottery is won, the actuation condition is established and the movable accessory 722 is configured to act.

Without being limited to this, for example, when a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 without performing the lottery process, the operating condition is always satisfied and the movable accessory 722 may be configured to operate.

Further, it is also possible to provide a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the special gate switch 651, and when the counted value exceeds a predetermined number, the operating condition is satisfied and the movable accessory 722 is operated. good. Alternatively, a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the special gate switch 651 is provided, and when the counted value exceeds a predetermined number, a predetermined lottery process is executed and a predetermined lottery result is obtained. In this case, the operating condition may be established and the movable accessory 722 may be operated.

(d-2) In addition, the operation assist lottery for determining whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 is not a software lottery process, but a mechanical lottery mechanism such as a rune is provided in the internal area 401 of the central prize winning unit 37, A lottery may be drawn based on the behavior of the game ball. However, it is preferable to perform lottery processing by software in terms of simplifying the configuration of the central winning unit 37 .

For example, in the role product operation lottery area 409, game balls do not always pass through the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651), but the game balls pass through the special gate 650 at a predetermined rate (or do not pass). may be

(d-3) In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the trigger ball entry means (special gate) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable accessory 722 is provided in the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37. However, the position where the opportunity ball entry means (special gate) is provided is not limited to this, and may be different.

For example, the central winning unit 37 has a second internal area different from the internal area 401 (an area where a ball can be entered from an entrance different from the ball entry opening 403 opened and closed by the blade member 404). A configuration in which an opportunity ball entry means (special gate) is provided in the inner area may be employed.

(d-4) In addition, like the through gate 34, an opportunity ball entry means (special gate) is provided in the game area outside the central winning unit 37, and game balls flowing down the game area can enter (pass). may be configured. It should be noted that the configuration related to the opportunity ball entry means is not limited to a ball entry means such as a through gate through which the entered game ball can pass, but is an entrance such as a prize opening through which the entered game ball is discharged out of the game area. Ball means may be used. Then, a predetermined lottery process is executed based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined through gate or a predetermined prize winning opening, and predetermined operation conditions are met, such as when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained. It may be configured such that the movable accessory 722 operates when it is established. For example, as will be described later, when a game ball is detected by the starting winning parts 33a, 33b (starting winning switches 224a, 224b) during the lottery invalid period, an operation assist lottery to determine whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 is performed. It may be configured such that the operation condition is established and the movable accessory 722 is operated when the operation assist lottery is won.

In addition, after entering the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) and being guided to the special guide passage 605, the game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651, the back side of the game board 30 Instead of being discharged to the central winning unit 37, it may be configured to return to the game area outside the central winning unit 37 again.

Also, the game ball entering the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) and guided to the special guide passage 605 passes through the special guide passage 605 without being detected by the predetermined ball detecting means, Returning to the game area outside the central winning unit 37, the ball is configured to be able to enter an opportunity ball entry means (special gate, etc.) provided in the game area outside the central award winning unit 37, where the opportunity ball is entered. A configuration that can be detected by detection means (a special gate switch or the like) may be employed.

However, if the opportunity ball entry means (special gate) for detecting the movement opportunity of the movable accessory 722 is arranged outside the central prize winning unit 37, the opportunity ball entry detection means (special gate switch) can be detected by using a wire rod or the like. erroneous detection and activating the movable accessory 722. From this point of view, the opportunity ball entry means (special gate) is arranged in the central prize winning unit 37. is more preferred.

(d-5) In the above embodiment, when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, the special gate display device 44 starts a variable display, and after a predetermined period of time, stops displaying in a manner corresponding to the lottery result of the operation assist lottery. is performed, and if the lottery result of the actuation assist lottery here is a winning result, then the movable accessory 722 is configured to operate.

The present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the display means (the special gate display device 44) for displaying the lottery result of the operation assist lottery is omitted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the special gate display device 44 is uniform (1 second), but this is not limiting, and a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation display times are provided. may be configured.

For example, in the main control unit 261, a variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns with different variation display times, and a special gate switch 651 based on the detection of a game ball, stored in the variation pattern storage means A variation pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of a plurality of variation patterns, and controlling the special gate display device 44 based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means. good too.

As a result, the variable time from when the variable display is started to when the stop display is made on the special gate display device 44 can be made variable. As a result, the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 to when the movable accessory 722 actually enters the operating state (advantageous state) can be made variable.

(d-6) In the above embodiment, a new game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 during the variable display on the special gate display device 44 or during the operation of the movable accessory 722. However, the variable display (operation assist lottery result) for that amount is not withheld. In other words, the activation assist lottery for that amount is invalidated, and the right to activate the movable accessory 722 is not newly granted.

Not limited to this, when a new game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or during the operation of the movable accessory 722, a predetermined number of times A configuration may be provided with holding means (variation holding area) capable of holding the variable display of minutes (operation assist lottery result).

Here, the holding means (variation holding area) includes one execution area and a plurality of holding areas, for example, in the same manner as the normal fluctuation holding area that stores the value of the entry assist random number counter C3 in the above embodiment. The values of the actuation assist random number counter C4 may be stored in the plurality of reservation areas in chronological order in accordance with the history of passage of game balls to the special gate 650. FIG. Of course, the information stored in the holding means is not limited to the value of the actuation assist random number counter C4, and other information may be stored.

(e) The configuration related to route distribution (route distribution area 406, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(e-1) For example, the route sorting member 603 of the above embodiment is pivotally supported to be able to swing, and is normally maintained in a right inclined state by an urging means such as a coil spring (not shown) so that the drop path 602 can be moved. A falling game ball can flow down to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side. In this state, when the game ball falling down the drop passage 602 is guided to the left normal guide passage 604, the route distribution member 603 is moved by the force received from the game ball contacting the left piece portion 614. , rotates in the counterclockwise direction against the biasing force of the biasing means, is left inclined for a predetermined time, and the game balls falling down the drop passage 602 can flow down to the special guide passage 605 on the right side. state is configured.

The configuration (shape, operation mode, etc.) of the route distribution means is not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, the shaft pin 610 is fixed to the shaft portion 611 of the route distribution member 603, and the shaft portion 611 protrudes toward the rear side of the upper rear wall portion 400a. It has an action piece 800 extending downward from its rear end, and a pair of coil springs 801 and 802 as maintenance means for supporting the action piece 800 from the left and right. The central piece 613 may be configured to be maintained in a balanced state (reference posture) without tilting to the left or right at the central position in the left-right direction (the position of the shaft pin 610).

With such a configuration, when a game ball falls to the route distribution member 603 which is in an equilibrium state at normal times, the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side, or is guided to the special guide passage on the right side. It is in a state where it is not known whether it will be guided to 605 or not.

Then, when a game ball falling against the route distribution member 603 in equilibrium is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side, for example, the route distribution member 603 moves from the game ball that comes into contact with the right piece portion 615. By the received force, it once rotates in the clockwise direction and enters the first state (first posture), that is, the right-tilted state [see FIG. As a result, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction and enters a left tilted state (see FIG. 41(b)), which is the second state (second posture). After that, the route distributing member 603 swings left and right a plurality of times, and then returns to a balanced state due to the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802, such that the route distributing member 603 is tilted to the right again.

Similarly, when a game ball falling against the route distribution member 603 in equilibrium is guided to the left normal guide passage 604, the route distribution member 603 is placed in contact with the left piece 614. After it rotates in the counterclockwise direction by the force received from the coil springs 801 and 802, it rotates in the clockwise direction by the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802, and becomes in the right tilted state. After that, the route distributing member 603 swings left and right a plurality of times so as to be in the left tilted state again, and then returns to the balanced state by the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802 .

Under such a configuration, when two game balls continuously fall to the root distribution member 603 in equilibrium, for example, when the preceding first game ball is guided to the left normal guide passage 604 Then, the following second game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side. Conversely, when the preceding first game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side, the subsequent second game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side.

According to the above configuration, a plurality of game balls falling continuously are alternately distributed to different routes while adopting a relatively simple configuration without providing a driving means for driving the route distribution member 603. configuration can be realized. As a result, simplification of the configuration and control, compactness, etc. can be achieved.

(e-2) In the route distributing member 603 illustrated in FIG. 46, instead of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802, a weight is attached to the lower end of the action piece 800, so that the route distributing member 603 normally operates. The route distribution member 603 may be configured to be freely swingable by the action of the game ball while maintaining the balanced state.

(e-3) In place of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802, the route distribution member 603 illustrated in FIG. A configuration may be adopted in which the route distribution member 603 periodically or continuously swings between the right-tilting state and the left-tilting state. Alternatively, the route distributing means such as the route distributing member 603 may normally be in a stopped state, and may enter a predetermined operating state only when a predetermined drive condition is satisfied and a specific state is established.

(e-4) The route sorting means may not operate, and may be fixed to the housing 400 or the like, or may be integrally provided. In other words, the route may be distributed according to the random behavior of the game ball. In addition, various other configurations related to the route sorting means, such as the position and number of the route sorting means, are not limited to the above embodiment, and different configurations may be adopted. For example, one or a plurality of route distribution means may be provided at positions different from those in the above-described embodiment (other variable ball entry means different from the above-described central winning unit 37).

(f) The configuration of various guidance routes is not limited to the above embodiment.

(f-1) For example, although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, in the configuration according to the above embodiment, from the time the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball From the time the game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 by the route distribution member 603 than the movable body arrival time until reaching the movable accessory 722 (the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604), the game ball reaches the special gate. 650 (special gate switch 651), it is preferable to shorten the time required for the movable accessory 722 to reach an advantageous state.

From the time when the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722 (the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604). The game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 by the distributing member 603, the game ball reaches the special gate 650, and the advantageous state reaching time until the movable accessory 722 becomes advantageous is made longer. If so, two game balls enter the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 continuously, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, and the subsequent game ball When the second game ball is distributed to the special guide passage 605, the player will know that the game ball will reach the movable accessory 722 before the timing when the movable accessory 722 is activated. , there is a risk that interest will be significantly reduced.

Incidentally, in order to lengthen the movable body arrival time for the game ball guided to the normal guide path 604 to reach the movable accessory 722, for example, lengthening the moving distance of the game ball required to pass through the normal guide path 604 is one example. Conceivable. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, a configuration in which delay means for delaying passage of game balls is installed in the normal guide passage 604 may be employed.

Here, as the delay means, for example, a structure such as a stage or a crew, in which the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or advances after going around, or a rib or the like to stop the momentum of the game ball and delay the time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball advances over the ball.

(f-2) For example, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball is placed in the special gate as the second route (momentary ball entry guide route) for guiding the game ball distributed by the route distribution member 603 to the opportunity ball entry means (special gate). 650 is provided with only one special guide passage 605, but not limited to this, the time required for the game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means (special gate) from the route distribution member 603 is A configuration including a plurality of different second routes (momentary ball entry guidance routes) may be employed.

By providing a plurality of second routes (opportunity ball entry guide routes), the movable accessory 722 is actually in an operating state (advantageous state) from the time when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution member 603 (predetermined timing). The period until it becomes can be made variable.

In addition, according to the above configuration, the period from when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution member 603 to when the trigger ball entry means (special gate) is made variable by the mechanical structure based on the behavior of the game ball. As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area 401 of the central prize winning unit 37, which can further improve the interest.

As a more specific configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 47, when the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball moves to the movable accessory 722 (the exit portion of the normal guide passage 604). 604a), from the time the game ball is distributed by the route distribution member 603, the game ball reaches the first trigger ball entry means (first special gate 650A), and the movable accessory Advantageous state leading to the first second route (first special guide passage 605A) with a long time to reach the advantageous state until 722 is activated and the second opportunity ball entry means (second special gate 650B) A second route (second special guide passage 605B) having a short arrival time may also be provided. Here, the "first second route (first special guidance passage 605A)" constitutes the "first flow-down route", and the "second second route (second special guidance passage 605B)" constitutes A "second downstream route" is configured (the same applies hereinafter).

In the example shown in FIG. 47, a first special gate switch 651A for detecting a game ball passing through is provided at the first special gate 650A, and a game ball passing therethrough is detected at the second special gate 650B. A second special gate switch 651B is provided for sensing. Here, the ``first special gate switch 651A'' constitutes the ``first opportunity entry detection means'', and the ``second special gate switch 651B'' constitutes the ``second opportunity entry detection means'' ( Same below).

The passage widths of the special guide passages 605A, 605B and the special gates 650A, 650B are set to a width through which game balls can pass one by one. Also, game balls that have passed through the special gates 650A and 650B are discharged out of the internal area 401 through a discharge passage (not shown).

A slide member 655 capable of opening and closing the entrance is provided at the entrance of the second special guide passage 605B. The slide member 655 is slidably displaceable in the front-rear direction, and when it is displaced to a position protruding forward, it becomes a closed state in which the entrance of the second special guide passage 605B is closed, and moves to a rearward retracted position. The displacement results in an open state in which the entrance of the second special guide passage 605B is opened.

Then, when the slide member 655 is in the closed state, the game balls distributed by the route distribution member 603 as the upstream route distribution means pass through the upper surface of the slide member 655 and enter the first special guide passage. You will be directed to 605A. On the other hand, when the slide member 655 is in the open state, the game balls distributed by the route distribution member 603 are guided to the second special guide passage 605B.

Here, a configuration in which the slide member 655 always repeats the slide displacement operation may be employed, or a configuration in which the state of the slide member 655 is periodically or randomly changed may be employed. Further, in a specific state, control may be performed so that the proportion of the slide member 655 in the open state differs from the proportion in which the slide member 655 is in the closed state.

In other words, the slide member 655 constitutes the opportunity route change means (downstream route distribution means) in this embodiment, and the destination of the game ball is set to "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" or " Second second route (second special guidance passage 605B)". Note that the route sorting means such as the route sorting member 603 may be configured to open and close a predetermined route like the slide member 655 .

When game balls are detected by the special gate switches 651A and 651B, an operation assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to operate the movable accessories 722 respectively. Here, when winning the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 operates for a predetermined time. In addition, in a specific state, the winning probability in the operation assist lottery is different between when the game ball is detected by the first special gate switch 651A and when the game ball is detected by the second special gate switch 651B. may be That is, when the game ball flows down to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)", the game ball flows down to the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)" A configuration may be adopted in which the ratio at which the movable accessory 722 can be in a predetermined operating state differs depending on the case.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 47, in the first special guide passage 605A, by projecting ribs 653A, 653B, the passage length of the first special guide passage 605A, which is the movement path of the game ball, is lengthened. , the momentum of the game ball is stopped and the game ball advances over time.

Instead of or in addition to the ribs 653A and 653B, other delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball (for example, a stage, a crew, etc., where the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or advances after going around) mechanism) may be arranged in the middle of the first special guide passage 605A.

In the example shown in FIG. 47, special gates 650A and 650B (special gate switches 651A and 651B) are provided individually corresponding to the first special guide passage 605A and the second special guide passage 605B. However, instead of this, game balls passing through the first special guide passage 605A or the second special guide passage 605B move toward one special gate (special gate switch), and the same special It may be configured to be detected by a gate switch.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 47, when a game ball flows down to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)", the game ball always passes through the first special gate 650A (the first special gate 650A). When the game ball passes through the special gate switch 651A) and flows down to the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)", the game ball always passes through the second special gate 650B (second 2 special gate switch 651B), but not limited to this, game balls pass through the first special gate 650A and the second special gate 650B as trigger ball entry means at a predetermined rate. It is good also as a structure which can pass (or does not pass). In addition, when the game ball flows down to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)", the game ball goes to the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)" A configuration may be adopted in which the rate at which the game ball can pass through the opportunity ball entry means (the rate at which the movable accessory 722 can be in a predetermined operating state) differs between when it flows down.

(f-3) The configuration provided with a plurality of second routes (momentary ball entry guidance routes) as described in (f-2) above is the routes exemplified in (e-1) to (e-3) above. Under the configuration related to the distribution member 603, it is more effective.

If the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball is guided to the special guide passage by the route distribution member 603 than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722. 605, the game ball reaches the special gate 650, and the movable accessory 722 is in an advantageous state. Two game balls enter the internal area 401 continuously, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, and the subsequent second game ball is the special guide passage. If the game is sorted to 605, the player will know that the game ball will reach the movable accessory 722 before the timing when the movable accessory 722 is activated.

Conversely, under the above configuration, when the preceding first game ball is distributed to the special guide passage 605 by the route distribution member 603 and the subsequent second game ball is distributed to the normal guide passage 604 , the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big win state increases, and the player watches the behavior of the game ball guided to the special guide passage 605 with anticipation.

On the other hand, from the time the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball is specially guided by the route distribution member 603 than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722. When the game ball is guided to the passage 605, the game ball reaches the special gate 650, and when the movable accessory 722 is in an advantageous state, the time to reach the advantageous state is shortened, the central winning unit 37 Two game balls enter the internal area 401 continuously, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the special guide passage 605 by the route distribution member 603, and the subsequent second game ball is normally guided When distributed to the passage 604, unless the movable accessory 722 is maintained in an advantageous state for a relatively long period of time, the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722 after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable accessory 722 ends. There is a risk that the interest will be significantly reduced because it will be understood that it will be done.

Conversely, under the above configuration, when the preceding first game ball is distributed to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603 and the subsequent second game ball is distributed to the special guide passage 605 , the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big win state increases, and the player watches the behavior of the game ball guided to the special guide passage 605 with anticipation.

Therefore, if the configuration is provided with a plurality of second routes (opportunity ball entry guide routes) as described above, two game balls enter the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession, and the preceding one Even if the first game ball is distributed to either the normal guide passage 604 or the special guide passage 605, the second game ball that follows is the "first second route with a long time to reach an advantageous state (first Special guide passage 605A)” or “Second second route with short advantageous state arrival time (second special guide passage 605B)” depends on the timing at which the movable accessory 722 operates and the game ball Since there is still a possibility that the timing of reaching the movable accessory 722 matches, the player can watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation for the occurrence of the big win state.

(g) The configuration related to the success/failure lottery (the success/failure lottery area 407, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(g-1) For example, in the above-described embodiment, the rotating body unit 410 (rotating body 414) is provided as win/loss sorting means. The rotating body 414 has one special pocket portion 416a for big wins and two non-special pocket portions 416b for winning, and rotates counterclockwise at a constant speed.

Not limited to this, for example, the number and ratio of the pocket portions 416a and the non-special pocket portions 416b of the rotating body 414 may be changed so that the odds of winning the jackpot lottery are different.

(g-2) In addition, in the rotating body 414, for example, a special pocket portion 416a for the 3R jackpot and a special pocket portion 416a for the 7R jackpot are provided. may be In such a case, the type lottery area 408 may be omitted.

(g-3) In place of the rotating body 414, a configuration may be adopted in which another win/fail lottery mechanism such as a crun is provided.

(h) The configuration of the type lottery (type lottery area 408, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(h-1) In the type lottery area 408, there is a type distribution means (type determination means) that distributes the destination of the game ball to either the 15R ball entrance 731, the 7R ball entrance 732, or the 3R ball entrance 733. ) is provided.

Instead of the type sorting mechanism unit 741, a configuration including another type lottery mechanism such as Krun may be used.

(h-2) The type lottery area 408 may be omitted and, for example, when a game ball enters a special ball entry means such as the 1st V winning path 427, the type of jackpot state to be awarded may be determined. That is, the type determination for determining the type of the jackpot state may be performed by software determination processing.

(i) The configuration of the central winning unit 37 and the internal area 401 is not limited to the above embodiment.

For example, the route sorting area 406 (route sorting member 603) and the accessory operation lottery area 409 (special gate 650) may be omitted. In such a case, for example, when the ball is detected by the internal ball detection switch 437, an operation assist lottery may be performed to determine whether or not the movable accessory 722 is to be operated.

However, if only the movable accessory 722 is configured to perform a predetermined action based on the ball detection by the internal ball detection switch 437, the game in which the ball enters the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 The movable accessory 722 moves with respect to the ball at the same timing each time.

Therefore, in such a case, it is preferable to employ various configurations that make the operation timing variable, such as the configuration that makes the variation time variable as described above.

(j) The configuration of the movable body whose state changes based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650 (position, shape, operation mode, advantageous state, etc.) is limited to the configuration related to the movable accessory 722 of the above embodiment. However, other configurations such as an opening/closing member may be adopted.

(j-1) For example, the movable accessory 722 according to the above-described embodiment is in an operating state (advantageous state), thereby avoiding the winning lottery by the rotating body unit 410 and the type lottery by the type sorting mechanism unit 741. , the game ball normally guided to the guide passage 604 can be directly guided to the 15R ball entrance 731.

That is, when the movable accessory 722 is in an operating state (advantageous state), it is easier to win the V prize jackpot than when the movable accessory 722 is in a non-operating state (non-advantageous state). In addition, the game ball is configured to easily enter the 15R ball entrance 731 corresponding to the 15R jackpot that is the most advantageous for the player among a plurality of types of special game states (15R jackpot, 7R jackpot, and 3R jackpot). ing.

Not limited to this, it may be configured to guide the game ball to the entrance part of the type lottery area 408 while avoiding only the lottery by the rotary unit 410 and giving only the right to generate a big win state. .

(j-2) In addition, a movable body is provided in the type lottery area 408, and when the state of the movable body changes to an advantageous state, the type lottery by the type sorting mechanism unit 741 is avoided, and the game ball is placed in the 15R entrance. 731 may be configured.

(j-3) The rotator unit 410 (rotator 414) may be used as the movable body in this embodiment. For example, the rotating body 414 normally rotating at a constant speed changes its state to an advantageous state based on the passage of the game ball through the special gate 650, and the special pocket portion 416a for big wins is positioned at a position corresponding to the gate portion 435. , or the special pocket portion 416a for the big win moves to the position corresponding to the gate portion 435 at a very low speed.

(j-4) The rotating body 414 includes, for example, a special pocket portion 416a for the 3R jackpot, a special pocket portion 416a for the 7R jackpot, and a special pocket portion 416a for the 15R jackpot. In the (non-advantageous state), the special pocket portion 416a for the 15R big win is controlled to move to a position corresponding to the gate portion 435 at a very high speed, and a game ball is placed against the special pocket portion 416a for the 15R big win. makes it difficult to enter the ball, and when the game ball becomes advantageous based on passing through the special gate 650, the special pocket portion 416a for the 15R jackpot is once at a position corresponding to the gate portion 435 It may be configured to stop, or to perform control such that the special pocket portion 416a for the 15R jackpot moves to a position corresponding to the gate portion 435 at a normal speed.

(j-5) The type sorting mechanism section 741 (the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 745) may be used as the movable body in this embodiment.

For example, the first bridging plate 744 and the second bridging plate 745, which are swinging normally, change their state to an advantageous state based on the passage of the game ball through the special gate 650, and temporarily stop at the advance position, or It may be configured such that the game ball can easily enter the 15R ball entrance 731 by, for example, increasing the time in the advance position.

(j-6) Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of operating states (advantageous states) of the movable bodies (movable accessory 722, rotating body 414, type sorting mechanism 741, etc.) are set. Alternatively, it may be determined by a lottery result of a predetermined actuation lottery process. The function of determining which of a plurality of operation patterns is to be executed when the movable body is put into the operation state (advantageous state) constitutes the operation pattern determining means in the present embodiment.

Furthermore, when the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state), the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. It may be configured such that it is easier to enter a ball into the special ball-entering means (V-winning path 427, 730, etc.) than in the case, and it is easier to win a V-winning big hit. Further, when the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state), the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. A configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined type of special game state (for example, the most advantageous 15R jackpot for the player) is likely to occur among a plurality of types of special game states (eg, 15R jackpot, 7R jackpot, and 3R jackpot).

(k) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, when a winning result is obtained by the operation assist lottery, during the operation start period before the movable accessory 722 is activated, the effect of the effect display device 42 etc. The means may be configured to be capable of executing an opening effect as a preceding effect suggesting that the movable accessory 722 will be in an operating state.

Incidentally, such an opening effect is performed after the stop display when the variable display is performed on the special gate display device 44 and the stop display is performed in a mode corresponding to the lottery result of the operation assist lottery. On the other hand, in a configuration in which the special gate display device 44 is omitted (a configuration in which variable display is not performed), the operation assistance lottery is performed after a winning result is obtained.

(k-1) In addition to the above configuration, in the main controller 261 or the sub-controller 262, production pattern storage means for storing a plurality of production patterns that determine the production time of the opening production, establishment of the operating condition (for example, operation assist A performance pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of a plurality of performance patterns stored in a performance pattern storage means, and the performance pattern selection means selects one based on the case where a winning result is obtained by lottery. A configuration may also be provided with an effect control means capable of controlling a predetermined effect means based on the produced effect pattern.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make variable the operation start period (for example, opening period) from a predetermined trigger (for example, when the operation condition is established) to when the movable accessory 722 is actually in an advantageous state.

(k-2) The operation start period from a predetermined trigger (for example, when the operation condition is satisfied) until the movable accessory 722 actually becomes advantageous may be made variable without performing the opening effect or the like. .

For example, in the main control device 261, the operation pattern storage means that stores a plurality of operation patterns that determine the operation start period from the time when the operation condition is satisfied until the movable accessory 722 is in the operation state, and the special gate switch 651 The game ball is set. operation pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of a plurality of operation patterns stored in the operation pattern storage means based on the detected operation pattern; It may also be configured to include control means capable of controlling the movable accessory 722 based on the above.

(l) Not only game effects using movable bodies such as the movable accessories 722, but also other game effects may be performed.

(l-1) For example, without being guided to the first V winning passage 427, etc., the discharge route (second route) such as the out passage 428 (non-special entrance ball detection switch 462) and the special guidance passage 605 (special gate switch 651) ), when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on detection of a game ball discharged out of the internal area 401, a configuration may be adopted in which specific processing advantageous to the player can be executed. The functions of the main controller 261 and the like that execute such processing constitute the specific processing executing means in this embodiment.

As a result, not only the behavior of the game balls guided toward the 1st V winning path 427, etc., but also the game balls discharged via the discharge route (second route) are used to impart new game features. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

(l-2) Equipped with counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by ball detection means (ejection ball detection means) such as non-special entry ball detection switch 462 and special gate switch 651, and the count value is predetermined. A predetermined condition is satisfied when the count value is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, or when a predetermined lottery process is executed and a predetermined lottery result is obtained when the count value is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the predetermined condition is satisfied. , it may be configured to execute a specific process that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, as such specific processing, for example, when the movable accessory 722 is in the operating state, the processing to lengthen the time in which it is in the operating state, the processing to increase the winning probability in the operation assist lottery, the special pocket portion of the rotating body 414 416a easy to enter the game ball processing, the type lottery area 408 easy to guide the game ball to the 15R ball entrance 731, and the like.

(m) The small winning opening mode (opening/closing pattern) of the vane member 404 of the central winning unit 37 and the big winning opening opening mode (opening/closing pattern) of the big winning opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 are limited to the above embodiments. not a thing

(m-1) For example, in the above-described embodiment, the blade member 404 has two opening/closing patterns of "short win" and "long win". A configuration including one or three or more opening/closing patterns is also possible.

(m-2) In the above embodiment, the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds during the "short-time small win", and the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds during the "long-time small win". However, one opening mode (opening time) of the blade member 404 is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and other opening modes with different opening times may be provided.

(m-3) In the above-described embodiment, for one occurrence of a small win (result of one winning lottery performed based on detection of entering a ball by the first start-up prize switch 224a or the second start-up prize switch 224b), the blade member The opening and closing operation (opening operation) of 404 is performed only once (one round), but this is not limiting, and the opening and closing operation of blade member 404 is performed two or more times (multiple times) for each occurrence of a small hit. round).

(m-4) For example, a first opening/closing pattern in which the blade members 404 are opened/closed once (one round) and a second opening/closing pattern in which the blade members 404 are opened/closed twice (two rounds). A configuration in which a plurality of opening/closing patterns with different numbers of opening/closing operations (number of rounds) can be executed, such as the configuration provided with the device, may be employed. However, if a predetermined opening/closing pattern among the plurality of opening/closing patterns (for example, a long small win open for 1.5 seconds) is performed, if the predetermined opening/closing pattern is not performed (for example, a short time open for 0.5 seconds It is preferable that the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is more likely to be in a predetermined advantageous state than in the case of a small hit.

(n) Considering the remaining balls in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, the above embodiment is configured to perform the remaining ball monitoring process (step S212). Further, in the first display control process (step S205), it is determined whether or not the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is open for a small hit. It is configured so as not to end the variable display that has already started.

In place of or in addition to these configurations, the game ball is detected at the starting winning portion 33 (first starting winning portion 33a or second starting winning portion 33b) while the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is open for a small hit. It may be configured not to execute the big winning lottery or the small winning lottery when it is done. In other words, the configuration may be such that the lottery invalid period is set.

Considering the discharge period of the remaining balls, in the lottery invalid period, in addition to the opening period (small hit open period) of the blade member 404 as an open game state, after the opening period (the blade member 404 (post-closure) may be included. Of course, the lottery invalid period is not limited to this, and may be a different period. For example, the period from when the game ball enters the starting prize winning section 33 to when the small winning opening is started may be included in the lottery invalid period. In addition, in a game machine of a type in which a predetermined lottery process is performed even during a predetermined winning state (during opening/closing control of the variable ball entry means), the lottery invalid period is set so that a predetermined opening of the predetermined variable ball entry means is performed. It may be a predetermined period (lottery period) during which it is executed.

In the pachinko machine in which the lottery invalid period is set, for example, before starting the start winning process in step S304, it is determined whether or not it is during the lottery invalid period. In the prize winning process, only the prize ball payout setting (the prize ball command setting) related to the starting prize winning section 33 is performed without storing various counter values such as the win/fail random number counter C1. It is good also as composition which shifts to start prize-winning processing.

Further, when adopting such a configuration, instead of or in addition to the operation assist lottery related to the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651), during the lottery invalid period, the start prize winning section 33 (first start prize winning section 33a or the second start winning part 33b), an operation assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722, and if the operation assist lottery is won, the movable A configuration in which the accessory 722 operates may be employed.

In addition, when performing the operation assist lottery related to the start-up winning section 33, the accessory operation lottery area 409 (the special gate 650 and the special gate switch 651) and the related configuration may be omitted.

Here, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11, an example of start-up winning pre-processing that can be executed before starting the start-up winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S7700, it is determined whether or not the lottery invalid period is in effect by referring to a predetermined flag or the like. In this example, the small winning opening period of the central winning unit 37 and the predetermined period after the ending of the small winning opening period are set as the lottery invalid period. Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if it is not the lottery invalid period, this process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to the starting prize winning process of step S304.

On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative in step S7700, that is, if it is the lottery invalid period, in step S7701, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first starting winning part 33a or the second starting winning part 33b. It is determined by detection information of the starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b. When a negative determination is made in step S7701, this process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to the starting winning process of step S304.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S7701, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has won the first starting winning portion 33a or the second starting winning portion 33b, in step S7702, the third display flag is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the special gate display device 44 is in the process of changing display. When an affirmative determination is made in step S7702, this process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to the starting prize winning process of step S304.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7702, it is determined in step S7703 whether or not the accessory in operation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the movable accessory 722 is in operation. When an affirmative determination is made in step S7703, this process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to the starting winning process of step S304.

As a result, during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 and during the operation of the movable accessory 722, the game ball wins the first start prize winning portion 33a or the second start prize winning portion 33b, and the game ball wins the first start prize winning portion. Even if it is detected by the winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b, the operation assist lottery for that amount is invalidated, and the right to operate the movable accessory 722 is not newly granted.

Not limited to this, during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or during the operation of the movable accessory 722, the game ball newly wins the first start winning part 33a or the second starting winning part 33b, and the first starting A configuration may be provided with holding means (variation holding area) capable of holding variable display (operation assist lottery results) for a predetermined number of times when detected by the prize winning switch 224a or the second starting prize winning switch 224b.

Here, the holding means (variation holding area) includes, for example, one execution area and a plurality of In the plurality of reservation areas, each value of the operation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2 is chronologically set in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the start winning parts 33a and 33b. may be stored in . Of course, the information stored in the holding means is not limited to the values of the actuation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2, and other information may be stored.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7703 is negative, in step S7704, the values of the actuation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2 updated in the random number updating process of step S303 are set to the lottery invalidation set in the RAM 503. Store in the random number storage area for the period.

In the next step S7705, the starting prize determination flag for the lottery invalid period is turned on, and in step S7706, the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 newly stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalid period is the value corresponding to the assist winning. A suitability determination process is performed to determine whether or not. Here, when the value of the actuation assist random number counter C4 is a value corresponding to the winning of the assist, that is, the case of winning the act assist corresponds to the case where the predetermined condition in this example is satisfied.

In this example, it is determined whether or not the prize is won based on the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalid period. Specifically, "1 to 5" among the numerical values "0 to 19" of the actuation assist random number counter C4 are the winning values. That is, the assist winning probability is 5/20. Of course, the configuration is not limited to this, and assist winning may be performed with a different winning probability.

In the following step S7707, the variable time for determining the variable time in the invalid period display device (not shown) constituting the second display means is based on the value of the variable time selection counter C2 stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalid period. A determination process is performed, and then this process ends. Therefore, the second fluctuation pattern selection means in this example is configured by the function of executing the fluctuation time determination process and the like in step S7707.

The correspondence between the value of the variable time selection counter C2 and the variable time in the invalid period display device is stored in advance in the ROM 502 as a variable time selection table for the invalid lottery period (not shown). Therefore, the ROM 502 for storing the variation time selection table and the like constitutes the second variation pattern storage means in this example.

For example, if the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is one of "0 to 2" out of "0 to 9", the variable time of the variable display performed by the invalid period display device is set to 3 seconds. If it is any one of "3 to 5", the fluctuation time of the variable display performed by the invalid period display device is set to 5 seconds, and if it is any of "6 to 9" , the variation time of the variation display performed by the invalid period display device is set to 7 seconds.

Next, the fourth display control process performed in the normal process of FIG. 10 in relation to the invalid period display device will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The function of the main controller 261 that executes the fourth display control process constitutes the second display control means in this example.

First, in step S7801, it is determined whether or not variable display is being performed by the invalid period display device by looking at the setting status of the fourth display flag indicating whether variable display is being performed by the invalid period display device. . Specifically, when the fourth display flag is ON, it is considered that the invalid period display device is performing variable display, and when the fourth display flag is OFF, the variable display is performed on the invalid period display device. It is considered that the display is stopped, which corresponds to a state in which the display is stopped. The invalid period display device and the special gate display device 44 may be shared.

If the determination in step S7801 is negative, the process advances to step S7802 to determine whether or not the starting award determination flag for the lottery invalid period is ON. If the determination in step S7802 is negative, that is, if the start prize determination flag for the lottery invalid period is not ON, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the variable display is not in progress and the start winning judgment flag for the lottery invalid period is ON, the flow advances to step S7803 to turn off the starting winning judgment flag for the lottery invalid period. In subsequent step S7804, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing variable display in the invalid period display device have been met. Specifically, the fourth display flag is turned on, and the fourth display timer is set. The fourth display timer is means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed by the invalid period display device, and is taken into account when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. be done.

In this embodiment, the fourth display timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time determined in the variable time determination process of step S7707. That is, the value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds, the value "1250" corresponding to 5 seconds, or the value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set for the fourth display timer.

After the end of step S7804, the fourth display control process ends. In addition, based on the setting in the start setting process, when a control signal for starting variable display is output to the invalid period display device in the next external output process of the normal process, the invalid period display device , the variable display is started.

If the determination in step S7801 is affirmative, that is, if the invalid period display device is performing variable display, the flow advances to step S7806 to perform fourth display timer subtraction processing. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the fourth display timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, proceeding to step S7807, it is determined whether or not the count value of the fourth display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If the determination in step S7807 is affirmative, the fourth display flag is turned off in step S7808, and in step S7809 stop display setting is performed to perform stop display on the invalid period display device. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal is output to the invalid period display device to perform stop display in the external output processing in the next normal processing.

Subsequently, the flow advances to step S7810 to perform determination information setting processing, and terminates this processing. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for driving the movable accessory 722 of the bypass mechanism section 721 is performed. Specifically, the accessory operating flag is turned on, and the operating time is set to the accessory operating timer. In this embodiment, a value "3000" corresponding to 12 seconds is set for the accessory action timer. Thereby, the movable accessory 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state). The function of the main control device 261 that performs the driving process of the movable accessory 722 based on this setting content constitutes the movable body control means in this example.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7807 is negative, in step S7811, switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display of the invalid period display device, and this processing ends. Then, based on the contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal for switching display is output to the invalid period display device. As a result, the variable display of the invalid period display device is realized at the timing of the fourth display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

Therefore, the actuation lottery process (operation assist lottery) in this example is constituted by the random number storage process (storage of the actuation assist random number counter C4) in step S7704 and the success/failure determination process in step S7706. The function of the device 261 constitutes lottery processing execution means (invalid period lottery processing execution means).

The function of the main controller 261 that executes the random number storage process (storage of the variable time selection counter C2) in step S7704 and the variable time determination process in step S7707 constitutes the set time selection means in this example.

As described above, according to this example, the small winning opening period in which the central winning unit 37 is caused to perform a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning section 33 and the end of the small winning opening period The later predetermined period (during the remaining ball monitoring period) is set as a lottery invalid period, and whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 when a game ball newly enters the start winning part 33 within the lottery invalid period is determined. An actuation assist lottery is held to decide, and the movable accessory 722 is activated when the actuation assist lottery is won.

As a result, even during the opening period of the central winning unit 37, in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained in the conventional art, the movable accessory 722 performs a predetermined action based on the entry of the game ball into the start winning section 33. Advantageous conditions can arise.

Conventionally, when a game ball enters the starting prize winning section 33, at the opening timing of the central prize winning unit 37 related to the starting ball entering, some players know that the game ball does not win V prizes. Some players temporarily stop shooting game balls during the period when the winning unit 37 is open so that the game balls do not wastefully enter the starting winning section 33 .

On the other hand, according to the present example, even in such a situation after the game ball enters the starting prize winning portion 33, the player can newly start winning in order to be assisted by the movable accessory 722. Since game balls are required to enter the portion 33 and the game balls are continuously shot, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting prize winning section 33 is during the opening period of the central prize winning unit 37, the diversification of the game can be achieved.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

In addition, under the configuration according to this example, when a relatively small value is set for the accessory operation timer and the fourth display timer, immediately after the game ball enters the starting winning section 33 during the predetermined lottery invalid period. Then, the movable accessory 722 becomes operable, and the movable accessory 722 can act on the game ball entering the central winning unit 37 during the small winning opening before the lottery invalid period.

On the other hand, when a relatively large value is set for the accessory operation timer or the fourth display timer, the movable accessory 722 is applied to the game ball entering the central winning unit 37 after the predetermined lottery invalid period ends. It becomes the structure which can act. As a result, even if the game ball does not exist in the internal area 401 of the central prize winning unit 37 at the time when the game ball enters the starting prize winning portion 33 within the lottery invalid period, the center is opened at a predetermined timing thereafter. A game ball entering the winning unit 37 is acted upon by the movable accessory 722, and a chance of winning V is given.

As a result, the player actively tries to make the game ball enter the central prize winning unit 37 even after confirming that the game ball has entered the starting prize winning section 33 within the lottery invalid period. It is possible to play games. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

[Appendix]
Technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiments will be described below together with their effects.

Conventional problem A. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in the conventional game machine, for example, the movable body performs a predetermined action regularly or continuously regardless of the game, or the movable body moves every time the variable ball entry means is opened. The performance related to the movable body becomes monotonous, such as the player performing a predetermined action, and the player's interest (excitement) in the movement of the movable body tends to fade. In this regard, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of dramatically improving amusement.

Means A1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, a movable body that can change the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
Trigger ball entry means provided so that a game ball can enter (or pass through);
a trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means;
lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball entry detection means;
a movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined operation at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above means A1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, in this means, whether or not to place the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state is determined by a lottery. As a result, for example, the movable body does not always operate regularly or continuously, and the variable ball entry means does not open. , it is possible to suppress the monotony of the performance related to the movable body, and to increase the player's expectation for the movement of the movable body.

In particular, in this means, determination as to whether or not the movable body is to be placed in a predetermined advantageous state is performed by means of software by the lottery process execution means (actuation lottery process). As a result, there is no need to newly provide a complicated mechanism such as a mechanical lottery mechanism for performing lottery based on the behavior of game balls, and the configuration can be simplified.

Here, the arrangement position of the "opportunity ball-entering means" may be, for example, "within the internal area of the variable ball-entering means", "within an area different from the internal area of the variable ball-entering means", or "within the above-mentioned "within the game area outside the variable ball entry means" and the like.

Means A2. The game machine according to means A1, wherein the trigger ball entry means is configured to allow a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter.

According to the above means A2, by providing the trigger ball entry means (the trigger ball entry detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area can be detected. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, etc., so that the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, which will further enhance interest. can be improved.

Incidentally, if the trigger ball entry means (the trigger ball entry detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body is arranged outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), the trigger ball entry detection means may be performed using a wire rod or the like. There is a risk that fraudulent acts such as erroneous detection by the means and activation of the movable body are likely to occur.

On the other hand, according to the means A2, by providing the opportunity ball-entering means in the inner region of the variable ball-entering means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-described problems.

Means A3. The gaming machine according to means A1 or A2, wherein a game ball entering (or passing through) the trigger ball entering means cannot flow down to the special ball entering means (cannot be entered).

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the above means A3, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entering means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. can be done.

Means A4. a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the trigger ball entry means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the special ball entry means;
a route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
The game machine according to any one of means A1 to A3, wherein the movable body can change the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no interval) The same applies hereinafter), etc.), even if a situation occurs that is advantageous to the player, if all of these game balls are directed toward the opportunity ball entry means, no matter how much the movable body Even if is in an advantageous state, there is a possibility that a problem such as not even one game ball entering the special ball entering means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the above means A4, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, the preceding first game ball is the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the function and effect of providing the movable body are more effective.

It should be noted that "the first flow route (the first route) that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means, and the game ball that has passed through the specific area is the first route. In the case of a configuration including a second downstream route (second said first route) that can flow down to said special ball entry means with a higher probability than a downstream route (first said first route), the whole As a result, the proportion of game balls flowing down to the special ball entry means increases. It must be set, and there is a risk that the interest of the player will be reduced.

Means A5. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball enters the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A4, characterized in that:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means A5, a game ball other than a game ball entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entering means has a higher probability of being special. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to make the game ball enter the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the above means A5, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body is not yet activated and the first route is activated. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means It is also possible to construct a configuration in which the game ball that has been played flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means A5 is set to "open and close in the open state period after the open state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball passes when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means." The game machine according to any one of the means A1 to A4, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the member."

It should be noted that, under the configuration of each of the above means, the configuration related to the above means A5 is the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to the start of operation of the movable body, and By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means A6. display means for starting a variable display based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means, and performing stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the operation lottery process;
The movable body control means is
The game machine according to any one of means A1 to A5, wherein after the stop display is made on the display means, the control for placing the movable body in the predetermined advantageous state can be executed.

If the movable body were to suddenly operate without warning, the player, who had not watched the movable body until then, would not be able to grasp the situation and might be confused.

On the other hand, according to the means A6, by providing the display means, the player can be made aware in advance of the possibility that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of interest in the game presentation using the movable body, and to further improve the interest of the player.

Means A7. Variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns with different time periods for the variation display;
variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of variation patterns stored in the variation pattern storage means based on the detection of the game ball by the opportunity ball detection means;
The gaming machine according to means A6, further comprising display control means for controlling the display means based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means.

According to the means A7, the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display on the display means can be made variable. As a result, it is possible to make variable the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the opportunity ball detection means until the movable body actually becomes in an advantageous state.

As a result, since the movable body does not always operate at a constant timing, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game performance using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to this means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the movement timing of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine at that timing.

Means A8. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The game machine according to any one of means A1 to A7, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means A8, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means is increased, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state or the like. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means A9. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means A9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means A10. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The game machine according to any one of means A1 to A9, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the starting ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means A11. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means A1 to A10 is configured to be capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be granted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above means A11, even during an open game state (during an open period of the variable ball entry means) in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained conventionally, the movable body can be generated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem B. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, there are effects related to the movable body, such as the movable body periodically or continuously performing a predetermined action regardless of the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. It became monotonous, and the player's interest in the movable body tended to fade. In this regard, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of dramatically improving amusement.

Means B1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, a movable body that can change the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
a trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
a movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined action when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means; A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above means B1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In particular, in this means, by providing a trigger ball entry means (a trigger ball entry detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area can be detected. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, so that the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Incidentally, if the trigger ball entry means (the trigger ball entry detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body is arranged outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), the trigger ball entry detection means may be performed using a wire rod or the like. There is a risk that fraudulent acts such as erroneous detection by the means and activation of the movable body are likely to occur.

On the other hand, according to the present means, by providing the opportunity ball-entering means in the inner region of the variable ball-entering means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-described problems.

Means B2. Provided with a predetermined detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the specific area,
The gaming machine according to means B1, wherein the trigger ball entry means is provided at a position downstream of the predetermined detection means, where the game ball detected by the predetermined detection means can be entered. .

If the movable body is configured to perform a predetermined motion based on detection by the predetermined detection means, the movable body moves at the same timing every time the game ball enters the variable ball entry means (internal area). It will be done.

As a result, the presentation related to the movable body becomes monotonous, and the player easily grasps the movement timing of the movable body.

On the other hand, according to the means B2, it is possible to suppress monotony of the presentation related to the movable body, and to suppress the fraudulent act as described above.

Means B3. a trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball entered by the trigger ball entry means;
The gaming machine according to means B1 or B2, wherein the operating condition can be established when the game ball is detected by the opportunity ball entry detection means.

According to the above means B3, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the movable body should be placed in a predetermined advantageous state by a software-based lottery process, so that the control process can be simplified.

Means B4. a trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means;
a lottery process executing means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball detection by the triggered ball ball detection means;
A game machine according to means B1 or B2, characterized in that the operation condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process.

According to the above means B4, determination as to whether or not the movable body is to be placed in a predetermined advantageous state is performed by means of software by the lottery process execution means (actuation lottery process).

As a result, since the action is not performed every time in accordance with a predetermined opportunity, monotony of presentation related to the movable body can be suppressed, and the player's expectation for the action of the movable body can be increased. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means B5. A game according to any one of means B1 to B4, characterized in that a game ball entering (or passing through) said trigger ball entering means cannot flow down to said special ball entering means (cannot be entered). machine.

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the above means B5, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entering means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the above various problems can be suppressed. can be done.

Means B6. a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the trigger ball entry means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the special ball entry means;
a route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
The game machine according to any one of means B1 to B5, wherein the movable body can change the behavior of the game ball that has flowed down the first route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no interval) The same applies hereinafter), etc.), even if a situation occurs that is advantageous to the player, if all of these game balls are directed toward the opportunity ball entry means, no matter how much the movable body Even if is in an advantageous state, there is a possibility that a problem such as not even one game ball entering the special ball entering means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the above means B6, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the preceding first game ball is the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the function and effect of providing the movable body are more effective.

Means B7. A gaming machine according to means B6, characterized by comprising a plurality of said second routes configured so that the time required for a game ball to reach said opportunity ball entry means from said route sorting means is different.

If the movable body were configured to move at a constant timing every time when the game ball was distributed by the route distribution means, the performance related to the movable body would become monotonous and the player would be able to move the movable body. It becomes easy to grasp the movement timing of the body, and there is a possibility that cheating such as vibrating the game machine according to the timing is performed.

On the other hand, according to the above means B7, it is possible to make the operation start period variable from the time when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution means until the movable body becomes in a predetermined advantageous state.

As a result, since the movable body does not always operate at a constant timing, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game performance using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to this means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the movement timing of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine at that timing.

In addition, ``the time required for a game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means from the route distribution means is different'' includes, for example, ``the distance from the route distribution means to the trigger ball entry means is different''. included.

In addition, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a trigger ball entry means (a trigger ball entry detection means) is provided individually corresponding to each of the "plurality of second routes", or a game ball passing through each of the "plurality of second routes". may move toward one occasional ball-entering means (incentive ball-entering detection means) and be detected by the same occasional ball-entering detection means.

For example, "the first route through which the game ball can flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means, and the second route through which the game ball can flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means. It is good also as a structure with ".

In addition, there is provided an opportunity route change means (downstream side route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first said second route" or "second said second route". may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball and improve the interest of the player.

Means B8. The game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. the second route having a long advantageous state arrival time until the game ball reaches the triggered ball entry means (the triggered ball entry detection means) and the movable body attains a predetermined advantageous state from the time point of the first and second routes; The gaming machine according to means B6, further comprising a second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the movable body arrival time.

If the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means, the time from the time the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means is longer than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body. When the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the movable body is configured to reach an advantageous state for a long time until it reaches a predetermined advantageous state, two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. enter the ball continuously, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means, and the following second game ball is distributed to the second route, the player Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing when the movable body is activated, there is a possibility that interest will be significantly reduced.

Conversely, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means is longer than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state in an advantageous state reaching time is shortened, two internal regions of the variable ball entry means are arranged. When the game balls enter continuously, the first preceding game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distributing means, and the second following game ball is distributed to the first route, the comparison is performed. Unless the movable body is maintained in an advantageous state for a long period of time, it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends, so there is a risk that the interest will be significantly reduced. .

On the other hand, according to the means B8, two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball takes either the first route or the second route. Even if it is sorted, the subsequent second game ball is sorted to either "the first said second route with a long advantageous state reaching time" or "the second said second route with a short advantageous state reaching time". Depending on whether the movable body is activated or not, there is a possibility that the timing when the movable body is activated and the timing when the game ball reaches the movable body match. Behavior can be observed.

Means B9. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball enters the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8, characterized in that:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means B9, a game ball other than a game ball entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entry means is special with a higher probability. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to make the game ball enter the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the above means B9, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body is not yet activated and the first route is activated. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means It is also possible to construct a configuration in which the game ball that has been played flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means B9 is set so that "when a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, it is opened and closed in the open state period after the open state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball has passed. The game machine according to any one of the means B1 to B8, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the member."

It should be noted that the configuration of the above means B9, under the configuration of each of the above means, is the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the movable body after the start of operation. By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means B10. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B9, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means B10, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means is increased, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state or the like. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means B11. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means B10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means B12. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The game machine according to any one of means B1 to B11, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the starting ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means B13. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means B1 to B12, characterized by being capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be granted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above means B13, even during an open game state (during an open period of the variable ball entry means) in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained conventionally, based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, the movable body A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem C. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, even if a situation occurs that is advantageous to the player, for example, when a plurality of game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time in succession, these plurality of game balls Depending on the ball entry timing, all of the plurality of game balls are directed to the special ball entry means, or all of the plurality of game balls are not directed to the special ball entry means and are guided to the discharge section or non-special ball entry means. It was a configuration that easily caused a problem such as being put away.

Normally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, even if a game ball newly enters the special ball entry means in a state in which the right to the special game state is obtained, the special game state is not granted for that amount. It is configured.

Therefore, even if two game balls continuously enter the special ball entry means, two special game states are not given, and only one special game state occurs. Therefore, the player may have negative feelings such as loss, waste, waste, and the like.

As a result, it is feared that the player loses interest in the game even though a situation favorable to the player, such as the provision of a special game state, has occurred.

Conversely, when all of the plurality of game balls are guided to the discharge section or the like, since a plurality of game balls have entered the variable ball entry means at the same time, the game is sent to the special ball entry means. There is a risk that this will not contribute to the player's sense of expectation that it will work in favor of hitting the ball, and that interest will decrease.

In this sense, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to dramatically improve interest when a plurality of game balls enter the variable ball entry means. To provide a game machine capable of

Means C1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the trigger ball entry means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the special ball entry means;
route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, a movable body that can change the behavior of the game ball that has flowed down to the first route (can act on the game ball),
a movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined action when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In addition, when ``when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means'', for example, ``a trigger ball entry capable of detecting the game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means. detection means", "when a game ball is detected by said opportunity ball detection means" or "a predetermined operation lottery is performed based on the ball detection by said opportunity ball entry detection means, When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery”.

According to the means C1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In particular, this means is provided with a route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of a game ball entering the internal area of the variable ball entering means to the first route or the second route.

As a result, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the preceding first game ball flows down either the first route or the second route. The movable body is provided because it is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such as the following second game ball flowing down the other route. The action effect will be more effective.

As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation that a plurality of game balls may be entered into the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, thereby increasing the expectation of occurrence of the special game state.

Furthermore, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, which route will the first preceding game ball and the second following game ball flow down? Since the results will differ depending on the route, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means with a sense of anticipation. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

Means C2. The route sorting means (route sorting mechanism, route sorting member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which game balls can flow down to the first route and a second state in which game balls can flow down to the second route,
a maintaining means capable of maintaining the route sorting means in the first state;
When a game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means maintained in the first state, the force received from the game ball changes the route sorting means to the second state. The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that

Under the configuration related to the means C2, in order to operate the movable body, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the opportunity ball entry means. It is necessary to change the sorting means to the second state and guide the game ball to the second route.

In other words, in order to operate the movable body, at least two game balls are continuously entered into the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball is moved by the route distribution means maintained in the first state. After flowing down to the first route, the following second game ball needs to flow down to the second route by the route sorting means changed to the second state.

As a result, it is more advantageous for the player to enter a plurality of game balls than to enter one game ball into the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby ensuring the game performance. can be done.

As a more specific configuration of the means C2, for example, "Means C2. The route sorting means
A route distributing member configured to be changeable between a first posture in which game balls can flow down to the first route and a second posture in which game balls can flow down to the second route,
Maintaining means (biasing means, etc.) capable of maintaining the route distribution member in the first posture,
When a game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution member maintained in the first posture, the force received from the game ball causes the route distribution member (for example, to resist the biasing force of biasing means). and) the gaming machine according to means C1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to change to the second posture. and so on.

Means C3. The game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. From the point of time when the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means (the trigger ball entry detection means) and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, the time for reaching an advantageous state is shortened. The gaming machine according to means C2 for

If the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means, the time from the time the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means is longer than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body. When the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body reaches an advantageous state in an advantageous state reaching time is long, two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. When the first game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means and the second game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, the player enters the movable body. Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing of the operation, there is a possibility that interest will be significantly reduced.

On the other hand, according to the means C3, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems and to suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

The above-mentioned "advantageous state arrival time" should be shorter than the above-mentioned "movable body arrival time". This is intended to include a configuration in which the distance is zero, etc.).

Also, in order to lengthen the "movable body reaching time", for example, lengthening the movement distance of the game ball required to pass through the "first route" can be considered as an example.

Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball is installed in the "first route". Here, as the delay means, for example, a structure such as a stage or a crew, in which the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or advances after going around, or a rib or the like to stop the momentum of the game ball and delay the time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball advances over the ball.

In addition, "from the point in time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means, the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (the opportunity ball entry detection means), and the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state. After that, the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means until the game ball reaches the movable body than the advantageous end arrival time until the advantageous state ends It is preferable to be configured so that the arrival time is short.

If the "movable body reaching time" is longer than the "advantageous end reaching time", two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entering means continuously, and the preceding first game is played. When the ball is sorted to the first route by the route sorting means and the subsequent second game ball is sorted to the second route, the game ball is released after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends. reaches the movable body, there is a risk that interest will be significantly reduced.

Means C4. The route sorting means (route sorting mechanism, route sorting member, etc.)
At least a state changeable between a first state in which game balls can flow down to the first route and a second state in which game balls can flow down to the second route,
The game machine according to means C1, further comprising a distribution drive means for periodically or continuously performing a predetermined operation for changing the state of the route distribution means.

If two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the preceding first game ball is always distributed to either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent game ball is assigned to either the first route or the second route. When the second game ball is distributed to the other route, the relationship between the preset "advantageous state arrival time" and the "movable body arrival time" allows continuous input. At the time when the two game balls are alternately distributed by the route distribution means, the result after that is decided, so there is a possibility that the interest of the player may decrease.

On the other hand, according to the means C4, even if two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the preceding first game ball is the first route or the second route. Since it is not decided which way to distribute, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-described problems.

As a result, the player can keep an eye on the behavior of the game ball with a sense of anticipation for the occurrence of the special game state, thereby suppressing a decline in interest.

Means C5. The route sorting means (route sorting mechanism, route sorting member, etc.)
At least a state changeable between a first state in which game balls can flow down to the first route and a second state in which game balls can flow down to the second route,
a maintaining means capable of maintaining the route sorting means in a reference state between the first state and the second state;
In a state in which the route sorting means is maintained in the reference state, game balls can flow down either the first route or the second route,
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means maintained in the reference state, the force received from the game ball causes the route sorting means to change to the second state,
When a game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means maintained in the reference state, the route sorting means is changed to the first state by the force received from the game ball. The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that

According to the means C5, the same effects as those of the means C4 can be obtained. In particular, according to this means, since it is not necessary to provide a driving means for driving the route sorting means, while adopting a relatively simple configuration, a plurality of (two) game balls that continuously flow down are alternately distributed. Configurations can be implemented to flow down different routes. As a result, simplification of the configuration and control, compactness, etc. can be achieved.

As a more specific configuration of the means C5, for example, "means C5. The route sorting means
A route distributing member configured to be able to change its posture between at least a first posture that allows game balls to flow down to the first route and a second posture that allows game balls to flow down to the second route,
Maintaining means (biasing means, etc.) capable of maintaining the route distribution member in a reference posture between the first posture and the second posture,
In a state in which the route distribution member is maintained in the reference posture, game balls can flow down either of the first route and the second route,
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distributing member maintained in the reference posture, the force received from the game ball causes the route distributing member to change to the second posture,
When a game ball flows down to the second route by the route distributing member maintained in the reference posture, the force received from the game ball causes the route distributing member to change to the first posture. The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that and so on.

Means C6. The game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. from the point in time when the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means (the trigger ball entry detection means) and the movable body attains an advantageous state; The gaming machine according to means C4 or C5, further comprising a second route in which the advantageous state reaching time is shorter than the body reaching time.

If the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means, the time from the time the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means is longer than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body. When the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body reaches an advantageous state in an advantageous state reaching time is long, two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. When the first game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means and the second game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, the player enters the movable body. Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing of the operation, there is a possibility that interest will be significantly reduced.

Conversely, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means is longer than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the time required for the movable body to reach the advantageous state is shortened, two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. enter the ball continuously, the first preceding game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, and the second game ball following is distributed to the first route, a relatively long Unless the movable body is maintained in an advantageous state for a period of time, it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends, so there is a possibility that interest will be significantly reduced.

On the other hand, according to the means C6, two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball goes to either the first route or the second route. Even if it is sorted, the subsequent second game ball is sorted to either "the first said second route with a long advantageous state reaching time" or "the second said second route with a short advantageous state reaching time". Depending on whether the movable body is activated or not, there is a possibility that the timing when the movable body is activated and the timing when the game ball reaches the movable body match. Behavior can be observed.

It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a trigger ball entry means (a trigger ball detection means) is provided individually corresponding to each of the ``first said second route'' and the ``second said second route''. A game ball passing through the first said second route or the second said second route respectively moves toward one opportunity ball entry means (event ball entry detection means), and the same opportunity ball entry detection means. It is good also as a structure detected by a means.

For example, "the first route through which the game ball can flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means, and the second route through which the game ball can flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means. It is good also as a structure with ".

In addition, there is provided an opportunity route change means (downstream side route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first said second route" or "second said second route". may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball and improve the interest of the player.

Means C7. A game according to any one of the means C1 to C6, characterized in that a game ball entering (or passing through) the trigger ball entering means cannot flow down to the special ball entering means (cannot be entered). machine.

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the means C7, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the above various problems can be suppressed. can be done.

Means C8. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball enters the game ball. The game machine according to any one of means C1 to C7, characterized in that:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means C8, a game ball other than a game ball entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entry means has a higher probability of being special. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to make the game ball enter the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means C8, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body is not yet activated and the first route is activated. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means It is also possible to construct a configuration in which the game ball that has been played flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means C8 is set to "open and close in the open state period after the open state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball passes when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means." The game machine according to any one of the means C1 to C7, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the member."

It should be noted that, under the configuration related to the above means C8, the time from when the game ball enters the triggering ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the movable body after the start of operation By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means C9. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C8, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means C9, if the movable body becomes in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means increases, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state or the like. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means C10. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means C10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means C11. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The game machine according to any one of means C1 to C10, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the starting ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means C12. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means C1 to C11, characterized by being capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be granted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above means C12, even during the open game state (during the opening period of the variable ball entry means) in which the opening opportunity etc. cannot be obtained conventionally, based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, the movable body A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem D. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the movable body is configured to operate at a constant timing every time when a game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entering means.

Therefore, conventionally, there is a possibility that the player will grasp the timing of the movement of the movable body, and commit fraud such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

In addition, the production related to the movable body tends to be monotonous, and in this respect, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing cheating and improving interest.

Means D1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, a movable body that can change the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
Movable body control capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined action when at least a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball is detected by predetermined ball detection means). means and
A gaming machine characterized in that a period from at least a predetermined trigger (for example, when the operating condition is established) to when the movable body enters the predetermined advantageous state is variable.

According to the means D1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In particular, in this means, the period (for example, the opening period) from a predetermined trigger (for example, when the operating condition is satisfied) until the movable body actually enters a predetermined advantageous state is variable, so that the movable body Since there is no need to perform actions at fixed timings, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game presentation using the movable bodies. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, it is possible to reduce the risk that the player will grasp the movement timing of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine at that timing.

Means D2. a trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
a trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball entered by the trigger ball entry means;
The gaming machine according to means D1, wherein the operation condition can be established based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball-entering detection means.

If the triggering ball entry means that triggers the movement of the movable body is placed outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), the triggering ball entry detection means will make an erroneous detection using a wire rod or the like, and the movable body will be activated. There is a risk that fraudulent acts such as

On the other hand, according to the means D2, the movement of the game ball entering the internal area causes the movable body to operate, so that the occurrence of the above-described problems can be suppressed.

Here, for example, if it is set as "a configuration in which the operating condition is established when the game ball is detected by the above-mentioned triggered ball-entering detection means", the determination of whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state is made by software. Since there is no need to execute the random lottery process, the control process can be simplified. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraud such as installing an illegal ROM or the like in which the program related to the lottery process is altered.

Means D3. operation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of operation patterns that define an operation start period from at least when the operation condition is established until the movable body enters the predetermined advantageous state;
operation pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of a plurality of operation patterns stored in the operation pattern storage means based on detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means; The game machine according to means D2 characterized by:

According to the above means D3, a plurality of patterns of operation start periods (for example, opening periods) are prepared, and a predetermined operation start period is selected from among these patterns by software. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the operation start period. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the period from a predetermined trigger until the movable body enters a predetermined advantageous state, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the means D1 and the like.

Furthermore, according to this means, it is not necessary to provide the variable ball-entering means with a complicated mechanical selection mechanism, and the structure of the variable ball-entering means can be simplified.

Means D4. production means capable of executing a preceding production (opening production) suggesting that at least the movable body is in the predetermined advantageous state during the operation start period;
production pattern storage means for storing a plurality of production patterns corresponding to the plurality of operation patterns;
A gaming machine according to means D3, further comprising an effect control means capable of controlling the effect means based on an effect pattern corresponding to the operation pattern selected by the operation pattern selection means.

According to the above means D4, the player can be made to recognize in advance that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state by performing a preceding effect suggesting that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. .

Furthermore, the player is nervous without knowing when the movable body will reach a predetermined advantageous state, but with a sense of expectation that the movable body will reach a predetermined advantageous state at a timing that is advantageous to him. Along with the behavior of the game ball, it is possible to pay attention to the game performance related to the movable body, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

In addition, in a configuration in which the operation start period from when the operating condition is established until the movable body enters a predetermined advantageous state is variable, when the operation start period becomes relatively long, the operating condition is satisfied. However, there is a risk that the player will feel uneasiness and resentment that the movable body will not be in a predetermined advantageous state.

On the other hand, according to the present means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such troubles, and to suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

Means D5. a lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means;
The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D4, wherein the operation condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process. .

According to the above-mentioned means D5, the decision as to whether or not the movable body is to be placed in a predetermined advantageous state is determined by means of software by means of the lottery process execution means (actuation lottery process).

As a result, since the action is not performed every time in accordance with a predetermined opportunity, monotony of presentation related to the movable body can be suppressed, and the player's expectation for the action of the movable body can be increased. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means D6. display means for starting a variable display based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means, and performing stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the operation lottery process;
Variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns with different time periods for the variation display;
variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of variation patterns stored in the variation pattern storage means based on the detection of the game ball by the opportunity ball detection means;
Display control means for controlling the display means based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means,
The movable body control means is
The game machine according to any one of means D2 to D5, wherein control is executable to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state after the stop display is made on the display means.

According to the means D6, by providing the display means, the player can be made to recognize in advance that there is a possibility that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state.

Furthermore, the player, while not knowing whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, has a sense of anticipation that it will be in an advantageous state, and watches the movement of the game ball and the variable display. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

As a result, it is possible to increase the attention level of the game presentation related to the movable body, and to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to the above means D6, it is possible to make the variable time from when the variable display is started until the stop display is performed on the display means variable. As a result, it is possible to make variable the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the opportunity ball detection means until the movable body actually becomes in a predetermined advantageous state.

As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the operation start period. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the period from a predetermined trigger until the movable body enters a predetermined advantageous state, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the means D1 and the like.

Means D7. a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the trigger ball entry means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the special ball entry means;
a route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D6, wherein the movable body can change the behavior of the game ball that has flowed down the first route.

If a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a continuous ball state in which two game balls flow down continuously with almost no interval between them. Similarly.), etc., even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, if all of these game balls go toward the opportunity ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body becomes, There is a possibility that a problem such as not even one game ball entering the special ball entering means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the above means D7, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, the preceding first game ball is the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the function and effect of providing the movable body are more effective.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned "predetermined opportunity" may be that the game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means.

Means D8. The route sorting means (route sorting mechanism, route sorting member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which game balls can flow down to the first route and a second state in which game balls can flow down to the second route,
Distributing driving means for periodically or continuously performing a predetermined operation to change the state of the route distributing means,
A means D7 characterized by comprising a plurality of said second routes configured so that the time required for a game ball passing through said specific area from said route sorting means to said opportunity ball entry means is different. The game machine described.

If the movable body were configured to move at a constant timing every time when the game ball was distributed by the route distribution means, the performance related to the movable body would become monotonous and the player would be able to move the movable body. It becomes easy to grasp the movement timing of the body, and there is a possibility that cheating such as vibrating the game machine according to the timing is performed.

On the other hand, according to the means D8, by providing a plurality of second routes, it is possible to make the period from when the game ball is distributed by the route distributing means to when the opportunity ball entering means be variable.

As a result, the period from when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution means (predetermined timing) to when the movable body actually becomes in an advantageous state can be made variable.

In addition, according to this means, the period from when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution means to when the trigger ball entry means can be made variable by the mechanical configuration based on the behavior of the game ball. Players will be able to watch the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further improving the interest.

In addition, ``the time required for a game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means from the route distribution means is different'' includes, for example, ``the distance from the route distribution means to the trigger ball entry means is different''. included.

In addition, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a trigger ball entry means (a trigger ball entry detection means) is provided individually corresponding to each of the "plurality of second routes", or a game ball passing through each of the "plurality of second routes". may move toward one occasional ball-entering means (incentive ball-entering detection means) and be detected by the same occasional ball-entering detection means.

For example, "the first route through which the game ball can flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means, and the second route through which the game ball can flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means. It is good also as a structure with ".

In addition, there is provided an opportunity route change means (downstream side route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first said second route" or "second said second route". may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball and improve the interest of the player.

Means D9. As the plurality of second routes,
The game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. The second route having a long advantageous state arrival time until the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (the opportunity ball entry detection means) and the movable body enters the predetermined advantageous state from the time point of the first and second routes. , and the second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the movable body arrival time.

If the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means, the time from the time the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means is longer than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body. When the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the movable body is configured to reach an advantageous state for a long time until it reaches a predetermined advantageous state, two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. enter the ball continuously, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means, and the following second game ball is distributed to the second route, the player Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing when the movable body is activated, there is a possibility that interest will be significantly reduced.

Conversely, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means is longer than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state in an advantageous state reaching time is shortened, two internal regions of the variable ball entry means are arranged. When the game balls enter continuously, the first preceding game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distributing means, and the second following game ball is distributed to the first route, the comparison is performed. Unless the movable body is maintained in a predetermined advantageous state for a long period of time, it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends, so there is a possibility that interest will be significantly reduced. There is

On the other hand, according to the means D9, two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball goes to either the first route or the second route. Even if it is sorted, the subsequent second game ball is sorted to either "the first said second route with a long advantageous state reaching time" or "the second said second route with a short advantageous state reaching time". Depending on whether the movable body is activated or not, there is a possibility that the timing when the movable body is activated and the timing when the game ball reaches the movable body match. Behavior can be observed.

It should be noted that the ``second said second route'' may be shorter than the ``first said second route'' in terms of the time required for the game ball to pass through. It is intended to include a configuration in which the ball is entered (such as a configuration in which the distance to the opportunity ball entry means is zero).

In addition, in order to lengthen the time required for the game ball to pass through the "first and second route", for example, lengthening the moving distance of the game ball required to pass through the "first and second route" is one example. can be considered as

Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a delay means for delaying passage of the game ball is installed in the "first second route". Here, as the delay means, for example, a structure such as a stage or a crew, in which the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or advances after going around, or a rib or the like to stop the momentum of the game ball and delay the time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball advances over the ball.

Furthermore, by installing the delay means as described above in the "first route", the game ball flowing down to the first route can be moved longer than the time required for the game ball to pass through the "second route". A configuration may be adopted in which the movable body reaching the body takes a long time.

Means D10. A game according to any one of means D2 to D9, characterized in that a game ball entering (or passing through) said trigger ball entering means cannot flow down (cannot enter) to said special ball entering means. machine.

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the above means D10, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entering means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the above various problems can be suppressed. can be done.

Means D11. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball enters the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D10, characterized in that:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means D11, a game ball other than a game ball entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entry means has a higher probability of being special. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to make the game ball enter the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means D11, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body is not yet activated and the first route is activated. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means It is also possible to construct a configuration in which the game ball that has been played flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means D11 is set to "open and close during the open state period after the open state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball passes when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means." The game machine according to any one of the means D2 to D10, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the member."

In addition, the configuration related to the above means D11 is, under the configuration related to each of the above means, the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means until the movable body starts to operate, and the movable body after the start of operation. By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means D12. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D11, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means D12, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means is increased, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means D13. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means D13, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means D14. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D13, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the starting ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means D15. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means D1 to D14, characterized by being capable of executing control to put the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be imparted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above means D15, even during the open game state (during the opening period of the variable ball entry means) in which the opening opportunity etc. cannot be obtained in the conventional art, the movable body is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem E. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

In such a pachinko machine, for example, a guide route is provided for directing a game ball that has entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means toward the special ball entry means, and a game ball that has deviated from the guide route is guided to the internal area. Some are equipped with a deviating route (ejection route) for discharging to the outside.

However, in the conventional art, even though the game ball entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the game ball was once deviated from the guidance route and guided to the deviation route, and then entered the variable ball entry means. It did not contribute to the game of the game, and was just discharged. In this respect, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of dramatically improving amusement.

Means E1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a first route (guidance route) that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
a second route (discharge route) capable of discharging game balls that do not flow down to the first route outside the internal region;
ball detection means (ejection ball detection means) capable of detecting game balls that have passed through the second route;
a specific processing execution means capable of executing specific processing advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection of the game ball by the ball detection means.

According to the above means E1, based on the detection of the game ball ejected through the second route (ejection route), specific processing advantageous to the player is executed, such as facilitating the occurrence of a special game state. be done.

As a result, not only the behavior of the game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means via the first route (guide route), but also the game balls discharged via the second route can be used to create new gameplay. can be given, and it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means E2. The gaming machine according to means E1, wherein the predetermined condition is established when the game ball is detected by the ball detecting means.

According to the above means E2, every time the game ball is detected by the ball detection means, the specific processing advantageous to the player can be executed, so that the interest of the player can be dramatically improved. .

Means E3. a lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery process based on the detection by the ball detection means;
The gaming machine according to means E1, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the lottery process.

According to the above means E3, the specific processing advantageous to the player is not executed each time the game ball is detected by the ball detecting means, so that the specific processing is suppressed from becoming monotonous and the specific processing is executed. It is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for that. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means E4. counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detecting means;
The gaming machine according to means E1, wherein the predetermined condition is established when the number of game balls counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number or more.

According to the means E4, even when the number of game balls flowing out of the first route (guidance route) and flowing into the second route (discharge route) is relatively large, the decrease in interest of the player is suppressed. be able to.

Means E5. a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detecting means;
a lottery process executing means capable of executing a predetermined lottery process when the number of game balls counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number or more;
The gaming machine according to means E1, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the lottery process.

According to the above means E5, every time the number of game balls detected by the ball detection means exceeds the predetermined number, the specific processing advantageous to the player is not executed, so the same operation as the above means E3 is performed. effect is played.

Means E6. In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, Equipped with a movable body that can change the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball),
The specific process executing means is
Any one of the means E1 to E5, characterized by comprising movable body control means capable of executing control to put the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state in which the movable body performs a predetermined action when the predetermined condition is established. game machine.

According to the means E6, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means E7. A route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state,
The game machine according to means E6, wherein the movable body can change the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

Under the configuration related to the means E6, for example, when the predetermined condition is about to be established, if a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entering means at the same time (two game balls are almost spaced apart) The same applies hereinafter.), etc.), even if a situation occurs that is advantageous to the player, all of these game balls are the second route (discharge route), even if the movable body is in an advantageous state, there is a risk that a single game ball will not enter the special ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the above means E7, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, the preceding first game ball is the first route or Since it is possible to make one game ball go to the first route such that one game ball flows down one of the second routes and the second game ball that follows flows down to the other route, the movable body The action and effect provided will be more successful.

As a result, the player comes to pay attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means with a sense of anticipation, thereby further improving interest.

Means E8. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. A gaming machine according to means E6 or E7, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means E8, if the movable body becomes in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means increases, so that a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means E9. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is easily determined by the type determining means. game machine.

According to the means E9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means E10. When the game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the ball detection means and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the movable body after the game ball. A game machine according to any one of means E6 to E9, characterized in that it is configured to be operable.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means E10, the game balls other than the game balls entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game balls involved (last) in the establishment of the predetermined condition are also more expensive. A chance to enter the special ball entry means will be given with a probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that was (last) involved in the establishment of the predetermined condition did not enter the variable ball entry means, or the game ball that was (last) involved in the establishment of the prescribed condition did not enter the variable entry means. Even if the other game ball that entered the ball means did not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means after that entered the special ball entry means with a higher probability. You will be given a chance to hit the ball.

As a result, even after confirming that the predetermined condition has been established, the player can actively play the game to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Therefore, the means E10 is defined as "when the game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the ball detection means and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the opening state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball has passed has been opened. The game machine according to any one of the means E6 to E9, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the opening/closing member during the open state period." .

In addition, in the configuration related to the above means E10, under the configuration related to each of the above means, the time from the time when the predetermined condition is satisfied until the movable body starts to operate, the operation period of the movable body after the operation starts, etc. are adjusted. By doing so, it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means E11. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means E6 to E10, characterized in that it is configured to be capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be imparted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above-described means E11, even during an open game state (during an open period of the variable ball entry means) in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained conventionally, based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, the movable body A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means E12. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The gaming machine according to any one of means E1 to E10, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the starting ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Conventional problem F. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, since the conventional variable ball entry means has a plurality of winning openings (specific areas) such as left and right sides, game balls may enter the variable ball entry means from multiple directions at the same time. there were.

Therefore, even if a plurality of game balls enter the variable ball entry means at a timing advantageous to the player, depending on the ball entry timing of the game balls, they interfere with each other, and even one ball enters the game as a special entry. If the game ball does not go to the ball means, the game ball does not flow down to the route desired by the player, and the interest of the player may decrease.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of dramatically improving amusement.

Means F1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means;
a second route that allows game balls that do not flow down to the first route to flow down to the trigger ball entry means;
route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route;
A state changeable between an advantageous state (special state) that is at least advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is not more advantageous to the player than the advantageous state is provided, and the game ball that has flowed down to the first route is provided. a movable body that can cause a change in behavior (that can act on a game ball);
a movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined action when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means; with
The specific area is provided only at one location through which game balls can pass one by one,
The gaming machine is characterized in that a ball passage capable of guiding game balls one by one to the specific area is provided only at one location.

In addition, when ``when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means'', for example, ``a trigger ball entry capable of detecting the game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means. detection means", "when a game ball is detected by said opportunity ball detection means" or "a predetermined operation lottery is performed based on the ball detection by said opportunity ball entry detection means, When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery”.

According to the means F1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this means, by providing the trigger ball entry means for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the movable body is moved to the predetermined position based on the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. Since it is determined whether or not it will be in an advantageous state, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

In particular, this means is provided with a route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of a game ball entering the internal area of the variable ball entering means to the first route or the second route.

As a result, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the preceding first game ball flows down either the first route or the second route. The movable body is provided because it is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such as the following second game ball flowing down the other route. The action effect will be more effective.

As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation that a plurality of game balls may be entered into the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, thereby increasing the expectation of occurrence of the special game state.

In addition, in this means, the specific area is provided in only one place through which the game balls can pass one by one, and the ball passage through which the game balls can be guided one by one to the specific area is provided in only one place. Therefore, game balls can be properly guided to the route sorting means one by one. As a result, the above effects can be achieved more reliably.

Furthermore, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, which route will the first preceding game ball and the second following game ball flow down? Since the results will differ depending on the route, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means with a sense of anticipation. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

Means F2. A game machine according to means F1, wherein a game ball that does not pass through the ball passage cannot pass through the specific area.

If a game ball that does not pass through the ball passage is configured to be able to pass through the specific area, other game balls that pass through the ball passage and flow down toward the specific area may interfere with On the other hand, according to the means F2, the game ball cannot pass through the specific area unless it passes through the ball passage. can.

Means F3. The game machine according to means F1 or F2, wherein the ball passage is provided on either the left side or the right side of the opening/closing member outside the variable ball entry means.

According to the means F3, the game balls can be guided to the opening/closing member one by one. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem such as a plurality of game balls entering the opening/closing member at the same time and being bitten.

Means F4. The game machine according to any one of means F1 to F3, wherein the ball passage is provided so that only game balls fired with a predetermined intensity by the shooting means can pass through.

According to the means F4, the ball passage is provided only at a position (for example, the right side of the variable ball entry means) through which only the game ball fired with a predetermined strength (for example, right-handed) by the shooting means can pass. It is possible to further enhance the effects of the means F1 and the like.

Means F5. Means F1 to F4, characterized in that, in the specific area, while permitting passage of game balls in a predetermined direction, restricting means for restricting passage of game balls in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above means F5, for example, when two game balls pass through the ball passage continuously, due to the behavior of the preceding first game ball, the preceding first game ball and the following game ball It is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles such as the collision of the second game ball and the like, which hinder each other. As a result, the operational effects of the means F1 and the like can be further enhanced. Here, the regulating means includes those that change the state from the first state to the second state by the force received from the game ball.

Means F6. A game according to any one of the means F1 to F5, characterized in that a game ball entering (or passing through) the trigger ball entering means cannot flow down to the special ball entering means (cannot be entered). machine.

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the means F6, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. can be done.

Means F7. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball enters the game ball. The game machine according to any one of means F1 to F6, characterized in that:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means F7, a game ball other than a game ball entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entry means is special with a higher probability. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to make the game ball enter the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means F7, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body is not yet activated and the first route is activated. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means It is also possible to construct a configuration in which the game ball that has been played flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means F7 is set to "open and close during the open state period following the open state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball passes when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means." The game machine according to any one of means F1 to F6, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the member."

It should be noted that, under the configuration of each of the above means, the configuration related to the means F7 is the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to the start of operation of the movable body, and By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means F8. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. A game machine according to any one of means F1 to F7, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means F8, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means is increased, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means F9. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means F9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means F10. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F9, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the starting ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means F11. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means F1 to F10, characterized by being capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be imparted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above means F11, even during an open game state (during an open period of the variable ball entry means) in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained conventionally, the movable body can be generated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem G. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in the conventional game machine, the performance related to the movable body is monotonous, such as the movable body performing a predetermined action every time the game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the player's interest (excitement) in the movement of the movable body tends to fade. In this regard, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

Means G1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a first trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
a first opportunity ball-entering detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the first opportunity ball-entering means;
a second trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
a second opportunity ball-entering detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the second opportunity ball-entering means;
a first flow-down route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means;
a second flow-down route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means;
Route distribution means (downstream route distribution means) capable of distributing the destination of the game ball that has passed through the specific area to at least the first flow route or the second flow route;
A movable body provided to be capable of changing between at least an advantageous state advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and capable of causing a change in the behavior of the game ball passing through the specific area. and,
Predetermined advantageous state for causing the movable body to perform a predetermined operation when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball-entering means or the second ball-entering means. and a movable body control means capable of executing control to
In a specific state, the rate at which the predetermined advantageous state can occur is different between when the game ball flows down the first flow-down route and when the game ball flows down the second flow-down route. Characteristic game machine.

It should be noted that when ``when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the first trigger ball-entering means or the second trigger ball-entering means'', for example, ``the first trigger ball-entering When a game ball is detected by the ball detection means or the second opportunity ball entry detection means" or "based on ball entry detection by the first opportunity ball entry detection means or the second opportunity ball entry detection means a predetermined operation lottery is performed, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery.

According to the means G1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, in this means, by providing various trigger ball entry means (various trigger ball entry detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the game ball entering the internal area is detected. Since it is determined whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state based on the behavior, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Further, in this means, the rate at which a predetermined advantageous state can occur differs between when the game ball flows down the first flow-down route and when the game ball flows down the second flow-down route. there is As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further improving the interest.

Means G2. The time or distance required for the game ball that has passed through the specific region to flow down the first flow route and reach the first trigger ball entry means, and the game ball that has passed through the specific region is the second The game machine according to means G1, characterized in that the time or distance required for flowing down the flow-down route to reach the second opportunity ball-entering means is different.

According to the means G2, the period until the movable body can be in a predetermined advantageous state is variable depending on whether the game ball flows down the first flow-down route or the game ball flows down the second flow-down route. can be

As a result, since the movable body does not always operate at a constant timing, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game performance using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

Means G3. The gaming machine according to means G1 or G2, further comprising delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball in the first flow route or the second flow route.

According to the means G3, even if the length of the first flow-down route or the length of the second flow-down route is relatively short, by providing the above-mentioned delay means, the time until the game ball reaches the predetermined position can be reduced. can be relatively long. As a result, the game space can be used effectively. Here, as the delay means, for example, a structure such as a stage or a crew, in which the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or advances after going around, or a rib or the like to stop the momentum of the game ball and delay the time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball advances over the ball.

Means G4. a lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on ball entry detection by the first ball-entrance detection means or the second ball-entrance detection means;
At least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process, the predetermined operation condition is established,
In the specific state, the rate at which the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the case where the game ball is detected by the first triggered ball entry detection means and the case where the game ball is detected by the second triggered ball entry detection means. , are configured differently.

According to the above means G4, determination as to whether or not the movable body should be placed in a predetermined advantageous state is performed by means of software by the lottery process execution means (actuation lottery process).

As a result, since the action is not performed every time in accordance with a predetermined opportunity, monotony of presentation related to the movable body can be suppressed, and the player's expectation for the action of the movable body can be increased. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Further, in this means, the ratio of obtaining a predetermined lottery result between the case where the game ball is detected by the first opportunity ball-entering detection means and the case where the game ball is detected by the second opportunity-entering ball detection means is Since they are configured differently, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, which can further improve the amusement.

Means G5. The route sorting means is
The state can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down the first flow route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down the second flow route,
The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G4, wherein in the specific state, the ratio of the route sorting means to be in the first state and the ratio to be in the second state are different.

According to the above means G5, the behavior of the game ball can be diversified, and the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, so that the interest can be further improved. can. In addition, the ratio of the route sorting means to be in the first state and the ratio of the route to be in the second state may be changed periodically or randomly.

Means G6. a predetermined route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
route distribution means (upstream side route distribution means) capable of distributing the destination of the game ball to at least the predetermined route in the specific state;
The game machine according to any one of means G1 to G5, wherein the movable body can change the behavior of the game ball flowing down the predetermined route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no interval) The same applies hereinafter), etc.), even if a situation occurs that is advantageous to the player, if all of these game balls are directed toward the opportunity ball entry means, no matter how much the movable body Even if is in an advantageous state, there is a possibility that a problem such as not even one game ball entering the special ball entering means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the means G6, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, the preceding first game ball enters the predetermined route, or , the game ball flows down one of the first flow route or the second flow route, and the following second game ball flows down the other route. Since it is possible to direct both of them, the function and effect of providing the movable body are more effective.

Means G7. A game ball that has entered (or passed through) the triggering ball-entering means (the first triggering ball-entering means and/or the second triggering ball-entering means) cannot flow down to the special ball-entering means (cannot enter) The game machine according to any one of means G1 to G6, characterized in that it is configured as follows.

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the above means G7, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entering means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the above various problems can be suppressed. can be done.

Means G8. When the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means (the first trigger ball entry means or the second trigger ball entry means), after the game ball, The game machine according to any one of means G1 to G7, wherein the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the specific area.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means G8, a game ball other than a game ball entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entry means has a higher probability of being special. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to make the game ball enter the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means G8, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area A ball) flows down a predetermined route, or either the first flow route or the second flow route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route. Then, after that, the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow route or the second flow route enters the opportunity ball entry means (first opportunity ball entry means or second opportunity ball entry means) to form a movable body. is activated, at the time the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined route passes through the movable body, even if the movable body has not yet activated and the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined route has not entered the special ball entry means. After that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passed through the specific area after that) flows down to a predetermined route, and by the action of the movable body, a special It is also possible to provide a configuration in which a chance to enter the ball into the ball entering means is given.

Therefore, the means G8 is defined as "when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball-entering means (the first opportunity ball-entering means or the second opportunity ball-entering means), the game Any one of the means G1 to G7 characterized in that the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the opening/closing member in the open state period subsequent to the open state period of the opening/closing member through which the ball has passed. The game machine described in .

In addition, under the configuration related to the above means G8, the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to the start of operation of the movable body, and the time from when the movable body starts to operate By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means G9. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G8, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means G9, if the movable body becomes in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means increases, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means G10. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means G10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means G11. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G10, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the starting ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means G12. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means G1 to G11, characterized by being capable of executing control to make the movable body perform the predetermined action as the benefit that can be imparted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above means G12, even during the open game state (during the opening period of the variable ball entry means) in which the opening opportunity etc. cannot be obtained in the past, based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, the movable body A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem H. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the movable body is configured to operate at a constant timing every time when a game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entering means.

For this reason, conventionally, there is a possibility that the player will grasp the timing of the movement of the movable body, and commit fraud such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

In addition, the production related to the movable body tends to be monotonous, and in this respect, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing cheating and improving interest.

Means H1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
Behavior of a game ball that has passed through the specific area is provided so as to be changeable between an advantageous state (special state) that is at least advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state. A movable body that can cause a change in (can act on the game ball),
a movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined action when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means; ,
and opening/closing pattern determination means for determining which of a plurality of opening/closing patterns is to be executed when performing opening/closing control of the opening/closing member.

In addition, when ``when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means'', for example, ``a trigger ball entry capable of detecting the game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means. detection means", "when a game ball is detected by said opportunity ball detection means" or "a predetermined operation lottery is performed based on the ball detection by said opportunity ball entry detection means, When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery”.

According to the means H1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this means, by providing the trigger ball entry means for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the movable body is moved to the predetermined position based on the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. Since it is determined whether or not it will be in an advantageous state, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

In particular, in this means, by providing a plurality of opening and closing patterns of the variable ball entry means (opening and closing member), the timing at which the game ball enters the variable ball entry means changes. Even if it is configured to operate at a fixed timing, the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball that has entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means will differ. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of cheating such as vibrating the game machine in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body.

When changing the rate of entering a ball into the special means, for example, a method of providing a plurality of operation patterns of the movable bodies and changing the selection probability of the patterns to change the rate of entering a ball into the special means. However, it is also possible to change the action mode of the movable body that changes the behavior of the game ball by performing a predetermined action, and adjust the ball entry rate to the special ball entry means to the desired ball entry rate. The work is very difficult, and it is necessary to repeat trial and error many times. In this regard, according to this means, it is possible to more easily change the ball entry rate to the special ball entry means.

Means H2. When a predetermined opening/closing pattern among the plurality of opening/closing patterns is performed, the movable body is more likely to be in the predetermined advantageous state than when the predetermined opening/closing pattern is not performed. The game machine according to the means H1 characterized by the above.

According to the above means H2, for example, when a predetermined opening/closing pattern in which the opening/closing member is opened at a relatively high rate is performed, it is possible to enter more game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time. Therefore, due to the synergistic effect with the structure in which the movable body is likely to be in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation for entering the ball into the special ball entering means is increased, and the player's expectation for the special game state can perform. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means H3. lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball entering the opportunity ball entry means;
display means for starting a variable display based on the entry of a ball into the triggering ball entry means and performing stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the operation lottery process;
holding means capable of holding the variable display on the display means for a predetermined number of times,
The gaming machine according to means H1 or H2, characterized in that the operation condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process.

According to the means H3, since the movable body does not move every time in accordance with a predetermined trigger, the effects of the means H1 and the like are enhanced, and the production related to the movable body is suppressed from becoming monotonous. It is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for body movements.

In addition, in this means, the frequency with which the movable body operates can be increased by providing the retaining means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means H4. Any one of the means H1 to H3, characterized by comprising operation pattern determination means for determining which of a plurality of operation patterns is to be executed when the movable body is placed in the advantageous state. The game machine described.

According to the means H4, by providing a plurality of operation patterns of the movable body, it is possible to further enhance the effects of the means H1 and the like. Although it is very difficult to adjust the ball entry rate to the special ball entry means to the desired ball entry rate, on the other hand, the behavior of the game ball is diversified, and it is possible to improve the interest, as described above. fraudulent behavior can be curbed.

Means H5. The gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H4, wherein at least one of the plurality of opening/closing patterns includes a plurality of opening/closing operations.

According to the above means H5, since the ratio of opening the opening/closing member becomes relatively large, more game balls can be entered into the variable ball entering means at the same time. As a result, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation for the ball entering the special ball-entering means.

Means H6. Means H5, characterized in that at least one opening/closing operation among the plurality of opening/closing operations has an opening time longer than the game ball shooting interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) by the shooting means. game machine.

According to the means H6, the effect of the means H5 can be further enhanced.

Means H7. a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means;
a second route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the trigger ball entry means;
a route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
The game machine according to any one of means H1 to H6, wherein the movable body can change the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no interval) The same applies hereinafter), etc.), even if a situation occurs that is advantageous to the player, if all of these game balls are directed toward the opportunity ball entry means, no matter how much the movable body Even if is in an advantageous state, there is a possibility that a problem such as not even one game ball entering the special ball entering means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the means H7, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the preceding first game ball is the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the function and effect of providing the movable body are more effective.

Furthermore, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, which route will the first preceding game ball and the second following game ball flow down? Since the results will differ depending on the route, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means with a sense of anticipation. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

Means H8. A game according to any one of the means H1 to H7, characterized in that a game ball entering (or passing through) the trigger ball entering means cannot flow down to the special ball entering means (cannot be entered). machine.

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the means H8, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the above various problems can be suppressed. can be done.

Means H9. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball enters the game ball. The game machine according to any one of means H1 to H8, characterized in that:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means H9, a game ball other than a game ball entered at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entry means (in a continuous ball state) is also special with a higher probability. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to make the game ball enter the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means H9, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body is not yet activated and the first route is activated. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means It is also possible to construct a configuration in which the game ball that has been played flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means H9 is set so that "when a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, it is opened and closed in the open state period after the open state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball passed. The game machine according to any one of the means H1 to H8, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the member."

In addition, under the configuration of each of the above means, the configuration related to the means H9 is the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to the start of operation of the movable body, and By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means H10. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. A game machine according to any one of means H1 to H9, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the means H10, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation for the ball entering the special ball-entering means is increased, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means H11. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means H11, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means H12. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The game machine according to any one of means H1 to H11, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the starting ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means H13. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means H1 to H12, characterized by being capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be granted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above-described means H13, even during an open game state (during an open period of the variable ball entry means) in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained conventionally, the movable body can be generated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem I. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

However, in such a pachinko machine, since the game ball is entered into the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is necessary to continue shooting the game ball into the game area even after the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. be. In such a case, conventionally, since the variable ball entry means has already been opened, even if a game ball newly enters the starting ball entry means at this timing, the opening opportunity etc. are not obtained, and the prize ball is awarded. was only Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's interest in the game may decline, and further improvement in interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of dramatically improving the interest of players.

Means I1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, a movable body that can change the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine comprising movable body control means capable of executing control to make the movable body perform a predetermined action as a benefit that can be imparted when a predetermined condition is satisfied, thereby making the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state.

In addition, when "a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means", for example, "a start ball that can detect the game ball entering the starting ball entry means detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the ball detection by the start ball detection means, When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery”.

According to the means I1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this means, a game ball is newly introduced into the starting ball entering means during a predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. When the ball hits the ball and satisfies a predetermined condition, the movable body is made to perform a predetermined action as an advantage that can be given, and control can be executed to set it in a predetermined advantageous state.

As a result, even during an open game state (during the period in which the variable ball entry means is open) in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained in the conventional art, the movable body performs a predetermined action based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. Advantageous conditions can occur for players who play.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means I2. The movable body control means causes the movable body to perform the predetermined action when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined period after the end of the predetermined open game state and a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine according to means I1, characterized in that it is constructed so as to be capable of executing the control to make the predetermined advantageous state.

Conventionally, in a pachinko machine, within a predetermined time from the time when the variable ball entry means is opened (or when the game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means which is in the open state), the variable ball entry It is set as a standby time (remaining ball monitoring period) for waiting for a game ball (remaining ball) that has entered the internal area of the means but has not yet been discharged to be detected by a predetermined detection switch.

Conventionally, however, when a game ball newly enters the starting ball entry means during this remaining ball monitoring period, prize balls are paid out, but a lottery or the like based on the entered ball is not conducted. , the variable ball entry means is configured so as not to be in an open state.

On the other hand, according to the above-described means I2, even during a predetermined period after the end of the predetermined open game state (during the remaining ball monitoring period), the movable body is moved based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action. As a result, the effect of the means I1 can be further enhanced.

Means I3. It is characterized in that the time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means to when the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) starts opening can be changed in a plurality of ways. The gaming machine according to means I1 or I2.

If the time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means to when the opening of the variable ball entering means is started is always constant, the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. At that time, the player easily grasps that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the opening timing of the variable ball entry means related to the starting ball entry, and the game ball is released at that time. There is a risk that some players will temporarily stop playing.

Further, when the time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means to when the opening of the variable ball entering means is always constant, the opening timing of the variable ball entering means is determined by the player. There is a risk that such actions as shooting a game ball can be easily performed in accordance with the timing.

On the other hand, according to the above means I3, the opening timing of the variable ball-entering means changes, and the variable ball-entering means does not always open at a constant timing, so that the game presentation related to the variable ball-entering means becomes monotonous. It is possible to suppress As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to this means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the release timing of the variable ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an action such as shooting a game ball is performed in accordance with the opening timing of the variable ball entry means. In addition, since the player continues to shoot game balls, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

Means I4. a first display means for starting a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means and performing a stop display in a predetermined mode based on a lottery result of a predetermined open lottery process;
a first fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation display times according to the first display means;
a first variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of variation patterns stored in the first variation pattern storage means based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; ,
A first display control means for controlling the first display means based on the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern selection means,
The opening/closing control means is
The game machine according to means I3, wherein the open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened after the stop display is made on the first display means can be executed.

According to the means I4, the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display on the first display means can be made variable. By utilizing this, it is possible to make the time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means until the opening of the variable ball entering means is started to be variable.

As a result, the configuration related to the means I3 can be realized with relatively simple processing, and simplification of control can be achieved.

Means I5. A lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof). with
The game machine according to any one of means I1 to I4, wherein the predetermined condition can be satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process.

If the movable body is configured to operate each time a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the game ends), When the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the player easily understands that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the operation timing of the movable body related to the starting ball entering means. At that point, there is a risk that some players will temporarily stop shooting game balls.

According to the above means I5, every time a game ball enters the starting ball entering means during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof), the movable body does not operate. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the presentation related to the movable body and increase the player's expectation for the movement of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means I6. The time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during the predetermined period after the end thereof) until the predetermined motion of the movable body is started. The game machine according to any one of means I1 to I3, wherein (the time required for the movable body to reach the predetermined advantageous state) can be changed in a plurality of ways.

If the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof), the time from when the predetermined movement of the movable body is started is always constant. In this case, when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the operation timing of the movable body related to the starting ball entering means. There is a risk that some players will stop shooting the game balls at that point.

In addition, during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof), the time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means to when the predetermined operation of the movable body is started is always If it is fixed, the player will easily grasp the movement timing of the movable body, and there is a risk that an action such as shooting a game ball will be easily performed in accordance with the timing.

On the other hand, according to the means I6, since the movement timing of the movable body changes and the movable body does not always move at a fixed timing, the monotony of the game performance using the movable body is suppressed. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to this means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the movement timing of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an action such as shooting a game ball will be performed in accordance with the operation timing of the movable body. In addition, since the player continues to shoot game balls, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

Means I7. The time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during the predetermined period after the end thereof) until the predetermined motion of the movable body is started. out of a plurality of set times set in advance based on the game ball entering the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end) A gaming machine according to means I6, characterized by comprising set time selection means capable of selecting any one.

According to the means I7, the configuration related to the means I6 can be realized by relatively simple processing, and the control can be simplified.

Means I8. During the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end), a variable display is started based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, and the lottery result of the predetermined operation lottery process. a second display means for performing stop display in a predetermined manner based on
a second fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation display times according to the second display means;
A plurality of patterns stored in the second variation pattern storage means based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof) A second variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the variation patterns of
A second display control means for controlling the second display means based on the variation pattern selected by the second variation pattern selection means,
The movable body control means is
A gaming machine according to means I6, wherein control is executable to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state after the stop display is made on the second display means.

According to the means I8, by providing the second display means, the player can be made to recognize in advance that the movable body may enter a predetermined advantageous state.

Furthermore, the player, while not knowing whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, has a sense of anticipation that it will be in an advantageous state, and watches the movement of the game ball and the variable display. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

As a result, it is possible to increase the attention level of the game presentation related to the movable body, and to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to the means I8, the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display on the second display means can be made variable. Utilizing this, during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end), from the game ball entering the starting ball entering means until the predetermined operation of the movable body is started can be made variable.

As a result, the configuration related to the means I6 can be realized with relatively simple processing, and simplification of control can be achieved.

Means I9. It is characterized in that the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the predetermined open game state (and/or the predetermined period after the end) is over. A gaming machine according to any one of means I1 to I8.

In a game machine configured so that a game ball can enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability by receiving the action (assist) of the movable body, during (and/or after) a predetermined open game state, At the time when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means (at the time of the operation assist lottery) during a predetermined period), the player's sense of expectation may fade and the interest may decrease when the game ball does not exist in the internal area. There is

On the other hand, according to the means I9, when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during the predetermined period after the end), the game ball enters the internal area. Even if is not present, a game ball entering the variable ball entering means opened at a predetermined timing is given a chance of entering the special ball entering means with a higher probability.

As a result, the player can confirm that the game ball has entered the starting ball entering means during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end). It is possible to positively play the game to enter the game ball into the ball entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means I10. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. A game machine according to any one of means I1 to I9, characterized in that it is constructed to facilitate.

According to the above means I10, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means increases, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state or the like. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means I11. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the above means I11, the determination of the type of the special game state is performed based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

In addition, for a game machine having a part or all of the above means A1 to A11, a part or all of the above means A1 to A11 and the above means B1 to B13 Configuration of any part or all, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, or means E1 to means E12 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means F1 to means F11, configuration of any part or all of the means G1 to means G12, the means H1 to means Any part or all of the configuration of H13 and at least one of the configurations of part or all of the above means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination.

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the above means B1 to B13, a configuration of any part or all of the means A1 to means A11, the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to C12, any part or all of the means A1 to A11, the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to D15, any part or all of the means A1 to A11, the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of any part or all of the above means E1 to E12, a configuration of any part or all of the above means A1 to means A11 and the above means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means A1 to A11, the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means G1 to G12, any part or all of the means A1 to A11, the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means H1 to H13, any part or all of the means A1 to A11, the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the above means I1 to I11, a configuration of any part or all of the means A1 to A11 and the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

(b) The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine. As a more detailed example of a mode, "an operating means (game ball shooting handle) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting motor, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the shooting means. A pinball game machine provided with a game area in which a game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operation opening, etc.) arranged in the game area.

(b) The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine having a game area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed example of a mode, "an operating means (game ball shooting handle) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting motor, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the shooting means. A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) that guides the game balls and extends along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operation port, etc.), and configured to enable visual recognition of the behavior of the game ball flowing down the game area.

(c) The game machine in each of the above means or each pinball game machine is a pachinko machine or a game machine conforming to a pachinko machine.

[Second embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 according to the second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. However, portions (same components, same processing contents, etc.) that overlap with the first embodiment described above will be described using the same member names and the same reference numerals. The gaming machine according to the present invention (the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment) is provided with a "rotating body" as the "rotating means" of the present invention.

50 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 51 is a perspective view, and FIG. 52 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame set 14 are opened. FIG. 53 is a front view showing the structure of the inner frame 12, the game board 30, and the like. 54 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12, the back pack unit 203 and the like are opened. However, in FIG. 52, for the sake of convenience, nails and various accessories as path changing means arranged on the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14 are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 52, etc., the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that constitutes the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10. An inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. .

As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the outer frame 11 includes an upper frame-constituting portion 11a and a lower frame-constituting portion 11b made of a wooden board, and a left frame-constituting portion 11c and a right side frame-constituting portion 11d made of aluminum alloy by extrusion molding. These frame-constituting parts 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame as a whole by detachable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame-constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 50). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. A space formed inside the outer frame 11 accommodates the inner frame 12 and the like.

An extension wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end in the width direction is formed on the right-side frame-constituting portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 54) provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 54). In addition, as shown in FIG. 52 , a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked is provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 . A pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame open detection switch 92 (to be described later) protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the lower receiving portion 85 .

Further, a resin-made curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame-constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 protruding upward is integrally formed in the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87 . This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed with the inner frame 12 .

As shown in FIG. 52, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically along the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38 .

A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening/closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame set 14 . Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12 . A detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 50, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 is provided as a ball receiving tray at the center of the lower part, and game balls discharged from the outlet 16 are stored in the lower tray 15. It is possible. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball extracting lever 25 for ejecting game balls from the inside of the lower tray 15 is provided.

In addition, on the left side of the lower plate 15, a performance button 125 is provided as an operating means that can be operated by the player. The effect button 125 is configured to be capable of being pressed (operated downward) by the player. Further, inside the lower plate 15, an operation detection switch (not shown) is provided as an operation detection means for detecting a pressing operation of the production button 125. As shown in FIG. When the performance button 125 is pressed, an operation detection signal is output from the operation detection switch to the sub-controller 262, which will be described later. As a result, when the player presses the effect button 125, a predetermined effect is performed on the effect display device 42 or the like, or the content of the effect is changed, as will be described later.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, there is provided a game ball shooting handle (hereinafter simply referred to as "handle") 18 protruding forward. It should be noted that the handle 18 as an operating means that can be operated by the player is, for example, a base portion fixed to the front frame set 14, and a rotation operating portion as a first operating portion rotatably assembled to the base portion. , a variable resistor as operation amount detection means for detecting the operation amount of the rotary operation unit, and a shooting stop switch as a second operation unit that can select whether or not to shoot the game ball to the game area. .

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15 . The upper tray 19 is a ball receiver that once stores game balls and guides them toward a game ball launching device (hereinafter simply referred to as "shooting device") 60 as shooting means to be described later while aligning them in a row. When the upper tray 19 is filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray communication passage 71 and the discharge port 16, which will be described later.

The upper plate 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a returning button 122 as operating means that can be operated by the player. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like, the ball lending button 121 is operated. A rented ball is supplied to the upper tray 19 . In addition, in order to clarify the ownership of the game balls used in the game hall, predetermined information that can identify the game hall is described by stamping, etc., and game balls brought in from other game halls Prevents fraudulent use. A return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and return button 122 are unnecessary in a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine.

Further, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball-removing button 123 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. By pressing the ball extracting button 123, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 is opened and stored in the upper tray 19. The game ball is guided (dropped) to the lower tray 15. - 特許庁That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123 .

Further, the front face of the front frame set 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it. These light emitting means play a role of increasing the effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode such as lighting and blinking in accordance with the change of the game state such as at the time of a big win or a predetermined ready-to-win state. For example, a frame lamp 102 containing a light emitting means such as an LED is provided on the periphery of the window portion 101 . Also, on both sides of the frame lamp 102, there are provided error display lamps 104 which light up when a predetermined error occurs. A large number of fine through holes are formed in the frame lamps 102 above the error display lamps 104 so as to correspond to the speakers SP (see FIG. 52) provided on the rear surface of the front frame set 14 .

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14 . The glass unit 137 does not have a conventional front and rear pair of rectangular plate glasses that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but has a round shape as a whole and is attached after being assembled.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52 , a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101 . The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication path 71 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the outlet 16 of the lower tray 15 and an upper tray communication path 73 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the upper tray 19 .

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting game balls positioned in the lower tray communication passage 71 . Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and that the game balls are staying in the lower tray communication passage 71). be able to.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. At the lower front portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), there is a shooting device 60 and a shooting rail 61 for guiding game balls immediately after being shot from the shooting device 60. installed. In this embodiment, as the launching device 60, a solenoid type launching device having a plunger as a movable member is adopted.

In this embodiment, control is performed such that launching of the launching device 60 is prohibited based on the game ball being continuously detected for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch. On the other hand, when the stagnation of the game balls in the lower tray communication passage 71 is eliminated and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game balls are no longer detected continuously for a predetermined time), the launching of the shooting device 60 is permitted.

A ball feeder 63 is provided above the launcher 60 . The ball feeding device 63 guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the shooting position of the shooting device 60 by driving means such as a solenoid.

Reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 52 and 53 denotes a payout passage for guiding game balls paid out by a payout mechanism 352 (to be described later) to the front of the inner frame 12, and an upper tray communication passage 73 (upper tray 19 ) and a passage leading to the lower tray communication passage 71 (lower tray 15).

Further, a shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like so as to close the outlet of the payout passage 67. It has become.

On the other hand, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the entrance side rear ends of the lower tray communicating path 71 and the upper tray communicating path 73 . In the closed state of the front frame set 14, the inlets of the lower tray communicating path 71 and the upper tray communicating path 73 are adjacent to the dispensing path 67 with a predetermined distance therebetween, and the gap between them is filled with a game ball. can pass through.

In addition, since the entrance portion of the lower tray communication passage 71 and the entrance portion of the upper tray communication passage 73 are provided adjacent to each other, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication passage 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls are paid out. The game balls flow toward the lower tray communication path 71 (overflow to the inlet side of the lower tray communication path 71) and are paid out to the lower tray 15 through the lower tray communication path 71. - 特許庁

As described above, the game board 30 is attached behind the window hole 39 to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral portion in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30, which serves as a game area, is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. As shown in FIG.

Here, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 in the present embodiment is based on a transparent plate which is a light-transmitting member formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material having light-transmitting properties (light-transmitting properties) such as polycarbonate, acrylic resin, and ABS resin. (game board main body). Here, "transparent" does not only mean that an object existing in the rear area of the game board 30 can be visually recognized in a completely transparent state, but at least a part of the light is transmitted so that the existence of the object can be recognized. It may also include a so-called translucent state of some degree.

With this configuration, the player can visually recognize various objects such as lamps and display devices arranged in the rear region of the game board 30 from the front of the game board 30 through the game board 30 . For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, LED boards 48A, 48B, and 48C mounted with a plurality of LEDs are arranged as light emitting means behind a predetermined area of the game area. , the light emitted from the LED can be visually recognized from the front of the game board 30 through the game board 30 . Incidentally, the LED board 48A and the like are controlled to light up and blink in a predetermined light emission mode corresponding to various game effects, and serve to enhance the effect of the game during the game.

In addition, the game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52 formed of strip-shaped metal plates, and guide means for guiding the game ball fired from the shooting device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. A rail 50 is attached. As a result, the game ball shot with the rotating operation of the handle 18 is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the shooting rails 61 and 50 .

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 53) of the inner rail-constituting portion 51 . As a result, the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area is prevented from returning into the rail 50 again. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to substantially the tip portion (upper right portion in FIG. 53) of the outer rail constituting portion 52 . As a result, the game ball shot with more than a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 54 as movement restricting means and is returned to the substantially central portion side of the game board 30 .

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 ends at the upper right portion of the game board 30 , and the inner rail component 51 ends at the lower right portion of the game board 30 . Therefore, the play area is defined by the rails 50 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the window holes 39 of the resin base 38 . However, until the game ball hit by the launching device 60 passes through the return ball preventing member 53 as a return restricting means, there is a case where the rail 50 is reversed. is removed from the play area.

In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined distance between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball passage unit 70 receives a game ball dropped from the gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed leading to the plate 15 . As a result, if a game ball shot from the shooting device 60 does not reach the return-ball prevention member 53 and travels back along the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 72 to the lower tray 15. Ejected.

The game board 30 includes a general winning port (general winning portion) 31, a variable winning device (large winning port) 32, an upper starting winning port 33YA, a lower starting winning port 33YB, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, a first The special display device 43L, the second special display device 43R, and the like are arranged so as to be fitted into mounting holes formed through the transparent plate.

Furthermore, in the front area of the game board 30, that is, in the game area formed on the front side of the game board 30, in order to distribute the falling direction of the game ball in a predetermined area and to guide the game ball to a predetermined position, A large number of nails 49, windmills 57 and the like are arranged. The windmill 57 is a rotating body that rotates when a game ball that moves relatively to itself comes into contact with it and acts on the flow of the game ball, and changes state between a rotating state and a stopped state. For example, the windmill 57 includes a shaft member whose rear end side is directly or indirectly fixed to the game board 30, a central tubular portion through which the front end side of the shaft member is inserted, and a radial direction outward from the central tubular portion. It has a plurality of extended contact pieces as operated portions, and a decorative disk portion which is circular in a front view and is provided at the front end of the central cylindrical portion, and a game ball contacts the contact pieces. By receiving an external force, it rotates with the front-rear direction as its axial direction due to the external force. Of course, the configuration of the windmill 57 is not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted.

The game balls guided to the game area flow down along various routes while being changed in the direction of flow and the direction of rotation by the nails 49 and the like. Some of the plurality of game balls guided to the game area are guided to the windmill 57 while relatively moving through various paths, and the windmill 57 distributes the falling routes to the left and right. Here, when the game ball is in the first mode passing on the left side of the windmill 57 and the game ball acts on the contact piece in the first proximity state, the windmill 57 moves in the counterclockwise direction, which is the first operation mode. Perform a rotation motion to On the other hand, when the game ball is in the second mode passing on the right side of the pinwheel 57 and the game ball acts on the contact piece in the second proximity state, the pinwheel 57 moves clockwise, which is the second motion mode. Make a rotating motion.

Under such a configuration, the game balls distributed to the right side by the windmill 57 (hereinafter referred to as the left windmill 57) provided in the left side area of the variable display device unit 35, for example, are distributed to the left side by the left windmill 57. Compared with the game ball, it becomes easier to be guided toward the upper start winning opening 33YA by the nail 49 or the like. On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the right by the windmill 57 (hereinafter referred to as the right windmill 57) provided in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 are compared to the game balls distributed to the left by the right windmill 57. , it becomes easier to be guided to the variable winning device 32.

Further, in this embodiment, the left windmill 57 rotates clockwise and the game ball passes through the left windmill 57 more than the case where the left windmill 57 rotates counterclockwise and the game ball passes through the left side of the left windmill 57 . While the percentage of game balls guided to the upper start winning opening 33YA is greater when passing through the right side of the left windmill 57, the left windmill 57 rotates clockwise and the game ball passes through the right side of the left windmill 57. When the left windmill 57 rotates counterclockwise and the game balls pass through the left side of the left windmill 57, the ratio of the game balls guided to the general winning opening 31 increases.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the game area is expanded in the left-right direction, by providing the windmill 57, etc., the game ball can be moved from the top start winning opening 33YA, the variable winning device 32, etc. It is configured so that it can be easily guided in the direction. In addition, the nail 49 and the like are adjusted in advance on the game board 30 so that the winning to the upper start winning opening 33YA, the variable winning device 32 and the like occurs at an appropriate probability.

In this embodiment, the windmills 57 are provided in the left side area and the right side area of the variable display device unit 35, respectively. It is good also as a structure provided. Further, when the game board 30 is configured based on a transparent plate as in the present embodiment, at least a part of the windmill 57 such as the decorative disc portion is configured as a light transmitting portion by a light transmitting resin material or the like. You may The relative positional relationship between the windmill 57 and the game ball includes a first positional relationship in which at least a portion of the windmill 57 and at least a portion of the game ball do not overlap and a first positional relationship in which at least a portion of the windmill 57 and at least a portion of the game ball do not overlap. and a second positional relationship, which is a close proximity state in which at least a portion overlaps with the second positional relationship. Therefore, when the light transmitting portion is provided, the light transmitted through the game board 30 is visible to the player through the light transmitting portion of the windmill 57 in the first positional relationship in which the game ball does not pass through the windmill 57. It will happen. On the other hand, in the second positional relationship in which the game ball passes through the pinwheel 57, part of the game ball overlapping the transparent portion of the pinwheel 57 blocks part of the light transmitted through the game board 30, A portion of the game ball is irradiated with light such as external light from the front through the portion.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with winning detection switches as detection means for detecting game balls that have entered the various winning ports corresponding to the various winning ports (ball entering means) such as the general winning port 31. there is Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53 , a general prize winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general prize winning port 31 , and a count switch 223 is provided to the variable prize winning device 32 . In addition, the upper start prize winning port 33YA is provided with a first start prize winning switch 224A, and the lower start prize winning port 33YB is provided with a second start prize winning switch 224B. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34 .

As is well known, when a game ball enters various winning ports such as the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper starting winning port 33YA, and the lower starting winning port 33YB, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper tray 19 (or lower plate 15), a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. For example, when there is a prize in the upper start prize-winning port 33YA, 3 pieces, when there is a prize in the lower start prize-winning port 33YB, 1 prize, and when there is a prize in the general prize-winning port 31, 10 15 game balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 (lower tray 15) when there is a prize to the variable prize winning device 32.例文帳に追加Here, the upper starting winning opening 33YA may constitute the first starting winning means, the lower starting winning opening 33YB may constitute the second starting winning means, and the variable winning device 32 may constitute the specific winning means. . In addition, the state in which the game ball wins in a predetermined winning opening such as the upper starting winning opening 33YA may be regarded as an advantageous state. For example, a state in which a game ball enters the upper starting prize winning port 33YA and three prize balls are paid out is defined as a first advantageous state, and a state in which a game ball enters the general winning prize port 31 and ten prize balls are paid out is defined as a first advantageous state. 2 advantageous state. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that do not enter various prize winning ports such as the general winning port 31 are discharged out of the game area through the out port 36. .

The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening (reference numerals omitted) in which a game ball can win a prize, a rectangular plate-shaped opening and closing plate (large winning opening opening and closing member) 32a as an opening and closing member for opening and closing the large winning opening, and the opening and closing plate. It is provided with a large winning opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the 32a.

The variable winning device 32 is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the big winning opening during normal times when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, and when a big win or a small win described later occurs, the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this case, the opening/closing plate 32a tilts forward with its lower side as the pivot axis by energizing the solenoid for the large winning opening, and the game ball enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the large winning opening.

A game ball can always win a prize in the upper starting prize opening 33YA. On the other hand, the lower start winning opening 33YB is provided with an opening/closing accessory 37Y as an opening/closing type winning auxiliary device.

The opening/closing accessory 37Y includes a pair of left and right movable blades 37Ya as an opening/closing member that rotates in the left-right direction about the lower end side, and a starting prize opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the movable blades 37Ya to open and close. , the movable vane 37Ya opens and closes in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition, so that the game ball flowing down the game area can enter the lower starting winning opening 33YB, and the game ball enters the lower starting winning opening 33YB. It is configured so that the state can be changed between the disabled closed state.

As described above, the upper starting winning opening 33YA and the lower starting winning opening 33YB are provided with a first starting winning switch 224A and a second starting winning switch 224B as detection means for detecting winning game balls, respectively. Then, when a game ball is detected by the starting prize-winning switches 224A and 224B, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a big win state, etc., and special display devices 43L and 43R and an effect display device 42 to be described later are performed. , it is configured to perform variable display and predetermined effects. Here, when winning a lottery, a jackpot state or the like is provided.

Hereinafter, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 86, in this embodiment, as the jackpot types, "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variable jackpot B", "4R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot A" , “16R normal jackpot B”, “4R normal jackpot A”, “4R normal jackpot B” and “JUB (Jump Up Bonus) jackpot”.

In the jackpot state of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "long open" is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated 16 times (16 rounds).

In the present embodiment, "long open" means that a specified time of 30 seconds has elapsed after the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 was switched from a closed state to an open state, or a specified number of It refers to one opening and closing operation until it becomes a closed state on the condition that 10 game balls win a prize.

In the jackpot state of "16R probability variable jackpot B", "long open" is set as one special prize state, and after this is repeated four times (4 rounds), "short open" is set as one special prize state, This is repeated 12 times (12 rounds).

In this embodiment, "short opening" means that the specified time of 0.4 seconds has elapsed after the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 was switched from the closed state to the open state, or It refers to one opening and closing operation until the closed state is reached on the condition that three game balls of the number win a prize.

In the present embodiment, game balls are shot toward the game area from the shooting device 60 at a rate of one every "0.6 seconds" based on the operation of the handle 18 by the player. On the other hand, in the above "short opening", the specified opening time of the opening/closing plate 32a is 0.4 seconds. That is, in the case of "short opening", the opening time of one opening/closing plate 32a is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, even one game ball may not win a prize with only one "short release". For this reason, the opening/closing plate 32a is rarely closed based on the condition related to the number of winning prizes (the number of winning prizes is 3) among the above two closing conditions corresponding to the "short opening", and once the opening/closing plate 32a is opened. will normally be closed based on the lapse of a specified time (0.4 seconds). This avoids changing the execution period each time during the "short open" execution period.

In the jackpot states of "4R probability variable jackpot A" and "4R probability variable jackpot B", "long open" is set as one prize state, and this is repeated four times (four rounds).

In the jackpot state of "16R normal jackpot A", "long open" is set as one special prize state, and after this is repeated eight times (8 rounds), "short open" is set as one special prize state, This is repeated 8 times (8 rounds).

In the jackpot state of "16R normal jackpot B", "long open" is set as one special prize state, and after this is repeated four times (four rounds), "short open" is set as one special prize state, This is repeated 12 times (12 rounds).

In the jackpot states of "4R normal jackpot A" and "4R normal jackpot B", "long open" is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated four times (four rounds).

In the jackpot state of 'JUB jackpot', 'short opening' is set as one special prize state, which is repeated 5 times, and then 'long opening' is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated 15 times. . In other words, five “short releases” are performed in the first round, and “long releases” are performed in each of the second to sixteenth rounds.

In addition, when the various "probability variable jackpots" and "JUB jackpots" occur, a "high probability mode (high probability state)" is given as a lottery mode after the jackpot state. On the other hand, when various "normal jackpots" occur, a "low probability mode (low probability state)" is given after the jackpot state ends.

"High-probability mode" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability is increased compared to the "low-probability mode" normally set. The "high probability mode" set after the end of the big win continues until the next big win state occurs.

After the end of the various jackpots, a winning support mode related to the opening/closing accessory 37Y is performed while the special display devices 43L and 43R are performing variable display for a predetermined number of times or until the next jackpot state occurs. As a "high support mode (high ball state)" is given.

"High support mode" means that the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time in the opening and closing accessory 37Y of the lower start winning opening 33YB is higher than the "low support mode (low ball entry state)" set at normal times. It refers to the state where there are many.

For example, as the "high support mode", (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 described later is shorter than in the "low support mode", (2) the movable wings 37Ya of the opening/closing accessory 37Y A state in which the opening time (prescribed time) is longer than in the "low support mode", and (3) a state in which the prescribed number of game balls that can win prizes per opening of the movable blade 37Ya is greater than in the "low support mode". , (4) When a winning result is obtained by the opening lottery of the opening and closing accessory 37Y caused by the game ball passing through the through gate 34, the number of execution times of the opening and closing processing of the movable feather 37Ya performed per time is "low support mode (5) a state in which the winning probability in the open lottery for the opening/closing accessory 37Y is higher than that in the "low support mode". The high support mode in this embodiment employs the configurations (1), (2), and (5) above. Of course, without being limited to this, any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of the configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “high support mode”. As a result, game balls are likely to frequently win prizes in the lower starting prize-winning port 33YB, the number of times the big winning lottery is executed increases, and the state of holding the balls becomes good.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "high support mode" is provided, by changing the variation pattern table to a table for the "high support mode" as described later, the first and second special display devices 43L , 43R (effect display device 42) are configured to be shorter than in the "low support mode".

In this embodiment, after the end of the "16R probability variable jackpot A" and "4R probability variable jackpot A", the "high support mode" is provided until the next jackpot state occurs. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "until the next time/high support mode".

After the end of "16R probability variable jackpot B" and "4R probability variable jackpot B", "20 times", "30 times", "40 times" or "50 times" are displayed on the special display devices 43L and 43R. "High Support Mode" is granted while The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode", respectively.

After the end of the "16R normal jackpot A" and "4R normal jackpot A", the "high support mode" is provided while the special display devices 43L and 43R perform "30 times" variable display. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "30 times/high support mode S".

After the end of "16R normal jackpot B" and "4R normal jackpot B", "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode" Support mode" is given.

After the end of the "JUB jackpot", "until next time/high support mode" is provided.

In this embodiment, various game states occur by combining the various modes described above.

For example, if "high probability mode" and "high support mode" are given, it becomes a so-called "probability change state (probability change state)".

When the state in which the "low probability mode" and the "low support mode" are provided, it becomes a so-called "normal state".

If "low probability mode" and "high support mode" are given, it will be a so-called "time reduction state (time reduction state)".

When the "high-probability mode" and the "low-support mode" are added, a so-called "latent certainty state (variable latent certainty state)" occurs. In other words, when it comes to the "latent certainty state", the probability of hitting the jackpot is simply increased, and on the surface it is the same as the "normal state", so the state where the "high probability mode" is given It becomes difficult for the player to recognize it.

Further, in the present embodiment, apart from the various "big wins", a "small win" is generated when a predetermined result is obtained in the winning lottery. In the small prize state, "short opening" is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated five times (five rounds). However, the lottery mode and winning support mode provided after the end of the small winning state are the original modes before the occurrence of the small winning state. For example, if the lottery mode before the occurrence of the small winning state is the "high probability mode", the "high probability mode" is maintained even after the small winning state ends.

In addition, although it will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the upper starting winning opening 33YA and when winning the lower starting winning opening 33YB, it is awarded when winning by lottery. The distribution of the jackpot types is different. When winning the winning lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the upper start winning opening 33YA, "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variable jackpot B", "4R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot B , ``16R normal jackpot A'', ``16R normal jackpot B'', and ``4R normal jackpot B'', and wins the winning lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the lower start prize winning opening 33YB. , it is distributed to one of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot A", "4R normal jackpot A" and "JUB jackpot". In addition, regarding the "small hit", it is configured to occur only when winning the winning lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the lower start winning opening 33YB.

The first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are each composed of two segment display devices and installed below the game board 30 . Each segment display device is provided with eight display segments. Each display segment has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one display segment, and any combination display segment can be illuminated. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on each segment display device.

Then, when the game ball enters the upper starting prize-winning port 33YA, the first special display device 43L performs a variable display, and when the game ball enters the lower starting prize-winning port 33YB, the second special display device 43R. The variable display is performed at . The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by the main control device 261, which will be described later.

Further, after the variable display is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, the display mode when the variable display is stopped is used to deterministically display whether or not the jackpot lottery has been won. be. For example, when a game ball wins in the upper start winning opening 33YA, the corresponding first special display device 43L displays a variable display at high speed. )do. Then, when a big win lottery is won, numerical values corresponding to various big wins (see FIG. 86) are displayed when fluctuation stops, and a big win state occurs.

As shown in FIG. 86, for example, when "16R probability variable jackpot A" is won, "9-" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and "50 times/high support mode". When winning the "16R probability variable jackpot B" with "84" is stop-displayed on the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R. Further, when the "JUB jackpot" is won, "1.-" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R, and when the "small win" is won, the first or second 2 "1-" is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43L and 43R. Here, like the stop mode “1.-” related to the “JUB big win” and the stop mode “1-” related to the “small win”, in order to enhance the production effect of the “JUB big win”, both stop modes It is preferable that the configuration is confusing.

Of course, the mode of stopping the special display devices 43L and 43R corresponding to various wins is not limited to the mode described above. For example, there may be a plurality of stop modes of the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R indicating one winning type, instead of one. For example, when "16R probability variable jackpot A" is won, one of "91", "92", "93", . It may be configured to be

Even when there are a plurality of stop modes of the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R indicating one type of win, a plurality of stop modes related to the "JUB big win" and a plurality of stop modes related to the "small win" It is preferable that a plurality of stop modes be confusing. For example, any one of ``-1.'', ``-2'', ``-3.'', ``-4'', . Any one of "-1", "-2.", "-3", "-4.", . In such a configuration, a pair of specific symbols ("1", "2", "3", . One of them is included in a plurality of stop modes related to "JUB big win" and the other is included in a plurality of stop modes related to "small win", and they are alternately interleaved.

In addition, the configuration may be such that the colors displayed in any or all of the display segments can be changed as appropriate.

Further, when a game ball newly wins the starting winning opening 33YA, 33YB during the variable display of the first or second special display devices 43L, 43R, the variable display for that amount is performed at that time. It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display. That is, the variable display is put on standby (suspended). The maximum number of times of the suspended variable display is determined for each pachinko machine model. , up to 4 variable displays (a total of 8 variable displays) are reserved. In addition, the number of times of suspension is displayed by the first suspension lamp 46a and the second suspension lamp 46b. In addition, when a game ball newly wins the starting prize-winning openings 33YA and 33YB during the jackpot state, the variable display for that amount is also suspended.

Basically, the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33YA is memorized in the order in which the corresponding game balls have won in the upper starting winning opening 33YA, and is digested in the order of winning. The variable display triggered by the winning to the 33YB is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls have entered the lower start winning port 33YB and is completed in the order in which they have won. However, when both the variable display triggered by the winning to the upper starting winning port 33YA and the variable display triggered by winning to the lower starting winning port 33YB are suspended (the first suspension lamp 46a and the second When one or more of the pending lamps 46b are lit), the variable display triggered by the winning to the lower start winning opening 33YB is preferentially extinguished. That is, unless the variable display triggered by the winning to the lower start winning opening 33YB is completely extinguished, the variable display triggered by winning to the upper starting winning opening 33YA is not performed. For example, in a state where one first holding lamp 46a is lit, the game ball wins in the lower starting winning prize port 33YB, and one second holding lamp 46b lights up, the winning to the upper starting winning prize port 33YA The variable display triggered by the winning is postponed, and the variable display triggered by the winning to the lower start winning opening 33YB is performed first. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the variable display triggered by winning the upper start prize-winning port 33YA will be referred to as "first variable display", and the variable display triggered by winning the lower start prize-winning port 33YB will be referred to as "second variable display". ” is also called.

In addition, the through gate 34 is configured so that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. Although the details will be described later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34, and when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, the switch is opened or closed. An open lottery is performed to determine whether or not the accessory 37Y (lower start winning opening 33YB) is to be opened, and the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to perform variable display. Then, when the lottery is won in the open lottery, the opening/closing accessory 37Y is kept open for a specified time.

The variable display device unit 35 includes a normal pattern display device 41 that variably displays when the through gate 34 is passed, and an effect display device 42 that variably displays according to the variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. and are provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 35, the variable display performed by the effect display device 42 is a variable specification indicating which of the upper starting winning opening 33YA and the lower starting winning opening 33YB corresponds to winning. A lamp 40 is provided.

The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to light up and display "○" or "X" as a normal symbol. The display is changed at high speed such as "○"→. Then, when the variable display stops at the "O" symbol (winning symbol) for several seconds, the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower start winning opening 33YB is opened for a predetermined time. Display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261 which will be described later.

Further, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display for that amount is performed after the variable display being performed at that time is completed. It has become. That is, the variable display is put on standby (suspended). The maximum number of times of the variable display to be held is determined for each pachinko machine model, but in this embodiment, it is held up to four times, and the number of times of holding is displayed by the holding lamp 44. there is

The effect display device 42 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the effect display device 42, based on the command from the main control device 261, the sub-control device 262 performs auxiliary control so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. The content to be displayed is determined and displayed by the display control device 45, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 92, the effect display device 42 is provided with, for example, upper, middle, and lower three pattern display areas. ), and thereafter, the symbols are stopped and displayed in order for each symbol display area (for example, in the order of upper symbol display area→lower symbol display area→middle symbol display area). For example, when the various "probability variable jackpots" or various "normal jackpots" are determined by the main controller 261, the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R display corresponding to the jackpots, and the effect display device. At 42, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the big win (for example, the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area are the same), and the big win state is started. be. Incidentally, in the case of a "JUB big win" or a "small win", the combination of symbols stop-displayed on the effect display device 42 does not correspond to the big win, as will be described later.

Further, when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to a big hit, as a preliminary step, for example, the same symbols are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. The ready-to-win state is the state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area and the variable display is still performed in the middle symbol display area.

Even if the ready-to-win state occurs, if the jackpot state does not occur, a symbol different from the symbols stop-displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. Also, in the case of various types of "probability variable jackpots" or various types of "normal jackpots", the double number is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 as described above, but in this embodiment, it is stopped and displayed. Depending on the type of symbol, it is impossible to determine the game state ("high probability mode" or not) given after the end of the jackpot.

Also, in the case of a "JUB big win" or a "minor win", a combination of predetermined specific numbers (hereinafter referred to as chance symbols) is stop-displayed instead of double eyes. For example, in this embodiment, "3", "4", and "1" are stop-displayed in the upper, middle, and lower pattern display areas. As a result, when the chance symbols are stopped and displayed, the player cannot distinguish between the "JUB jackpot" which is more advantageous to the player and the "small win" which is not so advantageous. , it is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

Of course, different combinations of specific numbers to be stopped and displayed in the upper/middle/lower pattern display areas may be used for the "JUB big win" and the "minor win". Also, in the case of "JUB big hit" or "small hit", instead of a combination of predetermined specific numbers, it seems that random combinations of odds are stopped and displayed, just like when they are lost. can be

Further, the performance display device 42 is configured to display the pending number of variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R corresponding to the above pending lamps 46a and 46b (see FIG. 92, etc.).

In the present embodiment, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the special display devices 43L, 43R and the holding lamps 46a, 46b are covered by the front frame set 14, making them invisible to the player. . Therefore, the player can grasp the game state, lottery result, etc., solely by the display contents (symbol display, hold display, etc.) of the effect display device 42 .

Of course, the configurations of the special display devices 43L, 43R and the reserve lamps 46L, 46R are not limited to such configurations, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, the special display devices 43L and 43R may be configured to be visible. However, the special display devices 43L and 43R are provided in inconspicuous places such as the lower corners of the game area as described above, and the size of the display portion is small, and characters for identification are displayed stopped. relatively short time. Therefore, it is practically impossible to grasp the given game state unless one carefully observes the special display devices 43L and 43R.

The variable specific lamp 40 includes an LED with a blue emission color and an LED with a red emission color, and the effect display device 42 performs a variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33YA. When the variable display triggered by the winning to the lower start winning opening 33YB is performed, the light is emitted in red.

Next, the configuration of the variable display device unit 35 will be described in detail. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the center frame 47 is fixed to the front side of the game board 30, and the frame cover 213 is fixed to the back side of the game board 30, thereby forming the variable display unit 35. It has an integrated configuration.

A rectangular opening 213a (see FIG. 55) is formed in the center of the frame cover 213, and an effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is detachably attached to the back side thereof. The liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 is a known one in which a liquid crystal panel formed by laminating various translucent members is arranged on the front side of a backlight as light emitting means.

The center frame 47 has a frame shape with a substantially circular opening 751 formed in the center thereof, and the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 can be visually recognized through the opening 751 .

It should be noted that the center frame 47 is not composed of a single member. For example, the base member is plated with various decorative members, or a lens member made of transparent resin that transmits light such as an LED. is assembled.

A stage portion 770 is provided on the upper surface of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47 along the left-right direction. Gentle undulations are formed on the stage portion 770 along the left-right direction.

A drop hole 774 is formed in the central portion of the rear wall portion 772 of the stage portion 770 so as to open forward and allow the game ball to drop. A communicating passage 775 leading to the drop hole 774 is provided below (inside) the central portion of the stage portion 770 . The other side of the communication path 775 is opened to the front side of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47 and serves as a discharge port 776 for discharging the game ball that has fallen into the drop hole 774 onto the game board 30 surface. Incidentally, when the center frame 47 is arranged on the game board 30, as shown in FIG.

A guide groove 778 is formed in the central portion of the stage portion 770 at a position in front of the drop hole 774 and gently sloped downward toward the inner side. As a result, the game ball can drop from the stage portion 770 to the drop hole 774 .

The left side portion 47c of the center frame 47 is formed therein with a ball passage (warp passage) 764 through which game balls pass. An entrance portion 764a of the ball passage 764 opens at the substantially central portion in the vertical direction of the left side portion 47c of the center frame 47, while an exit portion 764b faces the upper surface (stage portion 770) of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47. It is open. This ball passage 764 can guide a game ball flowing down on the surface of the game board 30 onto a stage portion 770 within the center frame 47 .

The game ball guided onto the stage portion 770 rolls on the stage portion 770 and then falls from the front onto the surface of the game board 30 or into the drop hole 774 described above. Of these, the game ball that has fallen into the drop hole 774 is guided onto the game board 30 surface via the communication path 775 . A game ball discharged from the discharge port 776 enters the upper start prize winning port 33YA with a relatively high probability.

Also, in the variable display device unit 35, an upper production accessory unit 761 and a lower production accessory unit 762 are arranged between the center frame 47 and the frame cover 213. As shown in FIG.

Specifically, the upper performance accessory unit 761 is disposed on the back side of the upper side portion 47a of the center frame 47, and is almost entirely covered by the upper side portion 47a and the like during normal operation (see FIG. 56). Only part of it is visible to the player.

In addition, the lower performance accessory unit 762 is disposed on the back side of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47, and in normal operation (see FIG. 56), the lower side portion 47b and the like cover almost the entirety thereof, and partially cover the lower side portion 47b. is visible to the player.

Here, the configuration of the upper production accessory unit 761 and the lower production accessory unit 762 will be described in detail. First, the upper production accessory unit 761 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the upper performance accessory unit 761 is provided on the back side of the upper side portion 47a of the center frame 47. As shown in FIGS.

The upper performance accessory unit 761 includes a unit base portion 810 arranged on the front upper portion of the frame cover 213, an upper movable accessory 811 provided swingably with respect to the unit base portion 810, and the upper movable role. and a swing drive mechanism 812 for swinging the object 811 .

The swing drive mechanism 812 includes a support arm 814 that supports the upper movable accessory 811 and a swing motor 815 that serves as a drive source for driving the support arm 814 .

When the support arm 814 is rotated and displaced based on the drive of the swing motor 815, the upper movable accessory 811 is mostly located behind the upper side portion 47a of the center frame 47 and is difficult for the player to visually recognize. It can swing between a standby state (see FIG. 56) and an exposed state (see FIG. 58) where most of it is located on the front side of the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 and is easily visible to the player (see FIG. 58). . A front area of the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 constitutes an effect area (predetermined area) in the present embodiment.

The swinging motor 815 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by an applied drive pulse signal, and by adjusting the drive pulse signal, the rotational displacement amount of the upper movable accessory 811 (support arm 814) can be controlled. . At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, it is possible to grasp the rotational displacement amount of the upper movable accessory 811 (support arm 814) from the reference position. Although illustration is omitted, the swing drive mechanism 812 is provided with a position detection sensor and the like for detecting the rotation position of the support arm 814 .

Here, the upper movable accessory 811 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. FIG. The upper movable accessory 811 includes a base portion 817 fixed to the tip of the support arm 814 and an upper rotating body 820 rotatably supported on the front side of the base portion 817 . The upper rotating body 820 is a rotating body for presentation, and constitutes a first rotating body as a first rotating means.

The base portion 817 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front, and a support shaft portion 818 is formed at the center thereof so as to protrude forward. The support shaft portion 818 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with a closed front side and an open rear side.

An upper rotating body drive motor 821 is attached and fixed to the back side of the base portion 817 . A pinion gear 821b is attached and fixed to the front end portion of the rotating shaft 821a of the drive motor 821 for the upper rotating body. Then, the driving force of the upper rotor drive motor 821 is transmitted to the upper rotor 820 via the pinion gear 821b.

An annular cover body 822 is attached and fixed to the front portion of the base portion 817 . A circular opening 822 a is formed in the central portion of the cover body 822 .

The upper rotating body 820 mainly consists of a rotating base plate 823 and six movable pieces 825 annularly arranged on the front side thereof.

The rotary base plate 823 has a cylindrical portion 826 extending in the front-rear direction and six extending pieces 827 radially extending from the outer peripheral wall portion of the cylindrical portion 826 toward the outside in the radial direction. The six extending pieces 827 are provided at equal intervals (at intervals of 60°) in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 826 .

The cylindrical portion 826 is fitted onto the support shaft portion 818 of the base portion 817 . As a result, the rotary base plate 823 is rotatably supported on the base portion 817 . Although illustration is omitted, the cylindrical portion 826 or the support shaft portion 818 is provided with restricting means for preventing the rotation base plate 823 (cylindrical portion 826) from falling off from the base portion 817 (support shaft portion 818). ing.

Each extension piece 827 is formed with a slit 829 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed along the radial direction of the rotary base plate 823 . A cylindrical pinion support shaft 830 is formed so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface of each extension piece 827 near the tip.

An annular central gear member 831 is fitted onto the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotary base 823 from behind.

The central gear member 831 is integrally formed with a large-diameter gear portion 831a provided on the front side and a small-diameter gear portion 831b provided on the rear side so as to form steps in the front-rear direction.

A pinion gear 832 is fitted on each of the pinion support shafts 830 and meshes with a large-diameter gear portion 831 a of a central gear member 831 .

Further, an annular holding plate 835 is attached to the back side of the rotary base plate 823 (see FIG. 105). The circular opening 835a of the pressing plate 835 is slightly larger in diameter than the small-diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831 so that the small-diameter gear portion 831b can be inserted therethrough, and has a smaller diameter than the large-diameter gear portion 831a.

Thereby, the holding plate 835 covers the six pinion gears 832 and the large-diameter gear portion 831a from behind, and is fixed to the tip of the pinion support shaft 830 while inserting the small-diameter gear portion 831b. As a result, the central gear member 831 is rotatably held around the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotary base 823 .

The small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831 is meshed with the pinion gear 821b of the drive motor 821 for the upper rotating body. As a result, the rotation of the upper rotor drive motor 821 is transmitted to the central gear member 831 .

In other words, the pinion gear 821b, the central gear member 831, the pinion gear 832, etc. transmit the power of the upper rotor driving motor 821 to the upper rotor 820 to slide the movable piece 825 and rotate the rotary base 823. A main power transmission mechanism is configured to drive in the following manner.

Furthermore, a second driving gear 841 is attached and fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotary base plate 823 . As shown in FIG. 105, the second drive gear 841 is meshed with the second transmission gear 842 . The second transmission gear 842 is connected to the oil damper 843 . A support member 844 is fitted to the oil damper 843 from behind, and the support member 844 is attached and fixed to the base portion 817 .

As a result, the rotation board 823 is braked so as not to rotate at a low torque of a predetermined level or less. Here, the second driving gear 841, the second transmission gear 842, and the like constitute a regulating power transmission mechanism that transmits the force of the oil damper 843 to the upper rotating body 820 to restrict the operation of the upper rotating body 820. FIG.

The regulating power transmission mechanism is not connected to the main power transmission mechanism, and power is directly transmitted between the upper rotor drive motor 821 and the oil damper 843 without the rotation base plate 823 intervening. is configured so that it is not transmitted.

As can be seen from FIG. 101 and the like, the upper rotating body 820 is formed with a motif of one flower, and each movable piece 825 is formed to imitate one petal.

Each movable piece 825 is made of a translucent transparent resin material. However, on the surface of the general portion of each movable piece 825 (the portion other than the magnifying lens portion 828, which will be described later), fine uneven portions (not shown) are formed. As a result, the general portion of the movable piece 825 diffuses and transmits the light emitted from the display portion (liquid crystal display portion) 42a of the effect display device 42 located behind, and the entire portion uniformly emits surface light. It is difficult to identify the display object (object) displayed on the display unit 42a through the general portion of the movable piece 825. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, a magnifying lens portion 828 is formed on one movable piece 825 among the six movable pieces 825 . Hereinafter, when distinguishing the movable piece 825 having the magnifying lens portion 828 from the other movable pieces 825, it may be referred to as a "specific movable piece 825A". The movable piece 825 and the magnifying lens portion 828 constitute the translucent portion in this embodiment.

The magnifying lens portion 828 of the specific movable piece 825A can magnify and display an object located behind so that the player can visually recognize it. For example, the player can magnify and visually recognize display objects such as characters and characters displayed on the display section 42 a of the effect display device 42 through the magnifying lens section 828 .

A linearly extending rack portion 838 is integrally formed on the rear surface of the movable piece 825 . The rack portion 838 is inserted into the slit 829 of the extension piece 827 of the rotary board 823 . This allows the movable piece 825 to slide along the radial direction of the rotary substrate 823 (extending direction of the extending piece 827). Although not shown, the rack portion 838 or the slit 829 is provided with restricting means for preventing the movable piece 825 from falling off from the rotary substrate 823 .

The rack portion 838 of the movable piece 825 meshes with the pinion gear 832 on the rear surface of the extension piece 827 . As a result, the movable piece 825 is moved along the slit 829 of the extension piece 827, that is, in the radial direction of the rotary base 823 by transmitting the power of the upper rotor drive motor 821 through the main power transmission mechanism. It becomes possible to slide and displace along.

With such a configuration, the upper rotating body 820 is in a diameter-reduced state in which the movable pieces 825 of the six extending pieces 827 arranged radially are each slid to the innermost side in the radial direction during a normal standby state. (See FIGS. 101 and 102).

In the diameter-reduced state of the upper rotating body 820, the base ends of the six movable pieces 825 are in contact with the outer circumference of the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotary base plate 823. are substantially in contact with the proximal side edges of the adjacent movable pieces 825 .

On the other hand, when a predetermined effect is executed, the upper rotating body 820 expands in diameter by simultaneously displacing the movable pieces 825 of the six radially arranged extending pieces 827 radially outward in the radial direction. (See Figures 103 and 104).

A motor control board (motor driver) 845 is mounted on the rear side of the base portion 817 to receive instructions from the sub-controller 262 and control the upper rotor drive motor 821 .

The upper rotor drive motor 821 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by a drive pulse signal applied via a motor control board 845, and the rotation angle changes according to the number of input pulses. That is, by adjusting the driving pulse signal, the rotational displacement amount and the rotational speed of the upper rotating body 820 can be controlled. At the same time, by monitoring the number of input driving pulse signals, the rotational displacement amount of the upper rotating body 820 from the reference position can be grasped.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 105, a position detection sensor 846 is attached to the front surface of the base portion 817 to detect the rotational position of the upper rotating body 820 (rotating base plate 823). In this embodiment, as the position detection sensor 846, a known photosensor in which a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element are spaced apart and opposed to each other is employed.

Correspondingly, a light shielding piece 847 is formed to protrude from the rear side of the rotary substrate 823 (the second drive gear 841 in this embodiment). By detecting the light shielding piece 847 by the position detection sensor 846, it is recognized that the upper rotating body 820 is at the reference position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 101, the reference position is the position where the specific movable piece 825A is arranged on the right side in the horizontal direction when the upper rotating body 820 is viewed from the front.

Although not shown, the base part 817 is provided with an upper accessory control board that receives instructions from the sub-control device 262 and performs monitoring control of the position detection sensor 846 and the like.

Under such a configuration, assuming that the upper rotating body drive motor 821 rotates once with 360 pulses of the excitation signal (drive pulse signal), the angle change (angle change per step) based on the excitation signal of 1 pulse is 1. °. That is, since the timer interrupt is set to 2 msec in this embodiment, it takes 720 msec (=2 msec×360 pulses) at the shortest for one rotation of the upper rotor drive motor 821 .

Furthermore, assuming that the gear ratio (gear ratio) between the pinion gear 821b of the upper rotor drive motor 821 and the small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831 is 1:4, the upper rotor drive motor Under the configuration in which the 821 rotates once with the excitation signal of 360 pulses, the upper rotating body 820 rotates once in 2880 msec (=2 msec×360 pulses×4) at the shortest.

However, the amount of change in angle based on the excitation signal of one pulse, the gear ratio between the pinion gear 821b and the small-diameter gear portion 831b, and the like are not limited to the values exemplified above, and different configurations may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 103 and the like, when the rotation of the upper rotating body 820 is stopped, the six movable pieces 825 are set at six positions in the rotating direction of the upper rotating body 820 (clockwise direction in this embodiment). Predetermined stop positions EA1 to EA6 (specifically, the first stop position EA1 located on the right side of the upper rotating body 820, the second stop position EA2 located on the diagonally lower right side, the third stop position EA2 located on the diagonally lower left side) It is configured to stop at any one of a stop position EA3, a fourth stop position EA4 located on the left side, a fifth stop position EA5 located diagonally above the left, or a sixth stop position EA6 located diagonally above the right. ing.

Here, the operation mode of the upper rotating body 820 configured as described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 101, 102, etc., in a normal state where no character effect is performed, the six movable pieces 825 are positioned at the radially inner slide limit positions of the upper rotor 820, respectively. That is, the upper rotating body 820 is in a state of contracting the diameter the most.

In this state, when the upper rotor drive motor 821 is rotated forward, the central gear member 831 first starts to rotate clockwise in front view via the pinion gear 821b.

At the beginning of the rotation, the braking force of the oil damper 843 is applied to the rotary base 823 via the regulating power transmission mechanism, so the rotary base 823 remains stationary and does not move.

On the other hand, when the central gear member 831 rotates clockwise in a front view, the six pinion gears 832 meshed with the large-diameter gear portion 831a rotate. Power is transmitted to the six movable pieces 825 via the rack portion 838 meshed with each of the pinion gears 832, and the six movable pieces 825 move along the slits 829 of the extension pieces 827. , radially slidably displaced toward the radially outer side of the upper rotating body 820 . That is, the upper rotating body 820 expands in diameter.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 103, 104, etc., when the six movable pieces 825 each reach the radial outer slide limit position of the upper rotor 820 and the upper rotor 820 expands to the maximum diameter, the rotating base plate Rotational power is transmitted to 823 . Then, when the torque exceeds a predetermined level, the rotary board 823 starts to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front.

After that, when the drive motor 821 for the upper rotating body stops, the upper rotating body 820 stops, and the six movable pieces 825 stop at any one of the stop positions EA1 to EA6.

In addition, when the performance of the character is finished and the normal operation is to be performed, the upper rotating body drive motor 821 is first rotated in the reverse direction, and the central gear member 831 is rotated counterclockwise in front view via the pinion gear 821b. Let

Even in this case, at the beginning of the rotation of the central gear member 831, the braking force of the oil damper 843 is applied to the rotating base plate 823 via the regulating power transmission mechanism, so that the rotating base plate 823 stops. It remains stationary, and only the movable piece 825 operates.

As a result, the six pinion gears 832 meshed with the large-diameter gear portion 831a of the central gear member 831 rotate. Power is transmitted to the six movable pieces 825 via the rack portion 838 meshed with each of the pinion gears 832, and the six movable pieces 825 move along the slits 829 of the extension pieces 827. , the upper rotating body 820 is slid radially inward, and the diameter of the upper rotating body 820 is reduced.

After that, when the six movable pieces 825 slide to the radially inner slide limit position of the upper rotor 820, the upper rotor drive motor 821 is stopped. As a result, the upper rotating body 820 returns to its normal diameter-reduced state.

Next, the lower production accessory unit 762 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the lower performance accessory unit 762 is provided on the back side of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47. As shown in FIGS.

The lower performance accessory unit 762 includes a unit base portion 850 arranged to cover the front lower portion of the frame cover 213, and a lower movable accessory 851 provided vertically movable on the back side of the unit base portion 850. , and a vertical driving mechanism 852 for vertically moving the lower movable accessory 851 .

The lower movable accessory 851 includes a slide base portion 853 that is displaceable along the vertical direction, a pair of left and right strut portions 854A and 854B projecting upward from the slide base portion 853, and the strut portions. Lower rotating body drive motors 855A and 855B (see FIG. 107) provided at the upper ends of the drive motors 854A and 854B, respectively; It has lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B and motor control boards (motor drivers) 857A and 857B (see FIG. 107) provided on the rear side of the drive motors 855A and 855B. The lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are rotating bodies for presentation, respectively, and constitute a second rotating body as second rotating means.

As shown in FIG. 106, a left lower rotating body 856A (hereinafter referred to as a "left lower rotating body 856A") is provided with a first information writing portion 856Aa circular in front view at one longitudinal end thereof. A second information writing portion 856Ab having a circular shape when viewed from the front is provided on the other end in the longitudinal direction. The information writing portions 856Aa and 856Ab constitute the operated portion in this embodiment.

Both of the information writing portions 856Aa and 856Ab are made of a translucent material, and can transmit light emitted from the display portion (liquid crystal display portion) 42a of the effect display device 42 positioned behind with a predetermined transmittance. is configured to

In the first information writing portion 856Aa of the present embodiment, “SMALL” is written in clear characters against a background forming portion of a relatively high light transmittance and colorful and transparent (for example, a rainbow pattern) (hereinafter referred to as “SMALL”). Such a description may be referred to as “strong/SMALL” in some cases.) In the second information description portion 856Ab, “SMALL” is described in dull characters against a dark translucent background component having a relatively low light transmittance. (This description may be hereinafter referred to as “weak/SMALL”).

On the other hand, the general portion of the lower left rotating body 856A, excluding both information writing portions 856Aa and 856Ab, is covered with a material that does not have translucency, and is a light shield that does not transmit the light emitted from the display portion 42a of the effect display device 42. Department.

Similarly to the left lower rotating body 856A, the right lower rotating body 856B (hereinafter referred to as the "lower right rotating body 856B") has a circular shape in front view at one end in the longitudinal direction, as shown in FIG. A first information writing portion 856Ba is provided, and a second information writing portion 856Bb having a circular shape when viewed from the front is provided on the other end in the longitudinal direction. The information writing portions 856Ba and 856Bb constitute the operated portion in this embodiment.

Similar to both information writing portions 856Aa and 856Ab related to the lower left rotating body 856A, both information writing portions 856Ba and 856Bb related to the lower right rotating body 856B are made of a material having translucency, and are positioned behind. It is configured to transmit light emitted from a display section (liquid crystal display section) 42a of the display device 42 with a predetermined transmittance.

In the first information writing portion 856Ba of the present embodiment, “BIG” is written in clear letters against a background constituting portion of a relatively high light transmittance and colorful and transparent (for example, a rainbow pattern) (hereinafter referred to as “BIG”). Such a description may be referred to as “strong/BIG” in some cases.) In the second information description portion 856Bb, “BIG” is described in dull characters against a dark translucent background component having a relatively low light transmittance. (Such description may be referred to as “weak/BIG” hereinafter).

On the other hand, the general portion of the lower right rotator 856B, excluding the two information writing portions 856Ba and 856Bb, is covered with a non-translucent material so that the light emitted from the display portion 42a of the effect display device 42 does not pass through. It is a light shielding part.

The lower rotating body drive motors 855A and 855B are stepping motors whose rotation is controlled by drive pulse signals applied thereto, and the amounts of rotation of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are controlled by adjusting the drive pulse signals. can. At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, the amount of rotational displacement of the lower rotors 856A, 856B from the reference position can be grasped.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, position detection sensors 858A and 858B for detecting the rotational positions of the lower rotors 856A and 856B are attached to the lower surfaces of the lower rotor drive motors 855A and 855B. . In this embodiment, as the position detection sensors 858A and 858B, known photosensors in which a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element are spaced apart and opposed to each other are employed.

Correspondingly, light shielding pieces 859A and 859B are formed protruding from the rear side (near the side edges) of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B. When the light shielding pieces 859A and 859B are detected by the position detection sensors 858A and 858B, it is recognized that the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are at the reference positions.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the longitudinal direction of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B is along the vertical direction, and the first information writing portions 856Aa and 856Ba are higher than the second information writing portions 856Ab and 856Bb. is the reference position.

The vertical driving mechanism 852 is composed of a vertical driving motor 860 provided on the unit base portion 850 and a rack portion 861 provided on the right edge portion of the slide base portion 853 . A pinion gear 860a attached and fixed to the rotating shaft of the vertical driving motor 860 is meshed with the rack portion 861 of the slide base portion 853. As shown in FIG.

Although not shown, the unit base portion 850 is formed with a guide groove portion extending in the vertical direction, and the slide base portion 853 is formed with a ridge portion to be assembled with the guide groove portion. This restricts positional deviation in the left-right direction when the slide base portion 853 moves up and down. That is, the guide groove portion and the ridge portion constitute guide means for guiding the lower movable accessory 851 (lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B).

With such a configuration, the vertical drive motor 860 rotates, so that the lower movable accessory 851 can be slidably displaced in the vertical direction.

Normally, most of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B of the lower movable accessory 851 are positioned at the standby position behind the lower side 47b of the center frame 47, and are in a standby state (see FIG. 56) that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. there is Then, the vertical drive motor 860 rotates forward, and the slide base portion 853 slides upward, so that the lower movable accessory 851 moves the entire lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B into the effect display device 42. It is positioned on the front side of the display section 42a and becomes an exposed state (see FIG. 58) that is easily visually recognized by the player.

Further, from this state, the vertical drive motor 860 rotates in the reverse direction, and the slide base portion 853 slides downward, whereby the lower movable accessory 851 returns to the normal standby state.

The vertical drive motor 860 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by an applied drive pulse signal. By adjusting the drive pulse signal, the lower movable accessory 851 (lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) can be moved vertically. You can control the amount. At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, it is possible to grasp the amount of vertical displacement of the lower movable accessory 851 from the reference position.

More specifically, a position detection sensor 863 for detecting the vertical position of the lower movable accessory 851 is attached to the unit base portion 850 . In this embodiment, as the position detection sensor 863, a known photosensor in which a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element are spaced apart and opposed to each other is employed.

Correspondingly, the slide base portion 853 is formed with a light shielding piece 864 projecting from the lower end portion of the rack portion 861 . By detecting the light shielding piece 864 by the position detection sensor 863, it is grasped that the lower movable accessory 851 (slide base portion 853) is at the reference position. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the position where the lower movable accessory 851 is in the standby state is the reference position (standby position).

Here, although illustration is omitted, it is also possible to provide a movement restricting means such as a stopper capable of restricting movement of the lower movable accessory 851 (lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) beyond a predetermined amount.

Although not shown, the unit base portion 850 includes a lower accessory control board that receives instructions from the sub-control device 262 and performs drive control of the vertical drive motor 860 and monitoring control of the position detection sensor 863. are arranged.

With this configuration, in the present embodiment, the positional relationship between the upper rotating body 820 and the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B is maintained while the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are rotating or stopped. However, a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the upper rotating body 820 and at least a portion of the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B do not overlap, and at least a portion of the upper rotating body 820 and the lower left It is configured to change to a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion of the rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B overlaps. As will be described later, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the high support mode continues), the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are in a second positional relationship (closer state) than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. It is configured so that the ratio of

Specifically, when the rotation of the lower left rotating body 856A is stopped, the first information writing portion 856Aa (strong/SMALL) and the second information writing portion 856Ab (weak/SMALL) indicate the rotation direction of the lower left rotating body 856A (this embodiment (Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106, the first stop position EB1 is located above the left lower rotating body 856A, and the first stop position EB1 is located on the right side of the lower left rotating body 856A. 2nd stop position EB2 located on the lower side, 3rd stop position EB3 located on the lower side, or 4th stop position EB4 located on the left side.

Then, the first information writing portion 856Aa (strong/SMALL) or the second information writing portion 856Ab (weak/SMALL) stops at the first stop position EB1, and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the fourth stop. When it stops at the position EA4, the first information writing portion 856Aa (strong/SMALL) or the second information writing portion 856Ab ( Weak/SMALL) is enlarged and displayed so that the player can see it (see FIGS. 110 and 111).

Such a relative positional relationship between the upper rotating body 820 and the lower left rotating body 856A corresponds to the first second positional relationship in this embodiment. Further, the aspect in which the magnifying lens portion 828 enlarges and displays the first information writing portion 856Aa (strong/SMALL) or the second information writing portion 856Ab (weak/SMALL) corresponds to the first aspect of the present embodiment, and is rotated upward. The operation mode of the upper rotating body 820 that stops the specific movable piece 825A of the body 820 at the fourth stop position EA4 corresponds to the first operation mode in this embodiment.

Further, when the right lower rotating body 856B stops rotating, the first information writing portion 856Ba (strong/BIG) and the second information writing portion 856Bb (weak/BIG) indicate the rotation direction of the right lower rotating body 856B (this embodiment Four predetermined stop positions EC1 to EC4 (counterclockwise direction in the form) (specifically, as shown in FIG. 106, the first stop position EC1 located above the lower right rotating body 856B, the left side , the third stop position EC3 located on the lower side, or the fourth stop position EC4 located on the right side.

Then, the first information writing portion 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information writing portion 856Bb (weak/BIG) stops at the first stop position EC1, and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the first stop. When it stops at the position EA1, the first information writing portion 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information writing portion 856Bb ( Weak/BIG) is enlarged and displayed so that the player can see it (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

Such a relative positional relationship between the upper rotating body 820 and the lower right rotating body 856B corresponds to a second second positional relationship in this embodiment. Further, the aspect in which the magnifying lens portion 828 enlarges and displays the first information writing portion 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information writing portion 856Bb (weak/BIG) corresponds to the second aspect of the present embodiment. The operation mode of the upper rotating body 820 that stops the specific movable piece 825A of the body 820 at the first stop position EA1 corresponds to the second operation mode in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, due to various table configurations, the first information writing portion 856Aa (strong/SMALL) or the second information writing portion 856Ab (weak/SMALL) stops at the first stop position EB1, and the upper rotating body When the specific movable piece 825A of 820 stops at the fourth stop position EA4, that is, through the magnifying lens portion 828 of the specific movable piece 825A, the first information writing portion 856Aa stops at the first stop position EB1 (strong/SMALL). Alternatively, the first information description portion 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information description portion 856Bb (weak/BIG) is at the first stop position EC1 than when the second information description portion 856Ab (weak/SMALL) is enlarged and displayed. and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the first stop position EA1, that is, the first moving piece 825A stops at the first stop position EC1 via the magnifying lens portion 828 of the specific movable piece 825A. When the information description portion 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information description portion 856Bb (weak/BIG) is enlarged and displayed, as will be described later, a predetermined advantage advantageous to the player, such as continuation of the high support mode, is displayed. It is configured so that the ratio of being in the state increases. Furthermore, the second advantageous state (high support mode) more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (high support mode “+10 times” continuation) advantageous to the player. It is configured so that the ratio of “continue until next time”) increases.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54, 55 and the like. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, and some of them are arranged so as to be overlapped in the front and back, and a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. and a resin protective cover, etc. are attached. Since the dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally called the back pack, the unit is called "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the rear configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 55 and the like. As described above, the resin frame cover 213 covering the center frame 47 from behind is provided on the rear side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 53) disposed corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30. It protrudes backward. In addition, on the rear side of the frame cover 213, the effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45, and the sub-control device 262 are detachably stacked in the front-rear direction. installed.

The performance display device 42 is housed in a storage box (reference numerals omitted) having an opening for exposing the display portion (liquid crystal screen) of the performance display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is attached to the frame cover 213. It is fixed on the back side. The display control device 45 is housed in a substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the effect display device 42 (storage box). The sub-controller 262 is accommodated in a substrate box 262a and fixed to the rear side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). The board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized. An LED control board or the like for driving the LED or the like built in the center frame 47 is arranged inside the frame cover 213 .

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning ports 33YA, 33YB and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball recovery mechanism for recovering game balls that have moved from the front side to the back side of the game board 30 through different paths such as the above-mentioned various prize winning ports and the out port 36 (not shown). . The game balls collected by this ball collecting mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 which will be described later, and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 .

Also, although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. . This first board relay board relays the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main controller 261, and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 via a cable connector.

On the other hand, the start winning switches 224A and 224B for detecting winning to the starting winning ports 33YA and 33YB are directly connected to the main controller 261 via connector cables without passing through the relay board.

The detection results detected by various winning detection switches are taken into the main controller 261 . Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation of each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls is sent. is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).
Also, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261 . More specifically, a substrate box 263 having a main controller 261 mounted thereon is rotatably pivoted to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and these box base and box cover are connected by a sealing member. The circuit board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, the back pack unit 203 is formed by integrating a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 . The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side (the right side in FIG. 54) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about the opening/closing axis extending along the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external relay terminal plate 240 is provided on the upper left portion of the back pack unit 203 (upper right portion in FIG. 54).

The external relay terminal board 240 is for relaying transmission of various information to a game hall computer or the like, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For the sake of convenience, no reference numerals are attached, but for example, terminals for outputting information about the current game state (jackpot state, high probability mode, etc.), front frame set 14 detected by open detection switches 91 and 92 described later, and inner A terminal for outputting information about the opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information about various error states such as winning error, lower tray full error, no ball error, payout error, and prizes paid out from the payout control device 311 A terminal for outputting information about the number of balls is provided.

However, in the present embodiment, a terminal for outputting information about the "small win" is not provided, and the "small win" occurrence information is not output. In this embodiment, during the "high support mode", "small win" is likely to occur relatively frequently, so every time a "small win" occurs, the occurrence information should not always be output. , can lead to a significant increase in the output signal. Therefore, when such a problem is relatively unlikely to occur, for example, during the "low support mode", it may be configured to output the occurrence information of the "small win".

In addition, the output of the occurrence information of the "JUB jackpot" is, for example, after five "short openings" related to the "JUB jackpot" are completed, that is, after the situation in which the "small hit" cannot be distinguished from the case of the "small hit" is eliminated. At the timing of outputting the opening command (jackpot notification effect), etc., it is preferable to output the "JUB jackpot" when the occurrence of the "JUB jackpot" is confirmed. In a situation where it is not yet possible to distinguish from the case of a ``small win'', if only the occurrence information of a ``JUB jackpot'' is output first, information display devices, etc. installed on the island facilities of the hall corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 , the player may grasp the occurrence of the "JUB jackpot" in advance, and the effect of the "JUB jackpot" may be weakened.

The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and has a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which left and right side surfaces and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213 . However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to cover the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 54) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It will happen.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354 . Namely, above the protective cover portion 354, a tank 355 which opens upward is provided, and the tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages for causing game balls to flow sideways and gently sloping toward the downstream side is connected. A case rail 357 for vertically flowing down is connected. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and payout of the required number of game balls is appropriately performed by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

In the payout mechanism section 352, a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power supply from the outside is installed. there is The power switch board 382 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side (the right side in FIG. 54) of the inner frame 12 and that can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 55, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 serving as a backward guide means into which game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow in, and the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217 is formed. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging game balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed in the . The game ball is a rotating body flowing down the game area. The game ball rotates and flows down while contacting and being affected by the nail 49, the pinwheel 57, etc. in the game area. The game balls that have won the prize-winning openings such as the general prize-winning opening 31 are gathered through the ball recovery mechanism of the back frame set 215 and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 . Incidentally, the out port 36 is similarly connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game balls that do not win in any of the prize winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also possible to

Also, as shown in FIG. 54, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 as payout control means are stacked in front and behind. is detachably attached.

The firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313 a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251 . For the sake of convenience, the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices, but they are actually configured by one substrate (printed circuit board).

Also, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board box 311a housing the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 housing the above-described main control device 261, so that a trace of the opening of the board box 311a remains. It's becoming

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313).

The board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Also, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 projecting outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball clogging occurs in the payout motor, the payout motor is rotated forward or reverse to clear the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 projecting outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and even in the event of a power failure, it can retain the state at the time of the power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. to put in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 . The locking device 600 is provided with a cylinder lock 600a (see FIG. 50, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. A key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and turned to one side to open the lock. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating it in the other direction. In this embodiment, inner frame 12 is locked to outer frame 11 and front frame set 14 is locked to inner frame 12 .

As described above, the right-side frame-constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 54). reference). As a result, it becomes difficult to insert a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 54) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

In addition, in the present embodiment, various conductive members made of a conductive metal material, such as the reinforcing frame of the front frame set 14, the locking device 600, the rail-constituting portions 51 and 52, the left and right frame-constituting portions 11c and 11d, are used. First, various conductive members such as the tank 355, the tank rail 356, and the case rail 357, which are made of a conductive resin material or the like, are electrically connected to a predetermined ground terminal (not shown). Generally, game balls are made of a metal material, the surface of which is polished or plated, and has a luster that reflects light as well as electrical conductivity. Therefore, when the game ball comes into contact with the various conductive members, the static electricity charged on the game ball can be released.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right portion of the front side of the inner frame 12 (the right side of the firing device 60), and FIG. 54, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 54). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection part that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection part faces forward, The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection portion faces rearward. When the detector is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detector is pushed toward the switch body and retracted into the switch body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261 . That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14 and is turned off. It turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is turned off by pressing the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch 92 is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 59 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The main controller 261 (main substrate) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. Also, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be formed into one chip, but may be formed into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like. ) and a backup area 503a.

The RAM 503 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. All data stored in the

The backup area 503a is designed to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned off when the power is turned off due to a power cut or the like. (similarly)) and the values of each register, I/O, etc. are stored. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and conversely, restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is performed when the power is turned on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation; the same applies hereinafter). is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when power is shut off due to power failure. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus, a data bus, and the like. Connected to the input/output port 505 are a RAM erasing switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, normal symbol display device 41, etc., which will be described later. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L, 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. FIG. On the other hand, the effect display device 42 as display means is controlled via the sub-control device 262 . The sub control device 262 constitutes light emission control means in this embodiment.

In addition, although illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes various detection switches such as the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, the start winning unit switches 224A and 224B, the through gate switch 225, Various electric parts such as various substrates are connected. In other words, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data that are executed by the CPU 551, and various control programs that are stored in the ROM 552. It has a RAM 553 which is a memory for temporarily storing data, etc., an input/output port 554, a bus line 555, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown). The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 551 .

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551 , the ROM 552 and the RAM 553 via a bus line 555 and also to the display control device 45 . Furthermore, the input/output port 554 is connected with the speaker SP, the effect button 125, the effect accessory units 761 and 762, various illumination parts and the lamps 102 and 104. FIG.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on commands (for example, variation pattern commands) transmitted from the main control device 261, for example, and causes the effect display device 42 to display. As described above, in this embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main control device 261 are adapted to display whether or not there is a big hit. In the performance display device 42 controlled by , a display is performed in accordance with the display of the special display devices 43L and 43R. In addition, the sub-control device 262 performs drive control of the upper production accessory unit 761 and the lower production accessory unit 762 .

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358 . A CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 storing control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory and the like.

Similar to the RAM 503 of the main controller 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. data is backed up. If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

Backup area 513a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned on again, the stack pointer at the time of power cut, each register, This is an area for storing values such as I/O. Writing to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In the work area, a payout permission flag is set to allow the payout of prize balls by the payout control device 311, a command reception flag is set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and the main control device 261 A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of prize balls, and is turned on when a specific command permitting the payout of prize balls is transmitted from the main controller 261 and the specific command is received. or when it returns to the state before power-off. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initialization process of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a There are three payout return commands sent in the case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. It is turned off when returning to the previous state, and is turned off when the received command is determined by the command determination process.

The command buffer consists of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 .

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the RAM erasing switch circuit 543, the main controller 261, the firing controller 312, the dispensing device 358, and the like.

The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (ball rental unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. and are electrically connected to each other, take in the command of the player's ball lending operation, and output it to the card unit. Note that the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted in a cash machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit.

The shooting control device 312 permits or prohibits shooting of game balls by the shooting device 60, and the shooting device 60 is allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing stop switch for stopping firing is operated. On the condition that the shooting device 60 is not set, the shooting device 60 is driven, and the game ball is shot with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18.例文帳に追加As a result, the player can change the amount of movement and motion mode of the game ball guided to the game area.

The display control device 45 follows the instruction from the sub-control device 262 and executes the variable display of the decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 . The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. and An input/output port 554 of the sub-controller 262 is connected to the input port 527 . Also, the CPU 521 , program ROM 522 , work RAM 523 and VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530 . An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and the effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529. FIG.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command, and controls the VDP 526. (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the effect display device 42 is performed.

A program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and a work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 521. is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the effect display device 42. By rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the effect display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the effect display device 42 .

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 42 . Since the VDP 526 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

In addition, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM deletion switch 323. and

The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating power to each of the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24V power supply supplied from the outside, and generates +12V power supply for driving various switches, motors, etc., +5V power supply for logic, backup power supply for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+12V power source, +5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311 . Similarly, various switches, motors, and the like are supplied with operating power through the control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout controller 311 when the power is shut off due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. A power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. By the output of this power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the power failure processing. configured to maintain value. Therefore, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323 . When the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erasing switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erasing signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (including the power turned on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. be.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 performs lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, a jackpot random number counter CB1 used for a jackpot lottery (win/fail lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, a jackpot type determination counter CB2 used to determine the jackpot type, It is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win state when the performance display device 42 is deviated and fluctuated, and to set the initial values of the ready-to-win selection counter CB3 used for determining the type of ready-to-win to be generated, etc., and the jackpot random number counter CB1. Initial value random number counter CINI, first and second special display devices 43L, 43R (effect display device 42) fluctuation display time determination, fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) in the effect display device 42, etc. The type counters CS1 and CS2 and the normal symbol random number counter CB4 used for the lottery of the normal symbol display device 41 (open lottery for whether or not to open the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower start winning prize port 33YB) are used. there is

Each of the counters CB1, CB2, CB3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and CB4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 has a special fluctuation holding area in which the values of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 are stored, and a normal fluctuation holding area in which the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 is stored. is provided. The normal variable holding area comprises one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area).

In addition, the special variable reservation area includes a first special variable reservation area and a second special variable reservation area each having four reservation areas (first reservation to fourth reservation area), and one execution area.

In each reservation area of the first special variable reservation area, each value of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the upper start winning opening 33YA. Stored sequentially.

In each holding area of the second special variable holding area, each value of the jackpot random number counter CB1, jackpot type determination counter CB2, and reach selection counter CB3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the lower start winning port 33YB. Stored sequentially.

In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the values of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 are stored chronologically according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34.例文帳に追加

By adopting such a configuration, as described above, the variable display on the special display devices 43L, 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times.

To explain each counter in detail, the jackpot random number counter CB1 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 599) as the closing value, 0, which is the lower limit value as the opening value It is configured to return to Normally, when the jackpot random number counter CB1 makes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the jackpot random number counter CB1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter CB1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter CB1 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper starting winning opening 33YA or the lower starting winning opening 33YB, the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer is changed to the first special fluctuation holding area or the second special fluctuation. Stored in the holding area. Therefore, such processing constitutes a part of various lotteries.

The value of the random number that becomes a jackpot is set to two types, a "low probability mode" and a "high probability mode". There are two, and the value is "7, 307", and the number of random number values that will be a big win in the "high probability mode" is 20, and the value is "7 to 16, 307 to 316". That is, in the "low-probability mode", the lottery is won with a probability of 1/300 (a big win state occurs), and in the "high-probability mode", the lottery is won with a probability of 1/30.

In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a success/fail determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 corresponds to a jackpot. In this embodiment, there are two right/wrong determination tables. be.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of the big hit random number counter CB1 is also used when determining the "small hit". There are 50 random number values that are "small hits", and the values are "101 to 125, 401 to 425". That is, the winning lottery is won (a small winning state occurs) with a probability of 1/12.

The jackpot type determination counter CB2 is, for example, incremented by one within the range of 0 to 19, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 19), it returns to 0, which is the lower limit. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination counter CB2 determines the jackpot types, that is, "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variable jackpot B", "4R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot B", and "16R normal jackpot A". , "16R normal jackpot B", "4R normal jackpot A", "4R normal jackpot B" or "JUB jackpot" is determined.

The ROM 502 is provided with a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 corresponds to. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the upper starting winning opening 33YA and when entering the lower starting winning opening 33YB, the sorting of the jackpot types is different. That is, in this embodiment, there are two jackpot type determination tables, the first jackpot type determination table that is considered when the game ball enters the upper start winning opening 33YA, and the game ball enters the lower starting winning opening 33YB. There is a second jackpot type determination table that is taken into consideration when winning a prize.

Specifically, when the game ball wins to the upper start winning opening 33YA, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "0, 1" by referring to the first jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 87) Granting of "16R probability variable jackpot A" is determined.

Also, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "2", the grant of "16R probability variable jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode" is determined, and if it is "3", "30 times/high support The grant of "16R probability variable jackpot B" with mode" is decided, and if it is "4", the grant of "16R probability variable jackpot B" with "40 times / high support mode" is decided, and if it is "5", "50 The grant of “16R probability variable jackpot B” with “times / high support mode” is decided.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "6", the grant of "4R probability variable jackpot A" is determined.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "7", it is determined to give "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "8", "30 times/high support mode". Granting of "4R probability variable jackpot B" with is determined, and if "9", granting of "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode" is determined, and if "10", "50 times/ Giving of “4R probability variable jackpot B” with “high support mode” is determined.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "11", the grant of "16R normal jackpot A" is determined.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "12", it is determined that "16R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode" is given, and if it is "13", "30 times/high support mode" is given. The grant of "16R normal jackpot B" is decided, and if "14", the grant of "16R normal jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode" is decided, and if "15", "50 times/ Giving of “16R normal jackpot B” with “high support mode” is determined.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "16", it is determined to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "17", "30 times/high support mode". The grant of "4R normal jackpot B" is decided, and if it is "18", the grant of "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode" is decided, and if it is "19", "50 times/ Giving of “4R normal jackpot B” with “high support mode” is determined.

That is, when winning the winning lottery triggered by winning the upper starting prize opening 33YA, it becomes "16R probability variable jackpot A" with a probability of 10%, "16R probability variable jackpot B" with a probability of 20%, and 5 ``4R probability variable jackpot A'' with a probability of 20%, ``4R probability variable jackpot B'' with a probability of 20%, ``16R normal jackpot A'' with a probability of 5%, and ``16R normal jackpot B'' with a probability of 20%. , "4R normal jackpot B" with a probability of 20%.

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 33YB, the second jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 88) is taken into consideration, and if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "0 to 9", " Giving of 16R probability variable jackpot A" is determined, and if it is "10, 11", grant of "4R probability variable jackpot A" is determined, and if it is "12, 13", grant of "4R normal jackpot A" is determined. , If it is "14", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "15", "4R normal jackpot B" with "30 times/high support mode" is decided. is determined, and if it is "16", the grant of "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times / high support mode" is determined, and if it is "17", "4R with "50 times / high support mode" If the number is "18, 19", the award of the "JUB jackpot" is determined.

That is, if you win the winning lottery triggered by winning the lower start winning opening 33YB, there is a 50% probability that it will be "16R probability variable jackpot A", and a 10% probability will be "4R probability variable jackpot A". 10% probability of "4R normal jackpot A", 20% probability of "4R normal jackpot B", and 10% probability of "JUB jackpot".

Incidentally, the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper start winning opening 33YA or the lower starting winning opening 33YB, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer is changed to the special variation holding area (first special stored in the variable reservation area or the second special variable reservation area).

Also, the reach selection counter CB3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the ready-to-win selection counter CB3 detects a "front-to-rear out-of-reach ready-to-win" in which the final stop symbol is shifted forward or backward from the ready-to-win symbol after the ready-to-win has occurred, and the final stop after the same to-win occurs. A lottery is drawn for "reach other than front and back out" in which the symbol stops outside the reach symbol and "complete out" in which the reach does not occur. In this embodiment, a reach determination table is stored in the ROM 502 and is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the reach selection counter CB3 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach state and to which reach. is provided. The value of "0 to 238" is stored in the reach determination table. It has a configuration that corresponds to the outside.

The reach selection counter CB3 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the reach selection counter CB3 is stored in the reach selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper starting winning opening 33YA or the lower starting winning opening 33YB, the value of the reach selection counter CB3 stored in the reach selection counter buffer is changed to the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503 (first special fluctuation holding area or second special variable reservation area).

Also, one of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 198), it is the lower limit. It is configured to return to 0, and the other fluctuation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 240, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 240), it returns to 0, which is the lower limit. It has become. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as "first variation type counter" and CS2 as "second variation type counter". This is also shown in FIG. 60 .

For example, in the probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table (see FIG. 90) related to the normal state, the reach type of decorative symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc. and other rough fluctuation modes are determined by the first change type counter CS1. A second variation type counter CS2 determines a more detailed variation mode such as a variation time. Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize diversification of fluctuation patterns. Of course, it is also possible to determine the variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1.

Incidentally, the normal reach pattern is a reach pattern in which no special effect display is performed other than the variation of the decorative pattern. Super ready-to-win is a ready-to-win pattern in which a character or the like is displayed on the performance display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbols during the variable display of the decorative symbols (after establishment of the ready-to-win state), thereby giving the player a sense of anticipation. . Premium reach is a production mode that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs, and during the variable display of decorative patterns (after the reach state is established), characters with patterns different from super reach are displayed in addition to decorative patterns. It is a reach pattern that is performed in a manner that is expected to give the player a sense of expectation.

Further, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative symbols by the effect display device 42.例文帳に追加

Note that the size and range of each counter is merely an example and can be arbitrarily changed. However, it is desirable that the magnitudes of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the reach selection counter CB3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

In addition, the normal symbol random number counter CB4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 9). The random number counter CB4 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 is acquired.

Then, when the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter CB4 is obtained, the normal symbol display device 41 performs variable display for a predetermined period of time, and then the symbol corresponding to winning (“○” in this example) is stopped and displayed. Then, the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower start winning opening 33YB is in an open state for a predetermined time.

In this embodiment, in the "low support mode", two random numbers "0 and 1" are selected. On the other hand, in the "high support mode", the winning random number values are eight "0 to 7". That is, in the "low support mode", the opening and closing accessory 37Y is in the open state with a probability of 1/5, and in the "high support mode", the opening and closing accessory 37Y is in the open state with a probability of 4/5.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to flowcharts. The processing of the CPU 501 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the main processing will be explained.

The NMI interrupt process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power failure is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. FIG.

That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. FIG. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information as power-off occurrence information setting in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed in the payout control device 311, and information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by such NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. to start NMI interrupt processing. The contents are as described above.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example.

In FIG. 63, first, at step SB301, various winning detection switches are read. Here, the states of various winning detection switches (general winning switch 221, count switch 223, starting winning switches 224A and 224B, through gate switch 225) connected to the main controller 261 are read, and the state of the switches is determined. to save the detection information.

At step SB302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the upper limit (599 in this example).

Also, in step SB303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, the ready-to-win selection counter CB3, and the normal symbol random number counter CB4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limit. Then, the updated values of the respective counters CB1, CB2, CB3 and CB4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503. FIG.

After that, in step SB304, the starting winning process associated with winning to the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB is executed, and in step SB305, the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is temporarily terminated.

Here, the starting winning process of step SB304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, the execution area and each reservation area of the special change reservation area include a jackpot random number storage area that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1, a jackpot type random number storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and a reach selection counter CB3. A reach random number storage area for storing the value of is provided.

First, in step SB501, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the lower start prize winning port 33YB based on the detection information of the second start prize winning switch 224B. When an affirmative determination is made in step SB501, in step SB502, the value of the lower hold counter Nb that counts the number of holdings of the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start prize winning opening 33YB is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4 ”). If a negative determination is made in step SB502, the process proceeds to step SB509. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step SB502, the process proceeds to step SB503, and the lower reservation counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the following step SB504, each value of the jackpot random number counter CB1, jackpot type determination counter CB2, and reach selection counter CB3 updated in the random number update process of step SB303, out of the vacant reservation area of the second special fluctuation reservation area Store in the first area. After step SB504, the process proceeds to step SB505.

In step SB505, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special change reservation area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. Details of the big hit determination process will be described later.

In the following step SB506, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot in step SB505, based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the second special change reservation area Then, a second jackpot type determination process for determining the jackpot type is performed.

Here, it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning flag has been set in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before. On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the second special variable reservation area corresponds to "16R probability variable jackpot A" by referring to the second jackpot type determination table. If it was any of the values “0 to 9”, turn on the “16R probability variable jackpot A flag” and the value corresponding to “4R probability variable jackpot A” If it was either “10, 11” , turn on the "4R probability variable jackpot A flag", and if the value is either "12, 13" corresponding to the "4R normal jackpot A", turn on the "4R normal jackpot A flag", If it is one of the values ``14 to 17'' corresponding to the ``4R normal jackpot B'', turn on the ``4R normal jackpot B flag'' and either of the values ``18, 19'' corresponding to the ``JUB jackpot'' If so, the "JUB jackpot flag" is turned on.

In addition, if you win "16R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot A" or "JUB jackpot" here, that is, if "until the next time / high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, after the jackpot For a predetermined period of time (20 times of variable display in this embodiment), an effect lottery for whether or not to perform a non-notification effect that does not notify that the given "high support mode" is "until the next time / high support mode" is performed. It is performed with a lottery probability of about 1/100. Then, when it is determined as a result of the lottery that the non-informative effect is performed, the non-informative effect execution flag is turned on.

In the following step SB507, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot in step SB505, based on the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the second special change reservation area , perform reach determination processing for determining the type of reach. Details of the reach determination process will be described later.

In step SB508, which follows, processing for setting a hold control command is performed. The hold control command is a command for notifying the sub-controller 262 in advance of various hold information (information used to determine the content of the variable display) held and stored in the second special variable hold area. be. The hold control command set in this process is output to the sub-controller 262 in the next external output process (see step SB201). The hold control command includes, for example, hold information such as information indicating the results of the jackpot determination process and jackpot type determination process, and information indicating whether the variable display is triggered by the winning of the start winning port 33YA or 33YB. be

Here, the details of the jackpot determination process in step SB505 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SB5101, the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special change reservation area is either the value "7" or "307" corresponding to the jackpot stored in the first success/failure determination table. Determine whether or not they match. In addition, in FIG. 65, the processing of the step SB5101 is described in a simplified manner for convenience, but in reality, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is "7", and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is "307", and if the determination is affirmative in either of these determinations, the determination is affirmative in the step SB5101, which determination If a negative determination is also made in step SB5101, a negative determination is made in step SB5101.

When the affirmative determination is made in step SB5101, that is, when it is determined that the big win state occurs, after turning on the big win winning flag in step SB5102, the process proceeds to step SB5105. In step SB5102, the function of the main control device 261 that generates a jackpot state corresponding to the first game value (first special game state) causes the first game value giving means (first special game state generation) in this embodiment. means) are configured.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB5101, it is determined in step SB5103 whether or not it is in the "high probability mode" based on the value of the lottery mode flag, which will be described later.

If the affirmative determination is made in step SB5103, that is, if it is in the "high probability mode", in step SB5104, the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special change reservation area is the second propriety determination It is determined whether the values corresponding to the jackpots stored in the table are any of "8 to 16, 308 to 316" excluding "7" and "307". Incidentally, in the determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 and each value corresponding to the jackpot match as described above.

If an affirmative determination is made at step SB5104, that is, if it is determined that a big win state occurs during the "high probability mode", the big win winning flag is turned on at step SB5102, and then this processing ends.

The determination processing in steps SB5101 and SB5104 constitutes the first lottery in this embodiment, and the function of the main controller 261 that executes this constitutes the first lottery means.

If a negative determination is made in step SB5103 or step SB5104, that is, if it is not a "jackpot", the process proceeds to step SB5105.

Also, in step SB5105, the value of the big hit random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special change reservation area determines whether it matches the value "101 to 125, 401 to 425" corresponding to the small hit. .

When the affirmative determination is made in step SB5105, that is, when it is determined that a small hit state occurs, after turning on the small hit winning flag in step SB5106, this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB5105, this processing ends.

The determination processing of step SB5105 constitutes the second lottery in this embodiment, and the function of the main controller 261 for executing this constitutes the second lottery means. In addition, in step SB5106, the function of the main controller 261 that generates a small win state corresponding to the second game value (second special game state) is the second game value imparting means (second special game state) in this embodiment. game state generating means) is configured.

Next, the reach determination processing in step SB507 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SB5301, it is determined whether or not the winning flag (big winning winning flag or small winning winning flag) has been set in the previous big winning determination process. When the affirmative determination is made in step SB5301, that is, when the big hit state or the small hit state occurs, this processing is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step SB5301, that is, if the hit state does not occur, in step SB5302, the reach determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the second special change reservation area matches one of the values "0, 1" corresponding to the "outside reach". If the determination in step SB5302 is affirmative, in step SB5303, the front-rear deviating flag indicating the occurrence of front-rear deviating reach is turned on, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB5302, in step SB5304, the reach determination table is considered, and the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the second special change reservation area is "reach other than front and rear deviation" It is determined whether it matches any of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to . If the determination in step SB5304 is affirmative, the process ends after turning on the flag other than front-rear deviation in step SB5305.

If a negative determination is made in step SB5304, that is, if the result is "completely out of line", this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 64, after the processing of step SB508, or when a negative determination is made in step SB501, in step SB509, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the upper start winning opening 33YA. The determination is made based on the detection information of the switch 224A. If a negative determination is made in step SB509, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, in step SB510, the value of the upper suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions of the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33YA is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4 ”). If a negative determination is made at step SB510, this process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step SB510, the process proceeds to step SB511, and the upper reservation counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step SB512, the values of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 are stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas of the first special change reservation area. After step SB512, the process proceeds to step SB513.

In step SB513, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the first special change reservation area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. The big win determination process in step SB513 is the same as the big win determination process in step SB505 except for the small win determination, and the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the winning to the upper start winning opening 33YA. , and detailed description thereof is omitted for the sake of convenience.

In the subsequent step SB514, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot in step SB513, based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the first special change reservation area Then, a first jackpot type determination process for determining the jackpot type is performed.

Here, it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning flag has been set in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the first special variable reservation area corresponds to "16R probability variable jackpot A" by referring to the first jackpot type determination table. If it was either of the values “0, 1”, turn on the “16R probability variable jackpot A flag”, and the value corresponding to “16R probability variable jackpot B” “2 to 5” If it was either turns on the "16R probability variable jackpot B flag", and if the value corresponding to "4R probability variable jackpot A" is "6", turns on the "4R probability variable jackpot A flag" and corresponds to "4R probability variable jackpot B" If it is one of the values ``7 to 10'', turn on the ``4R probability variable jackpot B flag'', and if the value ``11'' corresponding to the ``16R normal jackpot A'' is ``16R normal jackpot A flag" is turned on, and if it is one of the values "12 to 15" corresponding to "16R normal jackpot B", turn on "16R normal jackpot B flag" and correspond to "4R normal jackpot B" If it is one of the values ``16 to 19'', turn on the ``4R normal jackpot B flag''.

It should be noted that here, if "16R probability variable jackpot A" or "4R probability variable jackpot A" is won, that is, if "until the next time, high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, the above non-notification as in step SB506 A performance lottery is performed to decide whether or not to perform a performance. Then, when it is determined as a result of the lottery that the non-informative effect is performed, the non-informative effect execution flag is turned on.

In the following step SB515, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot in step SB513, based on the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the first special change reservation area , perform reach determination processing for determining the type of reach. It should be noted that the reach determination process of step SB515 is the same as the reach determination process of step SB507, and differs in that the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the ball to the upper start winning opening 33YA. For the sake of convenience, detailed description is omitted.

In step SB516, which follows, processing for setting a hold control command is performed. After that, this process is terminated. It should be noted that the process of setting the hold control command in step SB516 is the same as the process of setting the hold control command in step SB508, and the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the ball to the upper start winning opening 33YA. , and detailed description thereof is omitted for the sake of convenience.

Next, the through gate passage processing of step SB305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

At step SB601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step SB601, the processing ends. On the other hand, when the determination is affirmative at step SB601, ie, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, at step SB602, the number of suspensions of variable display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is counted. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB602, that is, if the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed, and the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step SB603 and the normal reservation counter Increment Nc by one.

In addition, in the following step SB604, a random number relating to whether or not it is correct is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 updated in the random number update process of step SB303 is stored in the first area of the free storage areas of the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM503. After that, the through gate passage processing ends. Therefore, the process of step SB604 constitutes a part of the third lottery.

Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step SB101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable, for example, 1 Executes wait processing for about a second. In the following step SB102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501 . That is, in step SB103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON). do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the next step SB104 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if it is not set, backup data is not stored, so in this case also, the process proceeds to step SB112. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step SB105, and in subsequent step SB106, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure, the backed-up data is destroyed, and in this case also the process proceeds to step SB112.

In the process of step SB112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262 and the payout control device 311, etc., which are sub-side control devices. In addition, the sub-control device 262 that has received the initialization command executes its own initialization processing as described later, and sets the game state determination value Xj corresponding to the initial setting “normal state” to “0”. Store in the state storage area.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step SB113, etc.). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 503 . Instead of using this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step SB113, etc.). Also, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step SB113, etc.) is similarly performed. That is, in step SB113, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in subsequent step SB114, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. After that, at step SB115, the interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step SB103: NO), the condition is that power failure occurrence information is set and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the power recovery process (power recovery process) is executed. That is, at step SB107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and at step SB108, power-off occurrence information is cleared.

At step SB109, a game state check process for grasping the game state at the time of power failure stored in the RAM 503 is executed.

In the subsequent step SB110, a return command is transmitted to return the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc., to the game state at the time of power interruption. The return command transmitted to the sub-control device 262 includes information (a game state determination value Xj to be described later) relating to the game state at the time of power failure specified in the game state check process.

At step SB111, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. FIG. After that, at step SB115, the interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

Here, the game state check processing of step SB109 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the game state check process, and FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between a lottery mode flag, a support mode flag, a game state specifying counter Kj and a game state determination value Xj, which will be described later. The game state check process is also executed in the later-described variable display setting process (step SB807) and winning end setting process (step SB1216).

As shown in FIG. 68, at step SB1901, a process of reading various information related to the game state at the time of power failure, backed up in the RAM 503, is executed. Specifically, the value of the lottery mode flag, the value of the support mode flag, and the value of the game state identification counter Kj are read from the RAM 503, respectively.

The lottery mode flag is state determination information for determining whether the lottery mode is the "low probability mode" or the "high probability mode". "50 (H)" is set in the case of "high probability mode", and "53 (H)" is set in the case of "high probability mode". The upper 4-bit value "5" in the lottery mode flag is uniformly added for noise countermeasures, and is not used for determining the game state.

The support mode flag is state determination information for determining what kind of state the winning support mode is in. The flag value is "A0 ( H)” is set. The upper 4-bit value "A" in the support mode flag is uniformly added for noise countermeasures, and is not used for determining the game state.

In addition, when the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode", the flag value is "A1(H)" is set.

Further, when the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S", "A2(H)" is set as the flag value, and when it is "until the next time/high support mode", the flag value is set to "A3(H)" is set.

The game state identification counter Kj is state determination information for counting the number of times the variable display is executed after the end of the big win and specifying the timing of switching the game state. is subtracted by 1 each time is performed. For example, as will be described later, "50" is set as the initial value of the game state specifying counter Kj, and if the value of the counter Kj is "31" after that, the variation display at that time is, after the big win, It can be identified as the 20th variable display.

In this embodiment, when "16R probability variable jackpot B", "4R probability variable jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot B" or "4R normal jackpot B" is won, that is, after the jackpot ends "20 times/high support mode", When "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode" is given, "50" is set as an initial value.

In addition, when "16R normal jackpot A" or "4R normal jackpot A" is won, that is, when "30 times/high support mode S" is given after the jackpot ends, "30" is set as the initial value. be.

Also, if you win the "16R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot A" or "JUB jackpot", that is, if "until the next time / high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, the initial value is "0 ” is set. However, when the non-informative effect execution flag is turned on and the non-informative effect is executed, "30" is set as the initial value. The non-notification effect execution flag is turned off after setting the initial value.

Returning to the description of FIG. 68, at step SB1902, the value of the lottery mode flag read at step SB1901 and the value of the support mode flag are added.

In the following step SB1903, the addition value calculated in step SB1902 and a predetermined mask value ("07(H)" in this embodiment) are ANDed, and the lower 3-bit data is extracted. It is set in the area as the gaming state determination value Xj.

At step SB1904, it is determined whether or not the gaming state determination value Xj is "1". That is, the lottery mode is "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode". mode” is determined.

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step SB1905 to determine whether or not the gaming state determination value Xj is "4". That is, the lottery mode is "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode". mode” is determined.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1904 or step SB1905, the process proceeds to step SB1909. On the other hand, if the determination in step SB1905 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1906.

At step SB1906, it is determined whether or not the gaming state determination value Xj is "2". That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "30 times/high support mode S".

If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SB1907 to determine whether or not the gaming state determination value Xj is "5". That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "30 times/high support mode S".

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1906 or SB1907, the process proceeds to step SB1912. On the other hand, if the determination in step SB1907 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1908.

At step SB1908, it is determined whether or not the gaming state determination value Xj is "6". That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "until next time/high support mode".

If an affirmative determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SB1914. On the other hand, if the determination is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1916, stores the value "6" of the gaming state determination value Xj in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and terminates this processing.

Now, in step SB1909 to which an affirmative determination is made in step SB1904 or step SB1905, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state specifying counter Kj is "31". That is, it is determined whether or not the variation display after the end of the jackpot is the 20th time. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SB1913, and if the determination is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1910.

At step SB1910, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "21". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display after the end of the jackpot is the 30th time. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SB1913, and if the determination is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1911.

At step SB1911, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "11". That is, it is determined whether or not the variation display after the end of the jackpot is the 40th time. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SB1913, and if the determination is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1912.

At step SB1912, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "1". That is, it is determined whether it is the “50th time (in the case of the initial value “50”)” or the “30th time (in the case of the initial value “30”)”.

If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SB1916, and the game state determination value Xj (“1”, “4”, “2” or “5”) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and this End the process.

On the other hand, if the determination at step SB1912 is affirmative, that is, if the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "1", the process proceeds to step SB1913, and the value of the game state determination value Xj is changed to "7". . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SB1916, stores the value "7" of the game state determination value Xj in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and ends this process.

Now, in step SB1914 to which an affirmative determination is made in step SB1908, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state specifying counter Kj is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the winning support mode is the "until next time/high support mode" in which the non-notification effect is not performed. If an affirmative determination is made here, the value "6" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made at step SB1914, that is, if it is the "until next time/high support mode" in which the non-notification effect is performed, the process proceeds to step SB1915, and the game state determination value Xj is set to "5". change to Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SB1916, stores the value "5" of the gaming state determination value Xj in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and terminates this process. As a result, even in the state of "until the next time, high support mode", the lottery mode is "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is "30 times" for a predetermined number of times (20 times in this embodiment).・The same effect as in the state of "high support mode S" will be performed.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The main processing of the game is executed in this normal processing. As an overview, the processing of steps SB201 to SB210 is executed as periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps SB211 and SB212 is executed during the remaining time.

First, in step SB201, a control signal based on the control contents of the special display devices 43L, 43R and the opening and closing accessory 37Y updated in the previous process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as commands are sent to each of the sub-sides. Execute external output processing such as sending to the control device. Some more detailed examples are given below.

For example, based on the detection information of the various detection switches, it is determined whether or not game balls have entered various prize-winning ports such as the general prize-winning port 31. If there is a prize, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize is determined A payout command is transmitted to the payout control device 311 .

Also, when a command or the like for blinking the error display lamp 104 is set, the command is output to the sub-controller 262 .

In addition, in the external output process, information for grasping the game state is externally output to the hall computer of the game hall by taking into consideration various information such as the lottery mode flag and the jackpot medium flag to be described later. Furthermore, the output of error information and the like to the hall computer is also executed in this output process.

For example, when a prize winning error is detected, an ON signal (pulse signal) is output to the hall computer of the game hall via a predetermined terminal of the external relay terminal board 240, and if there is no prize winning error, an ON signal (pulse signal) is output. A signal is output.

In addition, when the effect display device 42 performs a variable display of decorative patterns, a variable pattern command, a pattern command, and the like are transmitted to the sub-control device 262 . On the other hand, the sub-control device 262, which has input a variation pattern command, a pattern command, etc., determines the variation mode of the effect display device 42 based on such various commands, and displays the variation mode on the effect display device 42 (variation display) is issued to the display control device 45.

At step SB202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach the upper limit values (198 and 240 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. do. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503. FIG.

In the subsequent step SB203, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, at step SB204, the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

After that, in step SB205, the first display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are set as to what kind of control is to be performed in the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and the judgment of the big hit and the decoration pattern in the effect display device 42 are performed. setting of the fluctuation pattern of . Details of the first display control process will be described later.

At step SB206, a variable winning device control process is executed. In this processing, setting of the control content of the variable winning device 32 is performed as to what kind of control is performed in the variable winning device 32 . As a result, when a big win state or a small win state occurs, the opening/closing process of the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. The details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

At step SB207, a second display control process is executed. In this processing, the setting of the control contents of the normal design display device 41 and the like are performed as to what kind of control is performed in the normal design display device 41 . The details of this second display control process will be described later.

At step SB208, an open/close accessory control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the opening/closing role 37Y are set as to what kind of control is performed in the opening/closing role 37Y. The details of this opening/closing accessory control process will be described later.

After that, in step SB209, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if power failure occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step SB210, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has come, that is, a predetermined time (in the present embodiment) from the start of the previous normal process. Then, it is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step SB201, and the processes after step SB201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. Repeat execution (step SB211, step SB212).

That is, at step SB211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the upper limit (599 in this example).

Also, in step SB212, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step SB202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limits (198 and 240 in this example). Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps SB201 to SB209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter CB1) can be randomly updated and similarly fluctuated. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be randomly updated.

Now, if power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step SB209: YES), it means that the power has been shut down. will be In the power failure process, first, in step SB213, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step SB214, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area. memorize to After that, in step SB216, a power cutoff notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (payout control device 311, etc.). Then, in step SB217, the RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 503 . After that, RAM access is prohibited at step SB218, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

It should be noted that the process of step SB209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state changes performed at steps SB201 to SB208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes at steps SB211 and SB212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at different times. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, since information on occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is less than when each processing is in progress. and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before data is stored (step SB213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, so that the state before the power cut-off can be reliably stored. .

Next, the first display control processing of step SB205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 70, in step SB801, with reference to various hit medium flags (big hit medium flag and small hit medium flag) described later in detail, it is currently hitting (during the big hit state or small hit state) Whether or not judge. The winning state (big win state and small winning state) includes the middle of the winning state and a predetermined time after the winning state ends. Here, the predetermined time after the end of the winning state is the time from the end of the winning state to the start of the normal game (variation display on the special display devices 43L and 43R). At 42, the end of the winning state, various game states given after winning, and various modes are displayed. In addition, the period from when the variable display is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to winning on the special display devices 43L, 43R and the effect display device 42 until the variable winning device 32 is opened (generally this time zone is The effect display device 42 displays the start of the winning state) is also included in the winning.

If the determination in step SB801 is affirmative, that is, if the hit state is in progress, the process is terminated as it is. By looking at the setting state of the middle flag, it is determined whether or not the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (effect display device 42) is performing a variable display. Specifically, when the first display flag is set (in the ON state), it is considered that the variable display is being performed, and when the first display flag is cleared (in the OFF state), the variable It is considered that the display is stopped, which corresponds to a state in which the display is stopped. Although details will be described later, the flag during the first display is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (see step SB920 and step SB807), It is turned off when the variable display of the second special display devices 43L and 43R is stopped (see step SB814).

Then, if a negative determination is made in step SB802, that is, if it is not in the winning state and not in the variable display, the process proceeds to step SB803, and the variable display (second variable It is determined whether or not the value of the lower suspension counter Nb that counts the number of suspensions displayed) is greater than zero.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB803, that is, if even one second variable display is retained and stored, 1 is subtracted from the lower retention counter Nb in step SB804. Note that, in this embodiment, if the second variable display is reserved and stored as a result of the determination processing in step SB803, the second variable display is executed without executing the first variable display. That is, even if the first variable display is retained and stored earlier than the second variable display, the second variable display is given priority (the first variable display is postponed). ing.

At subsequent step SB805, a process of shifting the data stored in the second special change reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reservation areas of the second special variable reservation area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on. After step SB805, in step SB806, the process of turning on/off the second reservation lamp 46b and the process of causing the change specific lamp 40 to emit red light are performed, and then the process proceeds to step SB807.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step SB803, that is, when no second variable display is stored pending, in step SB808, variable display (first It is determined whether or not an upper suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions for variable display) is greater than 0. If a negative determination is made at step SB808, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step SB808, 1 is subtracted from the upper reservation counter Na in step SB809. At subsequent Step SB810, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special change reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reservation areas of the first special variable reservation area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on. After step SB810, in step SB811, the process of turning on/off the first reservation lamp 46a and the process of making the change specific lamp 40 emit blue light are performed, and then the process proceeds to step SB807. In the present embodiment, there is only one execution area for the special change reservation area, and the data stored in the first special change reservation area and the second special change reservation area are used when performing a change display based on the data. will be shifted to the common execution area.

In step SB807, variable display setting processing is performed. Details of the variable display setting process will now be described with reference to FIG.

First, at step SB900, a game state check process is executed. Since the game state check process is the same as the game state check process (see FIG. 68) in step SB109, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Subsequently, in step SB901, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to a small hit by determining whether or not the small hit winning flag is ON.

Here, when it is determined that it corresponds to a small hit, the process proceeds to step SB910. On the other hand, if it is determined that the win is not a small hit, the process proceeds to step SB902.

At step SB902, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to a big win by determining whether or not the big win winning flag is ON.

Here, when it is determined that the game corresponds to a big hit, the process proceeds to step SB903. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is neither a big win nor a small win, that is, if it is a loss, the process moves to step SB912.

In step SB903, any of the various probability variable jackpot flags ("16R probability variable jackpot A flag", "16R probability variable jackpot B flag", "4R probability variable jackpot A flag", "4R probability variable jackpot B flag") is on By determining whether or not, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to the "probability variable jackpot".

If the affirmative determination is made in step SB903, that is, in the case of "probability variation jackpot", the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table corresponding to "probability variation jackpot" in step SB904, and set to the variation pattern command. . Subsequently, in step SB905, the symbol table corresponding to the "probability variation jackpot" is considered to determine the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, whether it is an odd number symbol or an even number symbol), and the corresponding symbol command (this embodiment Then, set "BZ1" or "BZ2" to be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SB920.

If a negative determination is made in step SB903, the process proceeds to step SB906, and the various normal jackpot flags (“16R normal jackpot A flag”, “16R normal jackpot B flag”, “4R normal jackpot A flag”, “4R normal It is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to the "normal jackpot" by determining whether or not any of the "jackpot B flags") is on. If the determination at step SB906 is affirmative, that is, if it is a "normal jackpot", the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "normal jackpot" at step SB907, and set as a fluctuation pattern command do. Subsequently, in step SB908, the symbol table corresponding to the "normal jackpot" is considered to determine the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, whether it is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol), and the corresponding symbol command (this embodiment Then, set "BZ1" or "BZ2" to be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SB920.

However, in the present embodiment, depending on the type of symbols stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 as described above, it is impossible to determine the game state such as the lottery mode provided after the end of the big win. In other words, if it is a "probability variable jackpot", the "odd number pattern" will be stopped and displayed, and if it is a "normal jackpot", the "even number pattern" will be stopped and displayed. is not clearly associated, but in the present embodiment, according to the above various tables, for example, if it is a "probable variable jackpot", it is easy to stop and display with an "odd number pattern". They are simply divided into tables so that patterns and designs appear at different rates. Therefore, for example, at the time of the big win, regardless of the kind of the big win such as "probable variable big win" or "normal big win", the variation pattern or the stop symbol may be selected based on one big win table.

If a negative determination is made in step SB906, the process proceeds to step SB909, and it is determined whether or not the JUB jackpot flag is on, thereby determining whether the variation display corresponds to the "JUB jackpot". determine whether If the determination in step SB909 is affirmative, that is, if the result is a "JUB jackpot", the process proceeds to step SB910.

In step SB910, a variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table corresponding to the "JUB big win" and the "minor win", and set as a variation pattern command. Thereafter, at Step SB911, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ6" to be described later) corresponding to the chance symbol is set, and the process proceeds to Step SB920.

If a negative determination is made in step SB902, that is, if the vehicle is "out", it is determined in step SB912 whether or not the front-rear deviation flag is ON.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB912, that is, if it is "front-rear out reach", in step SB913 the variation pattern table corresponding to "front-rear out reach" is taken into consideration to determine the variation pattern, and the variation pattern command and turn off the anteroposterior deviation flag. Subsequently, at Step SB914, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ3" to be described later) corresponding to the front and back off symbol is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SB920.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step 912, it is determined in step SB915 whether or not the flag other than front-rear deviation is on. If the affirmative determination is made in the step SB915, that is, if it is "reach other than front and rear deviation", the variation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than front and rear deviation" is taken into consideration in step SB916 to determine the variation pattern, Set it to the fluctuation pattern command and turn off the flag other than the front and back deviation. Subsequently, at step SB917, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ4" to be described later) corresponding to a symbol other than front and rear deviation is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SB920.

Further, if the negative determination is made in step SB915, that is, if it is "completely out", step SB918 considers the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "completely out" to determine the outlier fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern command set to Subsequently, at step SB919, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ5" to be described later) corresponding to the completely missing symbol is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SB920.

Here, for convenience, the variation pattern table and variation pattern commands will be described. In the present embodiment, a variation pattern table corresponding to the above-described "probability variable jackpot" (hereinafter referred to as "probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table"), a variation pattern table corresponding to "normal jackpot", "JUB jackpot" and "small hit" Fluctuation pattern table corresponding to , Fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "Reach off front and back", Variation pattern table corresponding to "Reach other than front and back off", and Variation pattern table corresponding to "Complete off" (hereinafter referred to as when completely off A plurality of variation pattern tables are provided according to the respective game states (values "0" to "7" of the game state determination value Xj).

For example, regarding the probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table, as shown in FIG. 89(a), at "100 address" which is the reference address, the value of the game state determination value Xj corresponds to "0" and "normal state". A probability variable jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table is stored.

Similarly, at "address 101", a probability variable jackpot/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of game state determination value Xj being "1" is stored, and at "address 102", the value of game state determination value Xj is "2". A probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table corresponding to is stored at "103 address", and a probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table corresponding to the game state determination value Xj value of "3" is stored at "104 address" , when the game state determination value Xj corresponds to "4", the variation pattern table is stored, and at "105 address", when the probability variable jackpot corresponds to the game state determination value Xj of "5" A fluctuation pattern table is stored, and at "106 address", a variable jackpot time/variation pattern table corresponding to the value of the game state determination value Xj corresponding to "6" is stored, and at "107 address", the game state determination value Xj is stored. A probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table corresponding to the value "7" is stored.

In addition, as for the completely out of line/fluctuation pattern table, as shown in FIG. 89(b), at "700 address" which is the reference address, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "0" and corresponds to the "normal state". A complete deviation/fluctuation pattern table is stored.

Similarly, at "address 701", a completely out-of-office/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of game state determination value Xj being "1" is stored, and at "address 702", the value of game state determination value Xj is "2". is stored at "address 703", and at "address 704" is stored a change pattern table at "complete failure" corresponding to the gaming state determination value Xj of "3", and at "address 704" , When the game state determination value Xj is completely out of line corresponding to "4" ・The variation pattern table is stored, and at "705 address", when the game state determination value Xj is completely out of line corresponding to "5" A variation pattern table is stored, and at "address 706", a completely out-of-state/variation pattern table corresponding to the game state determination value Xj value of "6" is stored, and at "address 707", the game state determination value Xj A complete deviation/variation pattern table corresponding to the value "7" is stored.

Although not shown, the variation pattern table corresponding to the above-mentioned "normal jackpot", the variation pattern table corresponding to "JUB jackpot" and "small hit", the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "front and back reach", and Regarding the variation pattern table corresponding to "Reach other than front and back failure", the value of the game state determination value Xj "0" ~ A plurality of table groups corresponding to "7" are stored with serial numbers from a predetermined reference address.

Therefore, when determining the variation pattern in step SB904, step SB907, step SB910, step SB913, step SB916, and step SB918, first, based on the game state determination value Xj specified in the game state check process (step SB900) Then, a process of selecting a table corresponding to a predetermined game state (values "0" to "7" of the game state determination value Xj) from among a plurality of table groups is performed. At this time, by adding the value of the game state determination value Xj to the reference address (for example, "100 address" in the case of the probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table), the address where the table to be selected is stored is specified. can do. That is, the game state determination value Xj plays the role of the offset value as it is.

Then, the variation pattern is determined based on the selected variation pattern table (for example, the probability variable jackpot time variation pattern table corresponding to "normal state (Xj = 0)" stored in "100 address": see Fig. 90) and set the corresponding variation pattern command.

The variation pattern command in this embodiment consists of 2 bytes, and the upper 4 bits in the upper byte consist of information specifying the gaming state. In this embodiment, the gaming state determination value Xj is set as it is. In addition, the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are configured by information specifying the jackpot type, etc., and the 8 bits of the lower byte are configured by information specifying the variation pattern (variation time, reach type, etc.).

For example, as can be seen by referring to the variable probability jackpot/variation pattern table for the normal state (Xj=0) [see FIG. "0", which is the value of the gaming state determination value Xj, is set in 4 bits, and "F" indicating "probability variable jackpot" is set in the following 4 bits. Then, a value specifying a variation pattern corresponding to the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 is set to the remaining 8 bits of the lower byte. In the sub-control device 262, the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation mode (effect pattern) of the decorative pattern is stored in a table, and when the variation pattern command is received, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern command is stored. A pattern (effect pattern) becomes executable.

Next, the design command will be described in detail. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol. In this embodiment, there are 6 categories: combination of odd-numbered jackpot symbols, combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols, combination of front and rear missing symbols, combination of symbols other than front and back missing symbols, combination of completely missing symbols, and combination of chance symbols. is specified. These divisions are indicated by, for example, "BZ1", "BZ2", "BZ3", "BZ4", "BZ5", and "BZ6", any one of which is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and the stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 displays the stop symbol corresponding to the symbol command.

The combination of odd-numbered jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, and "BZ1" is set as the symbol command corresponding to the combination of odd-numbered jackpot symbols. be. Then, when the symbol command is set to "BZ1" indicating an odd jackpot symbol, the sub-control device 262 selects one of symbol combinations consisting of double numbers of 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9. One symbol is determined as the stop symbol.

The combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8, and "BZ2" is set as the symbol command corresponding to the combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols. be. Then, when the symbol command is set to "BZ2" indicating an even-numbered jackpot symbol, the sub-control device 262 selects one of symbol combinations consisting of 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 numbers. One symbol is determined as the stop symbol.

The combination of front-rear deviating symbols corresponds to "front-rear deviating reach" in which the final stop symbol deviates from the ready-to-win pattern by one before and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win pattern and stops. "BZ3" is set in the symbol command.

The combination of symbols other than front and back off corresponds to "Reach other than front and back off" in which the final stop symbol stops at a place other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach, and the symbol corresponding to the combination of symbols other than front and back off. "BZ4" is set in the command.

The combination of completely missing symbols corresponds to "completely missing" in which reach does not occur, and "BZ5" is set to the symbol command corresponding to the combination of completely missing symbols.

Also, "BZ6" is set as the symbol command corresponding to the combination of chance symbols. Incidentally, there is only one type of chance symbol, and in this example, as described above, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in each symbol display area are "3", "4", and "1" from the top.

Although details will be described later, when "BZ3" to "BZ5" are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops symbol combinations stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determined as Specifically, when "BZ3" indicating a combination of front and rear deviating symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 that has received the symbol command outputs the front and rear deviating reach symbol buffer stored in the RAM 553. A combination of symbols corresponding to the out-reach is determined as a stop symbol. When "BZ4" indicating a combination of symbols other than front-rear deviance is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols corresponding to reach other than front-rear detachment stored in the reach pattern buffer other than front-rear detachment of RAM 553 is transmitted to the sub-control device. 262 is determined as the stop symbol. When "BZ5" indicating a combination of completely lost symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 uses the combination of symbols corresponding to the completely lost stored in the completely lost symbol buffer of the RAM 553 as a stop symbol. decide.

Also, when "BZ6" is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects a chance symbol as a combination of decorative symbols.

Incidentally, the variation pattern command and the symbol command set as described above are output in the external output process (step SB201) to be described later. Then, the sub-control device 262, which has input these commands, determines the variation mode of the effect display device 42 based on the command, and controls the display so that the variation mode is displayed (variation display) on the effect display device 42. A command is issued to the device 45 .

Now, in step SB920, start setting processing is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R have been met. In this start setting process, a first display flag indicating whether or not the special display devices 43L and 43R are performing variable display is turned on, and a first display timer setting process is performed.

The first display timer is means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. .

The variable display times of the special display devices 43L and 43R in this embodiment are set to values corresponding to the variation patterns of the decorative symbols selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. Based on such setting of the first display timer, when a control signal for starting variable display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output processing of the normal processing, the special display device A variable display is started at 43L and 43R. Then, after step SB920 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 70, if the determination in step SB802 is affirmative, that is, if the variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step SB812 to perform first display timer subtraction processing. Each time this process is performed, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the variable time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the first display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to Step SB813, and it is determined whether or not the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by considering the value of the first display timer after the above subtraction. At this time, an affirmative determination is made in step SB813 when the predetermined fluctuation time has passed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes "0".

If a negative determination is made in step SB813, in step SB817, switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and this process ends. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB813, the first display flag is cleared (turned off) in step SB814, and in step SB815 stop display setting for performing stop display on the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed. .

It should be noted that, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. For example, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "9-" is stopped and displayed (for example, lit for several seconds).

Subsequently, in step SB816, after the fluctuation end time setting process is performed, this process is terminated. Here, the fluctuation end time setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SB1001, it is determined whether or not the stop display corresponds to the big hit or the small hit by considering the big hit winning flag and the small hitting winning flag. Here, when corresponding to a big hit or a small hit, the process moves to step SB1002, and hit setting is performed. Concretely, setting processing such as big hit middle flag, small hit middle flag, first variable flag, first variable timer, opening number counter and prize winning counter Vx is performed. Then, after step SB1002 is finished, the fluctuation end time setting process is finished.

The jackpot flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the jackpot state is in progress. Here, "1" indicating the occurrence of the jackpot state is set (turned on) as a flag value.

The flag during the small hit is state determination information for determining whether or not the state is in the small hit state, and here, as with the flag during the big hit, "1" indicating the occurrence of the small hit state is set as the flag value. (turned on).

The first variable flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in the open state.

The first variable timer is a measuring means for measuring the opening time of the variable prize winning device 32 (time of occurrence of the special prize state), the interval between each special prize state, etc., and is defined from the opening start or end of the opening and closing plate 32a. This is taken into consideration when determining whether or not time has passed. In the win setting process of step SB1002, predetermined values corresponding to various wins are set with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table (see FIG. 91). For example, when the first time is the "long open" like "16R probability variable jackpot A", the first variable timer is set to "7500", and the first time is the "short open" like "JUB jackpot" In this case, "100" is set to the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum opening time (specified time) per opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 32a is set to "30 seconds" or "0.4 seconds".

As shown in FIG. 91, the opening/closing pattern control table contains the number of occurrences of the special prize state (the number of rounds) in each winning state, the opening time of the opening/closing plate 32a in each special prize state (each round), and the interval between each special prize state. Interval time and the like are set in advance.

The number-of-opening counter is used to determine the number of occurrences of the special prize state executed during the big win state or the small win state, that is, the number of execution times of the opening/closing process (“long opening” or “short opening”) of the variable prize winning device 32. state determination information. In the win setting process of step SB1002, an opening/closing pattern control table is taken into account to set initial values corresponding to various wins. For example, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16" indicating 16 times is set, and in the case of "JUB jackpot", the sum of 5 times of "short opening" and 15 times of "long opening" "20" indicating 20 times is set as an initial value.

The winning counter Vx is winning counting means for counting the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 32 . In this embodiment, in the switch reading process (see FIG. 63) of the timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning to the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223, and the winning to the variable winning device 32 is determined. If it is determined that there is, 1 is added to the value of the winning counter Vx.

In addition, in the winning setting process of step SB1002, the opening/closing pattern control table is taken into consideration, and the specified number K1, which is the maximum expected number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 per one opening/closing operation (one special prize state) of the opening/closing plate 32a, is performed. settings. As described above, the specified number K1 is predetermined for each open type (operation mode of the opening/closing member in one opening/closing operation) such as "long opening" or "short opening". For example, the specified number K1 is set to "10" for "long open", and "3" is set for the specified number K1 to be "short open".

In the winning setting process of step SB1002, setting of an opening command for telling the start of a big win or a small win is also performed. However, in the case of a "JUB jackpot", an opening command is set after five "short openings" are completed (such as a special prize state start process in step SB1217, which will be described later). As a result, in the case of a "JUB big win", a big win notification performance or the like is performed after five "short openings" are completed, and so far it is not possible to distinguish it from the case of a small win.

Now, in step SB1001, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is not supported, that is, the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the process moves to step SB1003.

In step SB1003, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the support number counter is "0". The support number counter is a means to measure the duration of the "high support mode" (how many times the variable display), and as described later, after the jackpot ends, the value corresponding to each jackpot is set as the counter value. be.

Here, if the counter value of the support number counter is "0", this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the support number counter is set (when the counter value is other than "0"), it is assumed that the high support mode is being set, and in step SB1004, the value of the support number counter is decremented by 1. . At step SB1004, a process of subtracting 1 from the game state identification counter Kj is also performed. After that, the process moves to step SB1005.

In step SB1005, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the support number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the predetermined number of variation displays after the end of the big win (after the high support mode is given). Here, if the value of the support number counter is "0", the value of the support mode flag is changed to "A0(H)" indicating "low support mode" in step SB1006, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB1005 that the counter value of the support number counter is not "0", this processing ends.

Next, the variable winning device control processing of step SB206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step SB1201, it is determined whether or not the flag during the big hit or the flag during the small hit is on. If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1202, the count value of the first variable timer is decremented by one in subsequent step SB1202.

In subsequent step SB1203, it is determined whether or not the first variable flag is ON. If the determination here is affirmative, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the process proceeds to step SB1204 to determine whether the count value of the first variable timer is "0", that is, if the open/close plate 32a is 1. It is determined whether or not the opening time (specified time "30 seconds" or "0.4 seconds") per opening/closing operation ("long opening" or "short opening") remains.

If a negative determination is made in step SB1204, the process proceeds to step SB1205, and whether or not the value of the winning counter Vx is equal to or greater than the specified number K1, that is, the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 32 in one special prize state It is determined whether or not the number of balls has reached the maximum number of prizes to be won (the specified number of "10" or "3"). If a negative determination is made in step SB1205, that is, if the timing for closing the variable prize winning device 32 (the timing for ending the special prize state) has not yet arrived, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SB1204 or step SB1205 is affirmative, the process advances to step SB1206 to set the first variable timer.

Here, the first variable timer indicates whether a predetermined time has passed since the end of the special prize state (for example, whether a predetermined time has passed since the end of the big win or small win, or whether the next time has passed since the end of the predetermined special prize state). In order to determine whether the interval until the start of the special prize state has elapsed, etc.), the opening/closing pattern control table is taken into consideration, and a predetermined value (for example, a value "750" corresponding to "3 seconds", or "250" corresponding to "1 second") is set.

After that, the process advances to step SB1207 to check whether or not the counter value of the number-of-opening counter is "0", that is, whether or not the number of executions of the prize state ("long opening" or "short opening") has reached a specified number of times. judge.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1207, open end setting processing is performed in step SB1210, and this processing ends. In the end setting process of step SB1210, the first variable flag is turned off and the winning end flag is turned on.

If a negative determination is made in step SB1207, that is, if the number of executions of the special prize state (“long open” or “short open”) has not reached the prescribed number of times, then in step SB1211, special prize transfer processing is performed, and this processing is executed. finish.

In the special prize transfer process of step SB1211, 1 is subtracted from the value of the open number counter, and the first variable flag is turned off. As a result, the opening/closing process is repeated until the number of executions of the special prize state reaches the specified number of times.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB1203, that is, if it is within a predetermined time after the end of the special prize state (within a predetermined time after the end of winning, or during the interval between special prize states), the process proceeds to step SB1212. , determines whether the value of the first variable timer is "0".

If the determination in step SB1212 is affirmative, that is, when the predetermined time has passed since the end of the special prize state, and the timing of moving to the next process (start of the next special prize state, or start of normal game) is reached , to step SB1215. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB1212, this process ends.

In step SB1215, it is determined whether or not to end the big win state or the small win state by referring to the above winning end flag.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SB1215, this process is terminated after a winning end setting process is performed in step SB1216.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB1215, this process ends after the special prize state start process is performed in step SB1217.

In the per end setting process of step SB1216, while turning off the flag during the big hit or the small hit, the switching process of the lottery mode flag, the switching process of the support mode flag, the setting process of the support number counter, the setting process of the game state notification command , setting processing of an ending command that announces the end of a big hit or a small hit, etc. are performed.

In the lottery mode flag switching process, the lottery mode flag switching setting is performed based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, when the "high probability mode" is set after the jackpot ends (various "probability variable jackpot flags" or "JUB jackpot flags" are on), "53 (H)" indicating the occurrence of the "high probability mode" is set as the flag value. On the other hand, when the "low probability mode" is set (various "normal jackpot flags" are on), "50 (H)" indicating the occurrence of the "low probability mode" is set as the flag value.

However, when the small hit winning flag is ON, the switching process of the lottery mode flag is not performed, and the flag value related to the original mode is set as it is. For example, if the "high probability mode" is set before the occurrence of the small hit state (flag value "53 (H)" of the lottery mode flag), the "high probability mode (lottery mode)" A flag value "53 (H)") of the flag is set.

In the support mode flag switching process, the support mode flag switching setting is performed based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, when "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, the flag value "A1 (H)" is set as the flag value, and in the case of "30 times/high support mode S", "A2 (H)" is set as the flag value, and in the case of "until the next time/high support mode" "A3(H)" is set as the flag value.

In the support number counter setting process, the support number counter switching setting is performed based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, if "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, support As the value of the number counter, "20" corresponds to 20 times of variable display, "30" corresponds to 30 times of variable display, "40" corresponds to 40 times of variable display, or "50" corresponds to 50 times of variable display. set. Further, when "30 times/high support mode S" is provided, "30" corresponding to 30 times of variable display is set as the value of the support number counter. When "until next time/high support mode" is given, the value of the support number counter is set to a value that cannot be practically reached (for example, "99999" corresponding to 99999 fluctuation displays).

The game state notification command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the game state set after the end of the jackpot. In setting the command, first, a game state check process is performed. Since the game state check process is the same as the game state check process (see FIG. 68) in step SB109, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The game state notification command includes the game state determination value Xj related to the new game state grasped by the game state check process. As will be described later, the sub-control device 262 that has received this switches the game state (game state determination value Xj) that it has grasped to a new game state (game state determination value Xj). It should be noted that the game state notification command may be omitted, and instead of this, the game state determination value Xj may be included in an ending command or the like for announcing the end of the jackpot state.

It should be noted that the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and various "big hit flags" are turned off after completion of various processes such as the process of switching the lottery mode flag. Also, when the winning setting (step SB1002) is performed in the setting process at the end of fluctuation in FIG. 71, the lottery mode flag is reset once (set to "50 (H)"), A configuration in which the “high-probability mode” is interrupted may be employed.

In the special prize state start processing of step SB1217, the first variable flag is turned on, and the opening time ("7500" or "100") for the next special prize state is set to the first variable by referring to the opening/closing pattern control table. In addition to setting the timer, the stipulated number K1 for the next special prize state is also set. Furthermore, the value of the winning counter Vx is reset to "0".

Various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the external output process of the next normal process based on the on/off state of the first variable flag. When the first variable flag is ON, a control signal for opening the opening/closing plate 32a is output to the variable winning device 32, and the big winning opening is opened. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is off, a control signal for closing the opening/closing plate 32a is output to the variable winning device 32, and the big winning opening is closed.

Next, the second display control processing of step SB207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 74, at step SB2101, the setting state of the second display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display is checked to see whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display. judge. Specifically, when the second display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is in the process of variable display, and when the second display flag is off, the normal symbol display device 41 varies. It is considered that the display is stopped, which corresponds to a state in which the display is stopped.

If the determination in step SB2101 is negative, the process advances to step SB2102 to determine whether or not the value of normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is 0, the process is terminated.

If the variable display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc>0, the process proceeds to step SB2103. At step SB2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. At step SB2104, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal variation reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserve areas of the normal variable reserve area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

Thereafter, in step SB2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the condition for performing variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 has been established. Specifically, the setting process of the second display timer is performed while turning on the second display flag. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation display. be done.

In this embodiment, during the "low support mode", since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 2 seconds, the second display timer is set to "500". . Further, in the "high support mode", since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 0.4 seconds, the second display timer is set to "100".

Based on the setting in the start setting process, in the next normal process external output process, when a control signal to the effect of starting the variable display is output to the normal symbol display device 41, the normal symbol display device 41 fluctuates Display starts. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to light up and display "o" or "x" as a normal symbol. , the display is switched to "○". Then, after step SB2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

Now, when the affirmative determination is made in step SB2101, that is, when the variable display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41, the process proceeds to step SB2106, and the second display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, proceeding to Step SB2107, it is determined whether or not the count value of the second display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. When an affirmative determination is made in step SB2107, the flag during the second display is turned off in step SB2108, and normal symbol stop display setting for performing stop display by the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step SB2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal to the effect that the normal symbol display device 41 performs the stop display is output in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, if the winning pattern is selected, the "O" symbol (the winning symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, it lights up only for several seconds), and if the winning pattern is lost, the "X" symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, as described above, it is determined whether or not winning is based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 stored in the execution area of the normal variation reservation area.

Specifically, among the numerical values 0 to 9 of the normal symbol random number counter CB4, the winning value is two of "0, 1" in "low support mode", and "0 to 7" in "high support mode". 8 pieces.

Subsequently, the flow advances to step SB2110 to perform fluctuation end time setting processing, and terminates this processing. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for opening/closing the opening/closing accessory 37Y is performed. Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on and the open time is set in the second variable timer.

The second variable flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state.

The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed from the start of opening. In this embodiment, the opening time of the opening and closing accessory 37Y differs between the "high support mode" and the "low support mode", and in the "high support mode", the second variable timer is set to "1000". In the "low support mode", "100" is set for the second variable timer.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step SB2107, in step SB2111, switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, and this processing ends. Then, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is "o", the display is switched to "x", and if it is "x", the display is switched to "o". As a result, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

Next, the opening/closing accessory control processing in step SB208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step SB2201, it is determined whether or not the second variable flag indicating whether or not the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state is ON. Here, when it is determined that the second variable flag is not ON (the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the closed state), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step SB2201, that is, if the second variable flag is ON, it is considered that the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state, and the second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step SB2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to Step SB2203, and it is determined whether or not the specified open time has elapsed, taking into consideration the value of the second variable timer after the subtraction. Here, an affirmative determination is made in step SB2203 when the specified opening time has passed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes "0". If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB2203, the process moves to step SB2204, performs end setting processing in step SB2204, and then ends this processing. In the end setting process of step SB2204, a process of turning off the second variable flag is performed.

In addition, based on the ON/OFF state of the second variable flag, various control signals are output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y in the external output process of the next normal process. When the second variable flag is ON, a control signal for opening the movable blade 37Ya is output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in an open state. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a control signal for closing the movable blade 37Ya is output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and the opening/closing accessory 37Y is closed. This makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the lower start winning opening 33YB.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, reception interrupt processing will be described first with reference to FIG. 76, and then main processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing executed by the payout control device 311. FIG. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 . When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby for a while, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513 at step SB3001, and the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is stored at step SB3002. Turns on the command reception flag and terminates this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

In this embodiment, the reception processing of a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is performed by interrupt processing executed when the command is received. In timer interrupt processing, it is checked whether a command has been received before command determination processing (step SB3201) is performed. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if the command has not been received, the process may proceed to the command determination process. In such a case, whether or not the command has been received is checked by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step SB3101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, RAM access is permitted at step SB3103, and an external interrupt vector is set at step SB3104.

After that, in step SB3106, it is determined whether information on the occurrence of power failure is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 or not. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step SB3107, and in subsequent step SB3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of RAM 513 . It is also possible to determine the validity of the backup by checking whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If the power failure occurrence information is not set in step SB3106, or if the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step SB3108, the process proceeds to the initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step SB3115. Transition.

At step SB3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and at step SB3116 the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step SB3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step SB3114 to permit interrupts.

On the other hand, on the condition that power failure occurrence information is set in step SB3106, and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step SB3108, processing at power recovery process). That is, at step SB3109, the stack pointer before the power interruption is restored, at step SB3110, the power interruption occurrence information is cleared, and at step SB3111, the payout permission flag for permitting the payout of prize balls is cleared. At step SB3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and at step SB3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. FIG. Furthermore, in step SB3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step SB3114, in the process of step SB3122, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if information on the occurrence of power failure is set, it means that the power has been shut down, so the processing from step SB3123 onwards is performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. In the power failure process, first, in step SB3123, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, and in the next step SB3124, command determination processing, which will be described later, is executed. After that, in step SB3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area, in step SB3126 the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step SB3127 the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 513a. , and the RAM access is prohibited in step SB3128, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 513 .

In addition, since the processing of step SB3122 confirms the occurrence information of the power failure after the completion of the processing performed when the power is turned on, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is reduced compared to when each processing is in progress. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, the return can be easily performed, and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command is acquired from the main controller 261, and determination processing of the command is performed (step SB3201). This command determination processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. FIG. In the command determination process (steps SB3124, SB3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step SB3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 76).

If it is determined at step SB3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from main controller 261, so this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command reception flag is ON at step SB3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 at step SB3302, and the command reception flag is turned OFF at step SB3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step SB3303, the processing of steps SB3302 to SB3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing of steps SB3304 to SB3306. At step SB3304 it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, at step SB3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, at step SB3306 whether it is a prize ball command No is determined.

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined at step SB3307 whether or not the payout permission flag has already been turned on. Since the controller 261 has instructed the RAM 513 to be initialized, the working area (area) of the RAM 513 other than the stack area is cleared to 0 at step SB3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set at step SB3309. Thereafter, at step SB3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to set the payout permission of prize balls.

As described above, the main controller 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. is performed, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 is initialized due to the timing of initialization being shifted, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Also, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of prize balls can be reliably set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on at step SB3307, this command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. FIG. That is, the process of step SB3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized while the payout permission flag is set. Since the payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, when the payout permission flag is turned on, clearing the work area of the RAM 513 (step SB3308) and setting the initial value of the RAM 513 (step SB3309) may cause problems such as not paying out prize balls remaining. A bad effect occurs and the player loses, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, the loss to the player can be prevented.

Also, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step SB3304: NO, step SB3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power shutdown, In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on at step SB3311. That is, when there is power-off occurrence information and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power-off, payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step SB3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step SB3305: NO, step SB3306: YES), in step SB3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , the payout permission flag is turned on at step SB3311 to allow the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the commands to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the payout of prize balls. . In addition, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so the prize balls can be paid out early for the win. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step SB3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

It should be noted that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step SB3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step SB3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step SB3306: NO), The command determination process is ended without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, returning to the flowchart of FIG. 78, description will be made. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step SB3202 whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is terminated as it is. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main controller 261 .

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB3202, the firing control device 312 is set to permit firing in step SB3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step SB3204. Execute the return operation. By this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated forward and reverse, and the ball clogging is resolved (returned to a normal state). .

After that, in step SB3205, the setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full state canceled state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower tray 15. FIG. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower tray full switch. , execute the setting of the lower tray full state release state. Also, in Step SB3206, the setting of the no-ball-in-tank state (out-of-ball state) or no-ball-in-tank canceled state (with-ball state) is executed according to the change in the state of the ball in the tank. That is, the no-ball-in-tank state is determined by the detection signal of the no-tank-ball switch, the no-ball-in-tank state is set, the no-ball-in-tank state is set, and the no-ball-in-tank state is canceled. Run the settings.

After that, in step SB3207, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a prize ball and rental ball payout control process is executed. Specifically, payout number setting processing is performed at step SB3208, motor control state acquisition processing is performed at step SB3209, and motor drive processing is performed at step SB3210.

At step SB3211, the status return switch 321 is checked, and on the condition that the ball removal is not possible and the ball removal operation is not started, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process. In subsequent Step SB3212, control of vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the balls are clogged. After that, it returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt processing.

Next, normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this normal processing is a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment).

In this normal process, first, at step SB3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 at step SB3902. A command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 .

The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. It is configured to update the Return to Beginning command. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In subsequent Step SB3903, command determination processing is performed. Here, command determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SB4101, the received command is read from the command buffer of RAM553. It is determined in step SB4102 whether or not the command is an initialization command, in step SB4103 it is determined whether or not it is a return command, in step SB4104 it is determined whether or not it is a hold control command, and step SB4110. In step SB4111, it is determined whether or not it is a game state notification command, whether or not it is a variation pattern command is determined, and in step SB4112 it is determined whether or not it is a design command.

If the command sent from the main controller 261 is an initialization command, it means that the initialization of the RAM 553 is instructed by the main controller 261 when the power is turned on. Set the initial value of the RAM 553 . As a result, the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 stores the value “0” of the game state determination value Xj corresponding to the initial setting “normal state”. After that, this process is terminated.

If the command sent from the main controller 261 is a return command (step SB4102: NO, step SB4103: YES), the main controller 261 returns to the state before the power shutdown. At step SB4107, the control device 262 reads the game state determination value Xj (one of "0" to "7") included in the return command, and stores it in the game state information storage area of the RAM553. After that, this process is terminated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a hold control command (step SB4103: NO, step SB4104: YES), in step SB4108, various information included in the hold control command (jackpot determination information and jackpot type information, information indicating whether the variable display is triggered by the winning of the start winning port 33YA or 33YB, etc.) is stored in the sub-variation reservation area, and this processing ends.

The sub-variation reservation area is provided corresponding to the special variation reservation area of main controller 261 . That is, the sub-variation reservation area includes a first sub-variation reservation area corresponding to the upper start winning opening 33YA, a second sub-variation reservation area corresponding to the lower starting opening winning opening 33YB, and one sub execution area. Each of the two sub-variable reservation areas has four reservation areas (reservation first to reservation fourth areas).

In each reservation area, according to the reception history (receiving order) of the reservation control command and the winning history of the game ball included in the reservation control command (whether it is based on the winning of the start winning opening 33YA or 33YB, etc.) Information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, etc.) related to the variable display executed by the effect display device 42 is stored in chronological order. Thereby, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the number of suspensions of the variable display and the contents thereof.

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a game state notification command (step SB4104: NO, step SB4110: YES), at step SB4107, the value of the game state determination value Xj included in the game state notification command ( Any one of "0" to "7") is read out and stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM553. After that, this process is terminated.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a variation pattern command (step SB4110: NO, step SB4111: YES), it is the timing to start the variation display in the effect display device 42, so start setting is performed in step SB4113. process and proceed to step SB4114.

In the start setting process of step SB4113, various settings related to the variable display performed by the effect display device 42 are performed.

In this start setting process, first, as in the case of the special variation reservation area of the main controller 261, the data stored in the sub-variation reservation area is sequentially shifted to the sub-execution area side. Subsequently, the variation time corresponding to the received variation pattern command is set in the variation display timer. The variable display timer is means for measuring the variable time (remaining time of variable display) in the effect display device 42, and is taken into account when determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the start of variable display.

In addition, in the start setting process, a variable display flag is turned on, which is taken into consideration when determining whether or not the effect display device 42 is performing variable display.

In this embodiment, based on the variation pattern information stored in the variation pattern command, the effect pattern related to the variation display of the decorative pattern is selected, and based on the hit type information (including "loss"), stop display after the variation time has elapsed Determine the stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) to be played. Information about the effect pattern and the stop symbol determined here is added to the sub-execution area of the sub-variation reservation area. It should be noted that the correspondence between the variable time information and the performance pattern and the correspondence between the jackpot type information and the stop symbols are stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-controller 262 as a table.

In addition, in the sub-controller 262, similarly to the main controller 261, the variation pattern corresponding to the "probability variable jackpot", the variation pattern corresponding to the "normal jackpot", the variation pattern corresponding to the "JUB jackpot" and the "small hit" , with respect to the variation pattern corresponding to the “outside reach”, the variation pattern corresponding to the “reach other than the outside”, and the variation pattern corresponding to the “complete loss”, the value of the game state determination value Xj is “0” to “ 7”, a plurality of corresponding table groups are stored with serial numbers from a predetermined reference address.

That is, when determining the display mode of the effect display device 42, the sub-control device 262 selects a predetermined game state (game state determination value A table corresponding to the values of Xj (“0” to “7”) is selected. At this time, by adding the value of the gaming state determination value Xj to the reference address, specifying the address where the table to be selected is stored is the same as when selecting the variation pattern table.

If the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a design command (step SB4111: NO, step SB4112: YES), design setting processing is performed in step SB4116, and this processing ends.

In the design setting process of step SB4116, based on the winning type information stored in the reservation area of the sub-variation reservation area, the design stored in the counter buffer (see FIG. 81) of the RAM 553 described later is displayed on the effect display device 42. It is set in the sub-execution area as a stop symbol to be stopped and displayed.

More specifically, when "BZ1" is set in the symbol command, any one of the 1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th and 9th symbol combinations is determined as the stop symbol. On the other hand, when "BZ2" is set in the symbol command, a combination of any of the 0, 2, 4, 6 and 8 symbols is determined as the stop symbol. Further, when "BZ3" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the front-rear out-of-reach ready-to-win symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When "BZ4" is set in the symbol command, a combination of symbols stored in the ready-to-win symbol buffer other than front and rear out is determined as a stop symbol. When "BZ5" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the completely lost symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When "BZ6" is set in the symbol command, a combination of symbols "3", "4" and "1" corresponding to the upper, middle and lower symbol display areas of the effect display device 42 is used as the stop symbol. decide.

Now, in step SB4114, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state determination value Xj included in the variation pattern command and the value of the game state determination value Xj stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 match. Here, if the two values match, the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if both values are different, the state error flag is turned on at step SB4115, and at step SB4117, the game state determination value Xj included in the newly received variation pattern command is regarded as an appropriate value. , the game state determination value Xj is stored in the game state information storage area. After that, this process is terminated. By turning on the status error flag, if the two values are different, the error display lamp 104 or the like informs the difference. Of course, the error notification means is not limited to the error display lamp 104, and the effect display device 42, the speaker SP, or the like may be used for error notification.

In recent years, game machines have a backup function in the main control unit, etc., so even if the power supply is cut off due to a power failure, etc., various data such as the game mode (game state) at that time can be stored. Since it can be held, even if the power is cut off during the high probability mode, the player can resume the game in the high probability mode when the power is restored.

However, if the backup function is used, it becomes possible to set the game machine to the high-probability mode from the start of business in the game hall, which is commonly called "morning". Such acts are performed in order to increase the power of attracting customers at the opening of the game hall, but there is a risk that the gambling spirit of the players will be seen as a prank. Various methods are conceivable as the setting method of the above action, but one example is a method of not resetting the gaming machine whose game mode was the high-probability mode at the end of business on the previous day. Further, as in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine is powered on or the like, in the configuration in which the main control device transmits the information regarding the game mode (game state determination value Xj) to the sub control device by a return command or the like, If the cable connector that connects the main control device and the sub control device is removed when the power is turned on, the sub control device cannot grasp the actual game mode set by the main control device, and the default game mode That is, the control related to the "normal mode" is performed.

In a general game machine, when performing effects on a display effect means such as a liquid crystal display device, the display mode (for example, background color, etc.) is made different between the normal mode and the high-probability mode, so that the player, etc. This makes it easy to grasp the current game mode.

In addition, since the sub-control device that controls the liquid crystal display device and the like generally does not have a backup function, when the power is turned off, control related to the default game mode ("normal mode") will be performed.

Therefore, by using this, it is possible to change the display mode of the liquid crystal display device to that of the normal mode even though the actual game mode set by the main controller is the high probability mode. In that case, the current game mode cannot be easily determined just by looking at the liquid crystal display device, etc., and it becomes substantially difficult to confirm this action by a predetermined investigation or the like.

In particular, in a game machine in which a high-probability mode that is difficult to distinguish from a "normal mode" is set, such as the "variable latent probability state" of the present embodiment, the high-probability mode is activated by the above action. If it is set from time to time, the actual game mode cannot be determined from the display mode of the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the value of the game state determination value Xj included in the variation pattern command and the value of the game state determination value Xj stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 are different. If so, an error notification is given to that effect, and the value of the game state determination value Xj included in the newly received variation pattern command is stored in the game state information storage area. That is, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the appropriate game mode at that time. As a result, even if the action such as "Morning" is performed and the actual game mode set by the main controller 261 is the high probability mode, the presentation mode in the sub-controller 262 is the mode in the normal mode. Even if it is, when the variation pattern command is received, it is notified that the game mode is different, and the effect mode corresponding to the game state determination value Xj included in the variation pattern command is provided. As a result, actions such as "morning" by the game hall can be suppressed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 80, after step SB3903 or if a negative determination is made in step SB3901, the process proceeds to step SB3904 to determine whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has come, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined period of time (1 msec in this example) has passed since. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step SB3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step SB3912.

In step SB3905, various counter update processing is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81, it is used to set the decorative pattern counter CB5 at the time of the big hit, the character effect counter CB8, and the outlier patterns of the upper pattern display area, the middle pattern display area, and the lower pattern display area. The upper, middle, and lower outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are used.

The out-of-symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, numerical values change randomly. The values of these counters are appropriately stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 553 .

The jackpot decoration pattern counter CB5 is for determining a pattern (jackpot pattern) to be stop-displayed on the effect display device 42 when a jackpot ("probability variable jackpot" or "normal jackpot") is won. In this embodiment, 5 odd-numbered symbols and 5 even-numbered symbols are set as the jackpot symbols. Therefore, five counter values (0 to 4) are prepared as the jackpot decoration symbol counter CB5. That is, the jackpot decoration symbol counter CB5 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 4, and returns to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 4). Then, when the symbol command transmitted from the main controller 261 is "BZ1" indicating a combination of odd-numbered jackpot symbols, based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols), for example, the counter value If is 0, it is ``1'', if it is 1, it is ``3'', if it is 2, it is ``5'', if it is 3, it is ``7''. ), and if it is 4, it is "9" (double eyes), and so on.

Further, when the symbol command is "BZ2" indicating a combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols, based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols), for example, if the counter value is 0, "0" (Vertical), if 1, "2" (Vertical), if 2, "4" (Vertical), if 3, "6" (Vertical), if 4, " A combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols is determined in such a manner as "8" (double order of).

The jackpot decoration symbol counter CB5 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step SB3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-controller 262 receives the symbol command as described above. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative pattern counter CB5 is stored in the jackpot decorative pattern counter buffer of the RAM 553, but the counter value is referred to at the timing of receiving the pattern command, etc., instead of being stored in the buffer. can be

The role product effect counter CB8 is for determining whether or not to execute a role product effect (additional effect), which will be described later, and the type thereof. 400 counter values (0 to 399) are prepared for the role product effect counter CB8. That is, the role product effect counter CB8 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 399, and returns to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 399).

The role product effect counter CB8 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step SB3905 and stored in the role product effect counter buffer of the RAM553. Then, it is taken into consideration in the role product effect setting process of step SB3910 to be described later.

The upper, middle, and lower losing pattern counters CL, CM, and CR determine each stop pattern (combination of losing patterns) in the upper, middle, and lower pattern display areas when the jackpot lottery results in "losing". Since one of ten decorative patterns is displayed in each row, ten counter values (0 to 9) are prepared for each row. A stopped pattern in the upper symbol display area is determined by the upper/missing symbol counter CL, a stopped symbol in the middle symbol display area is determined by the middle/missing symbol counter CM, and a stopped symbol in the lower symbol display area is determined by the lower/missing symbol counter CR. is determined.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built into the CPU 551 . That is, when each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit, 10 is subtracted to determine the current value. be. The outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combinations of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR are the front and back off reach symbol buffers of the RAM 553, the front and back non-outlier reach symbol buffers, and the It is stored in any of the complete missing design buffers.

Here, update processing of each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 82, in step SB4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the top/outside symbol counter CL, and in step SB4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the inside/outside symbol counter CM. It should be noted that the upper, middle, and lower outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, when the bottom/outside symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, the determination at step SB4001 is affirmative. Further, when the top/outside symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, the determination at step SB4002 is affirmative. Then, if it is time to update the top/off symbol counter CL (YES at step SB4001), the process proceeds to step SB4003 to update the top/off symbol counter CL. If it is time to update the inside/outside symbol counter CM (YES at step SB4002), the process advances to step SB4004 to update the inside/outside symbol counter CM. Further, if it is time to update the bottom/missing symbol counter CR (NO in both steps SB4001 and SB4002), the process advances to step SB4005 to update the bottom/missing symbol counter CR. In steps SB4003 to SB4005, the outlier pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are updated by adding the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register to the previous counter value and subtracting 10 when the addition result exceeds the upper limit. , the calculation result is used as the current value of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR.

According to the update processing of CL, CM, and CR, the upper, middle, and lower outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update processing, and the updating timing of each counter value overlaps. never. As a result, one set of the lost symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated each time the updating process is executed three times.

After that, in step SB4006, the combination of the updated outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of the ready-to-win symbols (the symbol in the upper symbol display area and the symbol in the lower symbol display area are the same, and the upper and lower symbol display areas The pattern and the pattern in the middle pattern display area are different). It is determined whether or not. If the outlier pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of the front and rear outlier reach (the front and rear outlier pattern) (YES at step SB4007), the process proceeds to step SB4008, and the combination of the outlier pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is determined. It is stored in the front-rear deviating reach pattern buffer of the RAM 553 . When the losing pattern counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of reach (symbols other than front and rear losing) (step SB4007 is NO), the process proceeds to step SB4009, and the losing pattern counters CL, CM, CR at that time. The combination of is stored in the reach pattern buffer of the RAM 553 except for the front and back deviation.

Also, if the combination is other than the ready-to-win pattern (step SB4006 is NO), proceed to step SB4010, determine whether or not the combination of the outlier pattern counters CL, CM, CR is a combination of outlier patterns, If the combination of the outlier pattern (completely outlier pattern) is obtained (YES at step SB4010), the process proceeds to step SB4011, and the combination of the outlier pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the completely outperforming pattern buffer of the RAM 553. do. It should be noted that if both step SB4006 and step SB4010 are NO, the top, middle, and bottom symbols are aligned, that is, it corresponds to a combination of jackpot symbols. This processing ends without storing in the .

In the present embodiment, the chance symbols to be stop-displayed in the case of the "JUB jackpot" have a combination of decorative symbols of one pattern ("3", "4", "1"). There is no need to use counter information for display.

Returning to the description of FIG. 80, at step SB3907, display setting processing for performing various displays on the effect display device 42 is performed. In the display setting process, a variable display setting process for performing variable display of decorative symbols and the like on the effect display device 42, a pending display setting process for performing a pending display, and the like are mainly performed.

First, the variable display setting process will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 84, at step SB4301, it is determined whether or not the effect display device 42 is performing variable display by looking at the setting status of the variable display flag. Specifically, when the variable display flag is set (when it is ON), it is regarded as during variable display, and when the variable display flag is canceled (when it is OFF), the variable display is performed. It is considered to be in a stop display corresponding to a stopped state. Note that the variable display flag is turned on when the variable display of the effect display device 42 is started (step SB4113 start setting processing) as described above, and when the variable display of the effect display device 42 is stopped and displayed (step SB4305) is turned off.

If the determination here is affirmative, that is, if it is at the start of fluctuation or during fluctuation, the process proceeds to step SB4302, and if the determination is negative, this processing ends.

In step SB4302, a change display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the variable time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the variable display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step SB4303, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by considering the value of the fluctuation display timer after the above subtraction. At this time, an affirmative determination is made in step SB4303 when the predetermined fluctuation time has passed, that is, when the value of the fluctuation display timer becomes "0".

When a negative determination is made in step SB4303, in step SB4304, a variable execution process for executing variable display of the effect display device 42 is performed, and this process ends.

In this variation execution process, for example, based on various information stored in the execution area of the sub-variation reservation area of the RAM 553, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and output setting of the command are performed. .

As a result, the display control device 45 performs the drawing process according to the command from the sub-control device 262 and starts the variable display of the pattern on the effect display device 42 . Then, once the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, until the variation time of the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern command elapses (the value of the variation display timer set in the start setting process of step SB4113 is until it becomes "0"), the variable display of the pattern is continued under the cooperation of the sub-controller 262 and the display controller 45. FIG.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB4303, that is, if it is determined that the value of the variable display timer is "0", in step SB4305 stop display setting for performing stop display on effect display device 42 is performed. and terminate this process. In the stop display setting, the variable display flag is cleared (turned off), and a stop command for instructing the display control device 45 to stop the variable display in the effect display device 42 is set.

In addition, in the variation execution process of step SB4304, the effect mode switching setting process for performing the display mode in the effect display device 42 in the mode (performance mode) corresponding to the type of the game state is also performed.

Production mode in the present embodiment, depending on the game state (value of the game state determination value Xj), "normal mode" in which the "high support mode" is not provided, "high support mode" is provided. ``Chance mode'' and ``Until the next time/high support mode'', whose duration is unknown, and ``Gold mode'' that explicitly informs the player set to switch between

More specifically, when the game state determination value Xj stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "0", that is, when the "low probability mode" and the "low support mode" are provided, The effect mode in the effect display device 42 is set to "normal mode" (see FIG. 92).

In addition, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "3", that is, after the "high support mode" for a predetermined period ends, the state in which the "high probability mode" and the "low support mode" are given is a so-called Since it becomes the "latent certainty state", even in such a case, the effect mode in the effect display device 42 is set to the "normal mode" in order to make the state superficially the same as the case of the "normal state".

When the game state determination value Xj stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "1", "2", "4", "5" or "7", that is, "20 times/high support mode" , “30 times, high support mode”, “40 times, high support mode”, “50 times, high support mode”, “30 times, high support mode S”, “until the next time, high support mode” non-notification production Alternatively, during the period of the "continuous support effect" to be described later, the effect mode in the effect display device 42 is set to the "chance mode" (see FIG. 94).

When the value of the game state determination value Xj stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "6", that is, in the state where "until the next time, high support mode" is given (excluding the non-notification effect period) , the effect mode in the effect display device 42 is set to "gold mode" (see FIG. 95).

Next, the pending display setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, in step SB4501, among the sub-fluctuation reservation areas, information (small hit information).

If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the small hit information is not included, normal pending display update processing is performed in step SB4502. As shown in FIG. 92, in the normal reserved display, in the first reserved display region W3a and the second reserved display region W3b, reserved images TA1 to corresponding to four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas) TA4, TB1 to TB4 are displayed. Normally, as each of the holding images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4, a "holding lamp image" imitating a circular holding lamp is displayed.

Then, in the normal pending display update process of step SB4502, display update to increase or decrease the number of pending images TA1 to TA4, TB1 to TB4 displayed in the lighting mode or the extinguished mode according to the increase or decrease of the pending number in the sub-variation pending area processing will be performed.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step SB4501, that is, if the small hit information is included in any of the first to fourth holding areas of the second sub-variation holding area, in step SB4503, the holding display change process and then terminate this process.

By performing the pending display change processing of step SB4503, among the four pending images TB1 to TB4 displayed in the second pending display area W3b, of the pending images TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the pending area containing the small hit information One of them replaces the "holding lamp image" in the normal holding display with the "star image". For example, in the example shown in FIG. 97, the third reserved image TB3 is changed to a "star-shaped image".

Returning to the description of FIG. 80, in the lamp setting process of step SB3908, the lighting pattern of lamps/electrical decorations is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the effect display device .

In the sound setting process of step SB3909, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the effect display device 42. FIG. Also, when a command related to sound such as notification of error occurrence is transmitted from the main controller 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed at step SB3909.

At step SB3910, a role product effect setting process is executed. In the role product performance setting process, various settings regarding the role product performance using the upper performance role product unit 761 and the lower performance role product unit 762 are performed. Note that the character object effect setting process is a process that is performed as an additional effect when a support continuation effect (roulette effect), which will be described later, is performed, and is executed only when the support continuation effect (roulette effect) is executed. processing. Details of the role product effect setting process in step SB3910 will be described later.

At step SB3911, other processing such as control setting of the customer waiting effect (for example, a demo screen display set to be displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed while the variable display of the effect display device 42 is not performed) is performed. .

In step 3912, an external output process is executed to transmit control signals to each device based on the settings in steps SB3905 to SB3911. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the effect display device 42 performs a variable display of decorative symbols. Also, when executing the role product production, it outputs various control signals such as a motor control signal (driving pulse signal) to the production role product units 761, 762 and the like.

After the processing of steps SB3905 to SB3912, which is performed every 1 msec, is executed, or if the determination in step SB3904 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB3913 to determine whether the RAM 553 stores power-off occurrence information. determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261 .

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step SB3914 to determine whether or not the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step SB3901, and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 has been destroyed, the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB3913 that power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step SB3915. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

Next, the display mode and the like on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 will be described together with the flow of the game played by the player.

In the display section 42a of the effect display device 42, in the normal state (when the value of the game state determination value Xj is "0"), a variable display area W1 consisting of upper, middle and lower three pattern display areas is set. (See FIG. 92). In addition, an instruction display area W2 for instructing (recommending) the shooting mode of the game ball to the player is set below the variable display area W1, and the pending number of the variable display is displayed further below it. A reserved display area W3 is set.

The reservation display area W3 is set corresponding to the sub-variation reservation area. That is, the reservation display area W3 is divided into a first reservation display area W3a and a second reservation display area W3b corresponding to the first sub-variation reservation area and the second sub-variation reservation area. The reserved images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) are displayed in the reserved display areas W3a and W3b (see FIG. 92).

The reserved images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 are normally displayed in a light-off state (see the shaded portion) at the normal time (when not on hold), and when the variable display is held in a predetermined reserved area, the Reservation images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the reservation area are switched and displayed in the lighting mode (see the white portion).

In the example shown in FIG. 92, the first reserved image TA1 and the second reserved image TA2 of the first reserved display area W3a are displayed in a lighting mode, and the remaining reserved images TA3, TA4, TB1 to TB4 are displayed in a lighting mode. state is indicated. That is, the variable display is reserved in the first reserved area and the second reserved area of the first sub-variation reserved area, and the number of reservations of the current variable display is "2" related to the upper start winning opening 33YA. It is shown.

In the normal state, the instruction display area W2 displays "←" to encourage the player to shoot a game ball toward the left side area of the variable display unit 35 (this action is hereinafter referred to as "left hitting"). left-handed” is displayed. In accordance with this, the player plays the game by "playing left".

When left-handed, most of the game balls are guided toward the upper start winning opening 33YA located below the variable display device unit 35 by the nail or the like. Among them, how many game balls will enter the upper start winning opening 33YA.

In this embodiment, the through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the lower start winning opening 33YB (opening/closing accessory 37Y) flows down the right side area of the variable display unit 35, that is, the left side area of the variable display unit 35. Since the game ball is placed at a position where it cannot be reached, when the player continues to "hit left", the opening/closing accessory 37Y is not opened, and the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 33YB. never.

In other words, in the normal state, the game is set so that the game can be played with a greater advantage if the game is played with a "left shot".

When the game ball enters the upper start winning opening 33YA, in the variable display area W1 of the effect display device 42, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are variably displayed for each of the symbol display areas. In this embodiment, decorative patterns Z with numbers "1" to "9" are displayed. Various decorative patterns Z are scrolled and variably displayed from right to left with periodicity in ascending or descending numerical order, thereby forming a series of pattern rows.

In this case, in the upper design display area, the various decorative designs Z are displayed in descending order (in decreasing order of attached numbers), and in the middle design display area and the lower design display area, the various decorative designs Z are similarly displayed in ascending order (applied displayed in ascending order). Then, when a predetermined time has passed, the variable display stops in the order of the upper design display area→the lower design display area→the middle design display area, and the decorative design Z is stopped and displayed in each design display area.

When a big winning lottery is won based on the winning of the game ball into the upper start winning opening 33YA, the decoration pattern Z of the big winning combination is stop-displayed on the predetermined big winning line through the ready-to-win state. In the normal state of the present embodiment, the jackpot line is composed of left, middle and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (referred to as 5 lines). Therefore, in the upper, middle, and lower pattern display areas, when three decorative patterns Z of a combination of big wins are stopped and displayed side by side on any one of the five lines, the occurrence of a big win state is determined.

When a jackpot state occurs, the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is opened to allow game balls to enter the jackpot, and a predetermined jackpot effect is displayed on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42. be started. Here, the number of jackpot rounds may be displayed.

However, in this embodiment, since the variable winning device 32 is arranged in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (the position where the game ball flowing down the left side area of the variable display unit 35 cannot reach), If the player continues to "hit left", the variable winning device 32 cannot win the game ball. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 93, when the big win effect is started, an action of the player shooting a game ball toward the right side area of the variable display device unit 35 (this action will be hereinafter referred to as , "Right-handed") is displayed as "Right-handed →". Accordingly, the player performs a jackpot game by switching from ``left hitting'' to ``right hitting'' so that the game ball passes above the variable display device unit 35 and heads toward the right side area of the variable display device unit 35. .

Here, when the game ball is "right-handed", most of the game balls are guided toward the variable winning device 32 by the nail or the like, and win the variable winning device 32.例文帳に追加This allows the player to acquire more game balls.

On the other hand, game balls that do not enter the variable winning device 32 and pass through the variable winning device 32 flow down toward the upper starting winning port 33YA or the lower starting winning port 33YB by the nail or the like.

In addition, in the right side area of the variable display device unit 35, a through gate 34 is provided that triggers the opening of the lower starting prize opening 33YB (opening/closing accessory 37Y) on the way down to the variable prize winning device 32. of game balls pass through the through gate 34 .

Here, when the game ball wins the open lottery that is performed due to passing through the through gate 34, the opening/closing accessory 37Y is opened, and the game ball can enter the lower start winning opening 33YB. It becomes possible.

After the end of the jackpot, during the period when the special display devices 43L and 43R (the performance display device 42) perform the variable display for a predetermined number of times, or until the next jackpot state occurs, the winning support related to the opening/closing accessory 37Y. "High support mode" is given as a mode.

Along with this, in the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42, a predetermined support effect (a "chance mode" effect or a "gold mode" effect) relating to the "high support mode" is performed, and the variable display area W1 is reduced. Is displayed. In the reduced variable display area W1, the upper, middle, and lower pattern display areas are switched to the left, middle, and right pattern display areas, and the number of jackpot lines is one.

Further, during the support effect, a support count display area W4 is set in the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 (see FIGS. 94 and 95). The support number display area W4 displays the number of support that is apparently determined to be given. Therefore, for example, even if the number of support times of "50 times" has been confirmed in the internal lottery, "20 times" is initially displayed for presentation.

More specifically, winning "16R normal jackpot B" or "4R normal jackpot B", "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or When "50 times/high support mode" is provided, that is, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "1", "20 times" is initially displayed in the support times display area W4. Each time the variable display is performed, the value is decremented by one.

Similarly, winning "16R probability variable jackpot B" or "4R probability variable jackpot B", "20 times / high support mode", "30 times / high support mode", "40 times / high support mode" or "50 times When "high support mode" is provided, that is, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "4", "20 times" is initially displayed in the number of times of support display area W4. Each time the variable display is performed, the value is decremented by one.

On the other hand, when "16R normal jackpot A" or "4R normal jackpot A" is won and "30 times/high support mode S" is given, that is, the game state determination value Xj is "2" or "5". (except Xj=“5” in the case of the non-notification effect), “30 times” is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Each time the variable display is performed, the value is decremented by one.

Also, if you win the "16R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot A" or "JUB jackpot" and the "until the next time / high support mode" is given, that is, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is " 6”, “Until the next time” is displayed in the support count display area W4 from the beginning. However, when the non-notification effect is performed, "30 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Each time the variable display is performed, the value is decremented by one.

As described above, while the "high support mode" is provided, the game ball is likely to enter the lower start winning port 33YB. In order to obtain an opportunity to release the object 37Y, it is preferable to continuously perform the “right stroke”. In other words, during the "high support mode", it is set so that the game can be played more advantageously by playing the game with the "right hand". Therefore, in the instruction display area W2 of the effect display device 42 in the "high support mode", "Right Hit" is displayed to recommend "Right Hit" to the player.

In the present embodiment, when the "high support mode" changes in general times (when the number of times display in the support times display area W4 does not become the end value "1 time"), that is, the value of the game state determination value Xj is "1", "2", "4", and "5", the variation time is set to "1 second" by the variation pattern table selected based on each gaming state determination value Xj (at the time of the jackpot except for). Then, in the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 during the support effect, a display effect corresponding to this is determined by the sub-control device 262 and executed.

Also, when the "high support mode" fluctuates for a specific number of times (when the number of times display in the support number display area W4 changes to the end value "1 time", that is, after the jackpot ends, "20th time", "30th time" , "40th time" or "50th time"), that is, when the value of the game state determination value Xj is "7", is selected based on the value "7" of the game state determination value Xj. It is set to "25 seconds" by the fluctuation pattern table (excluding the time of the big hit). Then, in the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 during the support effect, a display effect corresponding to this is determined by the sub-control device 262 and executed.

In the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 at the time of the specific times fluctuation (variation of 25 seconds), there is a continuous support effect that excites the player's interest, such as determining by lottery whether or not the "high support mode" is to be continued. done.

For example, in the present embodiment, a roulette effect is performed as the display effect (support continuation effect) at the time when the specific times change. In the roulette effect, a roulette pattern TR is displayed as shown in FIG. The roulette pattern TR includes "end" indicating that the number of supports ends here, "+10 times" indicating that the number of supports will be added by 10 times, and "next time" indicating that the number of supports will continue until the next big win. "until" is described.

In the roulette effect, the roulette pattern TR rotates and stops at the position indicated by the arrow TY to determine the subsequent game state.

Here, which item to stop is the number of grants of "high support mode" determined at the time of the jackpot lottery ("20 times", "30 times", "40 times", "50 times" or "until the next time ”) and the number of support grants (the value of the support number counter) at that time. Then, the determined item is displayed in the support count display area W4.

For example, if you win "16R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode", and after initially displaying "20 times" in the support count display area W4, the roulette effect is reached, the upper limit is not "until the next time", and the number of times support is left is "30 times", so the item "+10 times" is selected.

Also, for example, if you win the "4R normal jackpot A" with "30 times/high support mode", and after "30 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4, the roulette effect is reached, Since the upper limit is not "until the next time" and there is no remaining number of support grants, the item "end" is selected.

Also, for example, "16R probability variable jackpot A" with "until next time/high support mode" is won, non-notification effect is performed (game state determination value Xj becomes "5"), and support number display area W4 After "30 times" is initially displayed, when the roulette effect is reached, the upper limit is "until the next time", so the item "until the next time" is selected.

Now, when the "high support mode" ends and returns to the "low support mode", the display mode on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the same state as the normal state (see FIG. 92). Therefore, the instruction display area W2 of the display section 42a displays "←left strike".

However, in this embodiment, if a small hit is won during the "high support mode" and the small hit information is stored in one of the reserved areas of the second sub-fluctuation reserved area related to the lower start winning opening 33YB , among the reserved images TB1 to TB4 displayed in the second reserved display area W3b, the display mode of the reserved images TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the reserved area storing the small winning information is an image of a form different from the normal form. changed (see FIG. 97). In the example shown in FIG. 97, the third reserved image TB3 is changed to a "star-shaped image". In the present embodiment, along with this, "Right hit →" is displayed in the instruction display area W2.

Therefore, even when the "high support mode" ends and the "low support mode" is returned to, if the small win information is stored in the holding area, the above display is performed, and the player can receive a small win. It is suggested that it occurs.

As described above, since the opening time of the variable winning device 32 in the small winning state is extremely short, switching from the "left hitting" state to the "right hitting" after the occurrence of the small winning will not be in time, and the variable winning device In order to win the game ball to 32, it is necessary to "right hit" in advance. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the player can grasp that a small win will occur based on the suggestion of the small win, so that the player can prepare in advance and the chances of missing a small win are reduced.

Incidentally, as described above, when the support continuation effect (roulette effect) is performed, there is a case where the accessory effect using the upper effect accessory unit 761 and the lower effect accessory unit 762 is performed as an additional effect. .

Here, the role product effect setting process of step SB3910 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

First, in step SB6001, it is determined whether or not the current variable round is the round for execution of the roulette effect (support continuation effect), taking into account the value of the gaming state determination value Xj.

Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if the roulette effect is not executed, in step SB6002, the value of the effect state flag JF, which will be described later, is reset to "0", and this processing ends.

The effect state flag JF is determination information for determining the effect state of the additional effect (mainly the effect using the effect accessory units 761 and 762).

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6001, that is, if the current variable round is a roulette performance execution round, the process proceeds to step SB6003.

At step SB6003, the value of the effect state flag JF is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not it is currently in the pre-start stage (JF=0) of the additional effect. Here, when a negative determination is made, that is, after the start of the additional effect (JF≧1), the process proceeds to step SB6006.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6003, that is, if the stage is before the start of the additional effect, the process proceeds to step SB6004.

At step SB6004, based on the value of the character product effect counter CB8 stored in the character product effect counter buffer of the RAM 553, effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the character product effect and its type is performed.

The correspondence relationship between the value of the role product effect counter CB8 and whether or not the role product effect is executed and its type is stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262 as a role product effect pattern determination table.

In this embodiment, in the roulette effect of the effect display device 42, a plurality of accessory effect pattern determination tables are set corresponding to the confirmed display item of the roulette pattern TR that finally stops at the position indicated by the arrow TY. .

Specifically, "End" indicates that the support count ends here, "+10 times" indicates that the support count will be added to the next 10 times, and "Until the next time" indicates that the support count will continue until the next jackpot. corresponding to the three fixed display items such as "end" time, character effect pattern determination table, "+10 times" time, character effect pattern determination table, "until next time" time, character effect pattern determination table. There are 3 tables available.

In each table, the rate at which various performance patterns are selected differs depending on whether it corresponds to "end", "+10 times" or "until the next time". Then, if the number of times of support is continued, and if it corresponds to "until the next time", the presence or absence of the execution of the character production, and furthermore the development production pattern described later, than the case of "end" Various tables are configured so that the rate at which the

For example, when the fixed display item in the roulette effect is "end", the "at the time of 'end'/accessory effect pattern determination table" as shown in FIG. 100(a) is referred to. In this case, when the value of the character effect counter CB8 is 0 to 249, "no character effect" is selected and no character effect is performed as an additional effect.

On the other hand, when the value of the character object effect counter CB8 is 250 to 399, "with character effect" is selected, and the character effect is executed as an additional effect. Of these, when CB8=250 to 299, the "non-development pattern" character effect is executed, and when CB8=300 to 329, the "first development pattern" character effect is executed, and CB8= In the case of 330-359, the "second development pattern" performance is executed, in the case of CB8=360-379, the "third development pattern" performance is executed, and in the case of CB8=380-389. If CB8=390 to 399, the "fifth development pattern" character effect is executed. The details of the character object presentations of the first to fifth development patterns will be described later.

In addition, when the fixed display item in the roulette effect is "until the next time", the "until the next time" time/accessory effect pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 100(b) is referred to. In this case, when the value of the character object effect counter CB8 is 0 to 9, "No character effect" is selected, and no character effect is performed as an additional effect.

On the other hand, when the value of the character effect counter CB8 is 10 to 399, "with character effect" is selected, and the character effect is executed as an additional effect. Of these, when CB8=10 to 99, the "non-development pattern" character effect is performed, and when CB8=100 to 199, the "first development pattern" character effect is performed. In the case of 200 to 249, the "second development pattern" performance is executed, in the case of CB8 = 250 to 299, the "third development pattern" performance is executed, and in the case of CB8 = 300 to 349. If CB8=350 to 399, the "fifth development pattern" performance is performed.

It should be noted that the specific contents of the "+10 times" character effect pattern determination table" referred to when the fixed display item in the roulette effect is "+10 times" are not shown in the drawings, but are described above. Tables having contents different from those of the 'end' time/accessory effect pattern determination table' and the 'until the next time' time/accessory effect pattern determination table' are set.

Here, when the above "no character effect" is selected, the value of the character effect pattern flag PF is set to "0". The role product effect pattern flag PF is discrimination information for discriminating the role product effect pattern.

Similarly, when the "no development pattern" character effect is selected, the value of the character effect pattern flag PF is set to "1". When the "first developed pattern" character effect is selected, the value of the character effect pattern flag PF is set to "2". When the "second development pattern" character effect is selected, the value of the character effect pattern flag PF is set to "3". When the "third development pattern" character effect is selected, the value of the character effect pattern flag PF is set to "4". When the "fourth development pattern" character effect is selected, the value of the character effect pattern flag PF is set to "5". When the "fifth development pattern" character effect is selected, the value of the character effect pattern flag PF is set to "6".

Therefore, when performing the effect determination process in step SB6004, the sub-control device 262 first selects a predetermined display item from the plurality of accessory effect pattern determination tables based on the information related to the confirmed display items in the roulette effect. A role product production pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmed display item is selected, and a role product production pattern is determined based on the selected table. At this time, the determined result is stored in a predetermined storage area within the RAM 553 .

After the start request setting process is performed in subsequent step SB6005, this process ends.

In the start request setting process of step SB6005, as the value of the production state flag JF, "1" indicating that it is in the start request period of the character production is set, and the value of the operation valid timer ST is set to a predetermined value (this 5 seconds in the embodiment).

The operation valid timer ST is a timer for measuring the operation valid period of the effect button 125. FIG.

Further, in this start request setting process, the display setting process for performing the start request display effect on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 is performed.

By performing such display setting processing, in addition to the roulette effect, characters such as "press the button" are displayed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42. A display effect prompting an operation is executed.

Now, in step SB6006 to which the negative determination is made in step SB6003, the value of the effect state flag JF is taken into consideration, and whether or not it is currently in the period requesting the start of the character object effect (JF=1) is determined. discriminate. Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if it is not during the period for requesting the start of the performance of the character object (JF≧2), the process proceeds to step SB6012.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6006, that is, if it is currently in the request period for starting the performance of a character, it is determined in step SB6007 whether or not the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0". do.

Here, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0", the player does not press the production button 125 during the start request period of the character production, and the operation valid period has passed, the process moves to step SB6008.

In step SB6008, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the character effect will not progress any further, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB6007, that is, if the value of the operation validity timer ST is not "0", the process proceeds to step SB6009.

In step SB6009, the value of the button operation flag BF is taken into account to determine whether or not the player presses the production button 125 (BF=1) during the start request period of the role product production (during the operation valid period). discriminate.

The button operation flag BF is determination information for determining whether or not the effect button 125 has been pressed during the valid period of operation. , and the value is maintained at "0" while no pressing operation is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step SB6009, that is, if the production button 125 is not pressed, the processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the effect button 125 is pressed, effect pattern setting processing is performed in step SB6010.

In the effect pattern setting process of step SB6010, a value corresponding to the effect pattern selected in the effect determination process of step SB6004 is set as the value of the effect state flag JF.

Specifically, in consideration of the value of the character effect pattern flag PF, when "no character effect" is selected, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "2". On the other hand, when "with character effect (no development pattern, first development pattern, second development pattern, third development pattern, fourth development pattern, or fifth development pattern)" is selected, the performance state flag JF set the value of to "3".

After that, in step SB6011, the value of the button operation flag BF is reset to "0", and this processing ends.

Now, in step SB6012 to which a negative determination is made in step SB6006, the value of the effect state flag JF is considered, and whether or not the effect pattern of the additional effect is "no character effect (JF=2)". determine.

Here, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the effect pattern is "no character effect", notification setting processing is performed in step SB6013.

By performing the notification setting process, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 displays characters such as "Unfortunately it doesn't move", for example, to notify that the character effect will not be performed. executed.

After that, at step SB6014, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the character effect will not progress any further, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB6012, the process proceeds to step SB6015 and determines whether or not the value of the effect state flag JF is "3".

If the affirmative determination is made here, the effect pattern is "with character effect (JF=3)", but it is considered that it is currently in the stage before the start of the character drive effect, and in step SB6016 the upper character is driven. Setting processing is performed, and this processing ends.

In step SB6016, the sub-control device 262 first reads the superior performance control data defining the operation progress process of the superior performance from the ROM 552 and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 553. .

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out a plurality of motion process data included in the superior performance control data in accordance with the timetable, and the motion process data is defined by the motion process data. The operation time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the operation time is managed based on the value of the process timer, and the process corresponding to the operation process data is executed.

The plurality of motion process data include, for example, drive control of the swing drive mechanism 812 (swing motor 815) of the upper performance accessory unit 761 to lower, raise, or stop the upper movable accessory 811. and data defining an operation process such as driving and controlling the upper rotating body drive motor 821 to rotate and stop the upper rotating body 820. .

As a result, in this embodiment, when the effect pattern is "with character effect", the player presses the effect button 125 so that the upper movable accessory 811 first moves to the standby position (upper side of the center frame 47). 47a (back side) to the lower performance position (see FIGS. 56 and 58).

Then, after the upper movable accessory 811 descends to the performance position and stops so as to cover part of the display section 42a of the performance display device 42, the upper rotating body 820 starts rotating. In this embodiment, the upper rotating body 820 is set to rotate clockwise at a constant speed.

At the same time, the roulette pattern TR (see FIG. 96) is displayed in a reduced size on the display section 42a, hidden behind the upper rotating body 820, and difficult for the player to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 108, various display objects are displayed on the display section 42a around the roulette pattern TR along the turning trajectory EF of the magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 108, a plurality of star-shaped luminous points EG are displayed blinking along the turning orbit EF of the magnifying lens portion 828 . As a result, the display object (for example, the star-shaped luminous point EG) located at the position through which the magnifying lens portion 828 passes is enlarged and displayed through the magnifying lens portion 828 and visually recognized by the player. Of course, the display object displayed here is not limited to the star-shaped light emitting point EG illustrated in FIG.

Here, when the upper rotating body 820 starts rotating, a predetermined value based on the above-described various effect patterns (operation process data) is set as the value of the predetermined process timer. Once the upper rotating body 820 starts rotating, it continues rotating until the value of the process timer becomes "0". Note that the subtraction process of the process timer is performed separately in other processes (step SB3911) in the normal process.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the upper rotating body 820 entered the constant-speed rotation state (after a series of rotation start operations are completed), the sub-control device 262 sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "4" is set to indicate that there is, and a predetermined value (5 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the value of the operation validity timer ST.

At the same time, display setting processing for performing the development request display effect on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 is performed.

By performing such a display setting process, in addition to the above-mentioned display objects, characters such as "Please press the button" are displayed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42. A display effect prompting the operation of 125 is executed.

Now, in step SB6017 to which a negative determination was made in step SB6015, the value of the production state flag JF is taken into consideration, and the current production initial state (JF=4 ).

In the present embodiment, the presentation mode in the initial stage of presentation after the execution of the performance of the character is started and before the presentation is developed. It is the same regardless of whether "fourth development pattern" or "fifth development pattern" is set.

Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if it is not the initial state of performance of the character object performance (JF≧5), the process proceeds to step SB6030.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6017, that is, if it is the initial state of the performance of the character object (single rotation state of the upper rotating body 820), then in step SB6018 the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0". determine whether there is

Here, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0", the player does not press the effect button 125 during the initial state of the character object effect, and the operation valid period is Assuming that it has passed, the process moves to step SB6019.

At step SB6019, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the character effect will not progress any further, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB6018, that is, if the value of operation valid timer ST is not "0", the process proceeds to step SB6020.

At step SB6020, the value of the button operation flag BF is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the player presses the production button 125 (BF=1) during the initial state of the role product production (during the operation valid period). do.

If a negative determination is made in step SB6020, that is, if the production button 125 is not pressed, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the effect button 125 is pressed, the value of the character object effect pattern flag PF corresponds to the "no development pattern (lower character object effect pattern)" in step SB6021. It is determined whether or not it is "1".

If the determination here is affirmative, that is, if the effect pattern is a "non-development pattern", a non-development effect setting process is performed at step SB6022.

By performing the non-development effect setting process, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 displays, for example, characters such as "Unexpectedly undeveloped", for example, to notify that the development effect will not be performed. A performance is performed.

After that, at step SB6023, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the character effect will not progress any further, and this processing is terminated.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6021, the process proceeds to step SB6024 to determine whether or not the value of the character product effect pattern flag PF is "2" corresponding to the "first development pattern (non-enlargement stop pattern)". determine whether

If the determination here is affirmative, that is, if the development effect pattern is the "first development pattern", a first development effect setting process is performed in step SB6025, and this process ends.

In the first development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "7", which means that the character object effect has been developed.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads from the ROM 552 the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and the lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) corresponding to the first development pattern. is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553 .

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads a plurality of motion process data included in the first development effect control data according to the timetable, and the motion process data specified by the motion process data The operation time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the operation time is managed based on the value of the process timer, and the process corresponding to the operation process data is executed.

It should be noted that, although the same applies to the following various development effect patterns, the plurality of operation process data may include, for example, drive control of the upper rotating body drive motor 821 to rotate or stop the upper rotating body 820, and the like. Data defining the operation process of , and drive control of the vertical drive mechanism 852 (vertical drive motor 860) of the lower production accessory unit 762 to raise, lower, and stop the lower movable accessory 851. and data defining an operation process such as driving and controlling the lower rotor drive motors 855A and 855B to rotate and stop the lower rotors 856A and 856B. is

That is, the sub-control device 262, based on the first development effect control data, the rotational position information of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) and the process timer , etc., the operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the first development pattern is executed.

It should be noted that the subtraction process of the process timer is performed separately in the other process (step SB3911) in the normal process, although the same applies to the following various development effect patterns. In addition, based on the contents of various setting processes performed in this process, in the next external output process (step 3912), control signals are sequentially output to the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851, and the upper movable accessory Various controls relating to the accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 are performed. Then, when the operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to various development production patterns is started, the operation control continues until the value of the process timer becomes "0". It will be done.

Under this configuration, when the first development effect pattern is executed in the present embodiment (similarly when the following various development effect patterns are executed), first, the magnifying lens portion 828 of the specific movable piece 825A is visually recognized. Control is performed to reduce the rotation speed of the upper rotating body 820 to the extent possible. At the same time, a setting process for outputting a predetermined sound (for example, a sound shouting "big or small" etc.) from the speaker SP is performed as an advanced notification effect. Based on this setting process, the output control process of the speaker SP is performed by the audio setting process of step SB3909.

Subsequently, control is performed to rotate the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B while raising the lower movable accessory 851 from the standby position (see FIG. 56) on the back side of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47.

Here, the lower left rotating body 856A is configured to rotate clockwise at a constant speed, and the lower right rotating body 856B is configured to rotate counterclockwise at a constant speed. In addition, the rotation speed of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B is set so that the player can visually recognize characters such as "SMALL" and "BIG" described in the information description portions 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba and 856Bb. is set to a moderately low speed.

After that, when the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B reach a predetermined rendering position in front of the display section 42a of the rendering display device 42, the lower movable accessory 851 rises while maintaining the rotating motion of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B. Stop only the movement. As a result, the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are rotating at positions behind the turning orbit of the movable piece 825 of the rotating upper rotating body 820 (see FIG. 58, etc.).

In this state, while the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are rotating, the positional relationship between the upper rotating body 820 and the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B is at least part of the upper rotating body 820. and at least a portion of the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B do not overlap; change to

In the first development effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 109, the stop position of the magnifying lens portion 828 of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 is finally the first information writing portion 856Aa of the lower left rotating body 856A ( strong/SMALL) and the second information writing portion 856Ab (weak/SMALL), and the first information writing portion 856Ba (strong/BIG) and the second information writing of the lower right rotator 856B. The upper rotator 820 and the left and right lower rotators 856A and 856B are adjusted so as not to coincide with any of the stop positions of the portion 856Bb (weak/big) (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as a "non-enlarged display stop state"). stops and the performance ends.

However, the combination of the stop modes of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B in the "stopped state without enlarged display" is not limited to the combination illustrated in FIG. , the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B may be stopped. At this time, the combination pattern of these stop modes may be determined based on the value of the accessory effect counter CB8.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6024, the process proceeds to step SB6026, and the value of the character product effect pattern flag PF is "3" corresponding to the "second development pattern (weak/SMALL expansion stop pattern)". or not.

If the determination here is affirmative, that is, if the development effect pattern is the "second development pattern", a second development effect setting process is performed in step SB6027, and this process ends.

In the second development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "7", which means that the character object effect has been developed.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads from the ROM 552 the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and the lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) corresponding to the second development pattern. is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553 .

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads a plurality of motion process data included in the second development effect control data according to the timetable, and the motion process data specified by the motion process data The operation time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the operation time is managed based on the value of the process timer, and the process corresponding to the operation process data is executed.

That is, the sub-control device 262, based on the second development effect control data, the rotational position information of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) and the process timer , etc., the operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the second development pattern is executed.

Under this configuration, when the second developed motion pattern is executed in the present embodiment, the same motion control as when the first developed effect pattern is executed is performed, and then as shown in FIG. , the state in which the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 and the stop position of the second information writing portion 856Ab (weak/SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A finally match, that is, the upper rotating body 820 is specified. A state in which the movable piece 825A is stopped at the fourth stop position EA4 and the second information writing portion 856Ab (weak/SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A is stopped at the first stop position EB1 (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as "weak/ The upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are stopped so as to be in a SMALL expansion stop state, and the effect is finished.

However, the stopping mode of the lower right rotating body 856B in the "weak/SMALL expansion stopped state" is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. It is good also as a structure which stops. At this time, this stop mode may be determined based on the value of the accessory effect counter CB8.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6026, the process proceeds to step SB6028, and the value of the character product effect pattern flag PF is "4" corresponding to the "third development pattern (strong/SMALL expansion stop pattern)". or not.

If the determination here is affirmative, that is, if the development effect pattern is the "third development pattern", a third development effect setting process is performed in step SB6029, and this process ends.

In the third development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "7", which means that the character object effect has been developed.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads from the ROM 552 the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and the lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) corresponding to the third development pattern. is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553 .

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads a plurality of motion process data included in the third development effect control data in accordance with the timetable, and the motion process data specified by the motion process data The operation time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the operation time is managed based on the value of the process timer, and the process corresponding to the operation process data is executed.

That is, the sub-control device 262, based on the third development effect control data, the rotational position information of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) and the process timer , etc., the operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the third development pattern is executed.

Under this configuration, when the third development motion pattern is executed in this embodiment, the same motion control as when the first development effect pattern is executed is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. Finally, the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 and the stop position of the first information writing portion 856Aa (strong/SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A match, that is, the upper rotating body 820 is specified. A state in which the movable piece 825A is stopped at the fourth stop position EA4 and the first information writing portion 856Aa (strong/SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A is stopped at the first stop position EB1 (this state is hereinafter referred to as “strong/small”). The upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are stopped so as to be in a SMALL expansion stop state, and the effect is finished.

However, the stopping mode of the lower right rotor 856B in the case of the "strong/SMALL expansion stop state" is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. It is good also as a structure which stops. At this time, this stop mode may be determined based on the value of the accessory effect counter CB8.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6028, the process proceeds to step SB6030, and the value of the character product effect pattern flag PF is "5" corresponding to the "fourth development pattern (weak/BIG expansion stop pattern)". determine whether or not

If the determination here is affirmative, that is, if the development effect pattern is the "fourth development pattern", a fourth development effect setting process is performed in step SB6031, and this process ends.

In the fourth development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "7", which means that the character object effect has been developed.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads from the ROM 552 the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and the lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) corresponding to the fourth development pattern. is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553 .

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads a plurality of motion process data included in the fourth development effect control data according to the timetable, and the motion process data specified by the motion process data The operation time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the operation time is managed based on the value of the process timer, and the process corresponding to the operation process data is executed.

That is, the sub-control device 262, based on the fourth development effect control data, the rotational position information of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) and the process timer , etc., the operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the fourth development pattern is executed.

Under this configuration, when the fourth development motion pattern is executed in this embodiment, the same motion control as when the first development effect pattern is executed is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. , the state in which the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 and the stop position of the second information writing portion 856Bb (weak/big) of the lower right rotating body 856B finally match, that is, the upper rotating body 820 A state in which the specific movable piece 825A is stopped at the first stop position EA1, and the second information writing portion 856Bb (weak/BIG) of the lower right rotating body 856B is stopped at the first stop position EC1 (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as " The upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B stop so as to be in a "weak/big enlargement stop state", and the effect is finished.

However, the stopping mode of the lower left rotating body 856A in the case of the "weak/big enlargement stop state" is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. 112, and the lower left rotating body 856A stops in a different mode may be configured. At this time, this stop mode may be determined based on the value of the accessory effect counter CB8.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6030, the process proceeds to step SB6032, and the value of the character product effect pattern flag PF is "6" corresponding to the "fifth development pattern (strong/BIG expansion stop pattern)". determine whether or not

If the determination here is affirmative, that is, if the development effect pattern is the "fifth development pattern", fifth development effect setting processing is performed in step SB6033, and this processing ends.

In the fifth development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "7", which means that the character object effect has been developed.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads from the ROM 552 the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and the lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) corresponding to the fifth development pattern. is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553 .

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads a plurality of motion process data included in the fifth development effect control data according to the timetable, and The operation time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the operation time is managed based on the value of the process timer, and the process corresponding to the operation process data is executed.

That is, the sub-control device 262, based on the fifth development effect control data, the rotational position information of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) and the process timer , etc., the operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the fifth development pattern is executed.

With this configuration, when the fifth development motion pattern is executed in this embodiment, the same motion control as when the first development effect pattern is executed is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. , the state in which the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 and the stop position of the first information writing portion 856Ba (strong/BIG) of the lower right rotating body 856B finally match, that is, the upper rotating body 820 A state in which the specific movable piece 825A is stopped at the first stop position EA1 and the first information writing portion 856Ba (strong/BIG) of the lower right rotating body 856B is stopped at the first stop position EC1 (hereafter, such a state is referred to as " The upper rotator 820 and the left and right lower rotators 856A and 856B are stopped so as to bring about a "strong/BIG expansion stop state", and the effect is finished.

However, the stopping mode of the lower left rotating body 856A in the case of the "strong/BIG expansion stopped state" is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. 113, and the lower left rotating body 856A stops in a different mode. may be configured. At this time, this stop mode may be determined based on the value of the accessory effect counter CB8.

Now, in step SB6035 to which a negative determination is made in step SB6017, the value of the effect state flag JF is considered, and it is determined whether or not the character object effect is currently in the developing state (JF=5). . If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6035, that is, if the character object presentation is in progress (upper rotator 820 and left and right lower rotators 856A and 856B are in operation), the process proceeds to step SB6036.

At step SB6036, it is determined whether or not the value of the process timer is "0". If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6036, that is, if it is time to end the performance of the character, end setting processing is performed in step SB6037, and this processing ends.

In the end setting process of step SB6037, the sub-control device 262 first sets "9" as the value of the effect state flag JF, which means that the character effect will not progress any further.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads the character product presentation end control data defining the ending process of the character product presentation from the ROM 552 and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 553 .

Based on this, the upper rotating body 820 (upper rotating body drive motor 821) is stopped, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B (lower rotating body drive motors 855A and 855B) are stopped, and the upper movable accessory 811 is moved to the standby position. Operation setting processing for raising the lower movable accessory 851 to the standby position, and the like are sequentially performed, and the accessory production ends.

As described in detail above, according to this embodiment, the second rotating body that is movable in a predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating body, and the predetermined area is viewed from the front. The relative positional relationship between the first rotating body and the second rotating body in the above is a first positional relationship in which at least a portion of the first rotating body and at least a portion of the second rotating body do not overlap, and at least the first rotating body Under a configuration that can be changed to a second positional relationship in which a part and at least a part of the second rotating body overlap, in the first positional relationship, light emitted from the light emitting means through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating body is visible, and in the second positional relationship, at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded by at least part of the second rotating body that overlaps the light transmitting portion of the first rotating body. is configured to be

In this way, the two rotating bodies (the first rotating body and the second rotating body) whose relative positional relationship changes are superimposed or separated from each other, thereby executing a more lively game effect. becomes possible.

Particularly in this embodiment, at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating body and the second rotating body. That is, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control for lighting/blinking the light emitting means.

This makes it possible to produce an effect using light together with the action effect of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Here, each of the following configurations may be applied to the above embodiment individually, or may be applied to the above embodiment by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment is the first type in which a jackpot state in which the variable prize winning device 32 opens and closes occurs when a jackpot win is won in a winning lottery based on the ball entering the starting prize winning openings 33YA and 33YB. is a gaming machine.

Not limited to this, it may be implemented as another type of pachinko machine that provides a predetermined game value. The game value includes, for example, game media such as prize balls paid out to the player, a special prize state (round) given during the big win, and a game mode such as a high-probability mode given after the big win. . In addition to the pachinko machine, it can also be implemented as various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a mammoth ball.

For example, a variable prize winning device is provided that opens when a small hit is won in a winning lottery based on a ball entering a predetermined starting prize winning portion, and a game ball that enters the variable prize winning device enters a predetermined special prize winning portion ( It may be implemented as a second type gaming machine in which a ball enters the V winning slot) and a jackpot state occurs. Here, without performing a predetermined lottery process when a game ball enters the starting winning part (or a lottery process with a winning probability of 100% may be performed), based on the ball entering the starting winning part, A variable winning device may be in an open state, and a game ball entering the variable winning device may enter a V winning port or the like to generate a big win state.

Further, it may be implemented as a third type gaming machine (for example, a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine) that combines the functions of the first type gaming machine and the functions of the second type gaming machine.

Incidentally, the winning probabilities related to various lotteries related to pachinko machines (soft lottery processing, mechanical lottery, etc.) are appropriately set for each model, and any value can be adopted. Further, as will be described later, it goes without saying that the configuration of the board surface of the game board 30 can also be changed as appropriate.

Also, the game machine may be implemented as a type of game machine that circulates game balls in the game machine and does not directly pay out the game balls to the player, that is, a so-called enclosed pachinko machine.

(b) The types of jackpots (the number of rounds, the content of the configuration, etc.) are not limited to the above embodiment, and different configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, a 16R jackpot in which 16 special prize states (rounds) are performed, a 4R jackpot in which 4 special prize states (rounds) are performed, etc. are set, but not limited to this, the number of rounds A configuration in which other different jackpot states occur is also possible.

Of course, the gaming machine may be implemented as a gaming machine in which only one type of jackpot state (for example, 15R jackpot) occurs instead of a gaming machine in which multiple types of jackpot states can occur.

(c) The configuration of the game mode to be awarded after the end of the jackpot state (granting period, configuration content, etc.) is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, "high support mode" is always given after the end of the jackpot. good too.

In addition, it is implemented as a pachinko machine that does not switch the lottery mode (“high probability mode” or “low probability mode”), but only switches the winning support mode (“high support mode” or “low support mode”). may Alternatively, or in addition to the payout of prize balls, a pachinko machine may be implemented in which points corresponding to the prize balls won by the player are given to a storage medium such as a magnetic card. A specific game mode such as a high support mode or a high probability mode may be set as a special game state.

(d) The configuration related to the game board is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, the game board 30 according to the above-described embodiment is configured using a transparent plate as a translucent member as a base, but is not limited to this. good.

(d-1) In the above embodiment, the LED boards 48A, 48B, and 48C mounted with a plurality of LEDs are arranged at the rear position of the predetermined area of the game area so that various light emitting effects can be executed. there is Not limited to this, a configuration in which other light emitting means such as a lamp or a liquid crystal display device is arranged at the rear position of the game board 30 instead of or in addition to the LED board 48A or the like may be employed.

(d-2) In place of or in addition to the above embodiment, at least one of the top, bottom, left, and right end faces of the game board 30 is provided with a light emitting means such as a lamp or an LED so as to face the end face. The light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the game board 30, and a part of the light is emitted from a predetermined position on the front surface of the game board 30 so that the player can visually recognize the light. good too. That is, the game board 30 may be configured to function as a light emitting member or a light guiding member. Of course, part of the light incident from the front view first position on the front part (or rear part) of the game board 30 is emitted from the front view second position on the front part of the game board 30, and is visible to the player. It is good also as a structure.

(d-3) Instead of the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 according to the above embodiment, a display screen having a size covering substantially the entire back side of the game area or substantially the entire back side of the game board 30 at the rear position of the game board 30 may be provided with a display device having

Alternatively, the game board 30 may be arranged so as to cover the front side of the display portion 42a of the effect display device 42 without providing an opening for mounting the effect display device 42 thereon. At this time, a nail or the like may be placed on the front surface of the game board 30, which is the area in front of the effect display device 42, so that this area can be used as the area where the game ball can flow down. Of course, this may be set as an area where game balls cannot flow down.

(e) The configuration of the first rotating means is not limited to the upper rotating body 820 as the first rotating body in the above embodiment.

(e-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the upper rotating body 820, which is the first rotating means (first rotating body), is the rendering area (predetermined area) of the display section (liquid crystal display section) 42a of the rendering display device 42. Although it is configured to rotate on the front side, the area in which the first rotating means rotates is not limited to this.

For example, in the front area of the center frame 47, a configuration may be adopted in which the first rotating means rotates. Here, a configuration in which the rotating shaft of the first rotating means is fixed may be employed, or a configuration in which the position of the rotating shaft of the first rotating means is displaceable may be employed.

Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the first rotating means rotates in the internal region of various prize winning devices such as the variable prize winning device 32 . Here, a configuration in which the rotating shaft of the first rotating means is fixed may be employed, or a configuration in which the position of the rotating shaft of the first rotating means is displaceable may be employed.

Also, in the front area (game area) of the game board 30, a configuration in which the first rotating means rotates may be employed. Here, a configuration in which the rotating shaft of the first rotating means is fixed may be employed, or a configuration in which the position of the rotating shaft of the first rotating means is displaceable may be employed.

(e-2) The moving mechanism of the first rotating means (first rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above-described embodiment, when the support arm 814 swings and displaces, the upper rotating body 820 (the upper movable accessory 811) moves to the standby position behind the upper side portion 47a of the center frame 47 and the display portion of the effect display device 42. It is configured to be displaced to the performance position on the front side of 42a.

Not limited to this, for example, the position of the upper rotating body 820 (upper movable accessory 811) may be linearly displaced between the standby position and the production position such as in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction. A plurality of movements such as curvilinear movements may be combined to move between the standby position and the performance position. Of course, the first rotating means may be rotatably supported (fixed) at a predetermined position without moving.

(e-3) The shape of the first rotating means (first rotating body) and the configuration of the translucent portion are not limited to those of the above embodiments. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the upper rotating body 820 is configured to have six movable pieces 825 imitating petals as the translucent portions. Other configurations may be employed without limitation. A configuration including only one translucent portion may be employed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable piece 825, which is the translucent portion, is slid in the radial direction of the upper rotor 820 so that the upper rotor 820 expands or contracts in diameter. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the translucent portion is not displaced in the radial direction of the first rotating means, that is, a configuration in which the size of the first rotating means does not change may be employed. For example, the first rotating means may be a circular disc body when viewed from the front.

In the above-described embodiment, the general portion of each movable piece 825 is made of a translucent member that makes it difficult to identify the display target displayed on the display section 42a. The display object may be configured by a transparent member that can be identified.

Also, the movable piece 825 need not be made of a translucent material, and may be made of a light-shielding material. In such a case, each specific movable piece 825 may be configured to have a through hole or a notch through which light can be transmitted (visually recognized). Alternatively, a first rotating means may be employed in which a predetermined number of through-holes or the like serving as light-transmitting portions are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of a disk body that is circular in front view. In other words, the first rotating means may have portions with different light transmittances.

(e-4) In the above embodiment, it acts on the acted portions (information writing portions 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, 856Bb) of the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means (second rotating bodies). As an action portion, a magnifying lens portion 828 is formed in one of the six movable pieces 825 (specific movable piece 825A).

The configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the magnifying lens portion 828 is omitted may be employed. Further, instead of or in addition to the magnifying lens portion 828, a configuration having a reducing lens portion as an action portion may be employed. By using this, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the affected portions (information writing portions 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, 856Bb) of the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are displayed in reduced size.

(e-5) The rotational driving source of the first rotating means (first rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the upper rotor 820 is configured to rotate using the upper rotor drive motor 821 as a drive source. may

Moreover, you may employ|adopt the structure which rotates using the game ball driven into the game area. For example, a rotary drive member such as a water wheel is arranged in the out port 36, and a drive transmission mechanism is arranged to transmit the force of the rotary drive member to the first rotating means. A ball may be used to rotationally drive the first rotating means. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which a 1st rotation means rotates using the game ball which flows down the predetermined position of a game area. In short, any configuration may be used as long as the first rotating means can be rotated using the game ball launched into the game area by the launching means.

(f) The configuration of the second rotating means is not limited to the lower left rotating body 856A and the lower right rotating body 856B as the second rotating body in the above embodiment.

(f-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the plate-like lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, which are substantially rectangular in front view, are employed as the second rotating means (second rotating bodies). , shape, and configuration of the information writing portion are not limited to those of the above embodiments.

For example, either one of the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B may be omitted, and only one second rotating means may be provided. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with the 2nd rotation means three or more.

As the second rotating means, for example, a rotating body having a circular shape in a front view and capable of rotating about the longitudinal direction as an axial direction may be provided, and the rotating body may be provided with one or three or more information writing portions.

(f-2) A rotating body having a different shape such as a spherical shape may be employed as the second rotating means.

For example, as shown in FIG. 114, as a movable accessory related to the second rotating means (second rotating body), a predetermined support pillar 880 provided to be movable by a moving driving means (not shown), and the support 880 An accommodating portion 881 provided at the upper end, a spherical member 882 as a spherical second rotating means (spherical body) accommodated in the accommodating portion 881, and for controlling the attitude and orientation of the spherical member 882. It is also possible to adopt a movable accessory provided with a rotating drive means composed of a plurality of actuators (not shown).

In the movable accessory illustrated in FIG. 114, information writing portions 884 are provided at a plurality of locations (for example, four locations) on the surface of the ball member 882 through openings 883 formed on the front surface of the containing body 881. becomes visible. The information description portion 884 may describe character information such as "atari" or "missing", for example.

Here, the spherical member 882 may be made of a translucent member. Light emitted from a predetermined light emitting means arranged behind the housing portion 881 enters the ball member 882 through a rear opening (not shown) of the housing portion 881, and passes through the opening 883 to play the game. You may make it visible to a person.

Alternatively, the ball member 882 may be made of a metal material, or the surface of the ball member 882 may be plated or the like. Light emitted from a predetermined light emitting means (including light incident from the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the window 101) is irradiated from the front through the opening 883 to the spherical member 882, where A configuration may be adopted in which the player can visually recognize the light reflected by the .

(f-3) In the above embodiment, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are configured to be rotatable with the longitudinal direction as the axial direction, but the rotating shaft direction of the second rotating means is not limited to this. .

For example, the spherical member 882 as the second rotating means illustrated in FIG. 114 may be configured to rotate with the vertical direction, horizontal direction, or oblique direction as the rotation axis direction. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the rotation axis direction (posture) of the second rotating means can be changed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 114, ball receiving members (not shown) capable of supporting the ball members 882 are provided at eight corners of the accommodating portion 881, and the ball receiving members are controlled by controlling the ball receiving members. A configuration may be adopted in which three-dimensional attitude control of the ball member 882 is performed via the ball member 882 .

(f-4) The information writing portions 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, and 856Bb of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B in the above embodiment are made of translucent material, and the display portion 42a of the effect display device 42 positioned behind. It is configured to be able to transmit light emitted from the device with a predetermined transmittance.

Not limited to this, at least the information writing portion 856Aa and the like (or the entire lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B may be used) may be made of an opaque material (for example, a metal material) that does not transmit light. Further, the information writing portion 856Aa and the like may be polished, plated, or the like to form a reflecting portion capable of reflecting light.

Light emitted from predetermined light emitting means (including light incident from the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the window portion 101) passes through the movable piece 825 of the upper rotating body 820 from the front to the information writing portion. 856Aa or the like may be irradiated.

Further, the information described in the information description part 856Aa or the like may be visually recognized by the player through the magnifying lens part 828 .

Further, the information writing portion 856Aa and the like may be curved in a spherical shape so as to protrude outward. With such a configuration, not only the light incident from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 but also the light emitted from various directions such as the sides of the game board 30 can be reflected to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 .

(f-5) The movement mechanism of the second rotating means (second rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the vertical drive mechanism 852 for vertically moving the lower movable accessory 851 is provided, and the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B move to the standby position behind the lower side 47b of the center frame 47 and the display section of the effect display device 42. It is configured to be displaced in the vertical direction between the effect position on the front side of 42a.

Not limited to this, for example, the positions of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B (lower movable accessory 851) may be configured to be movable not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction and the front-rear direction.

In addition, under the structure that can move in the front-rear direction, for example, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B (the lower movable accessory 851) may be configured to move from the front region to the rear region of the game board 30. Further, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B (lower movable accessory 851) may be configured to be movable in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction in the rear area of the game board 30. At this time, a guide member may be provided as a rear guide means capable of guiding the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B that have moved to the rear area of the game board 30 to a predetermined position.

Further, the lower left rotating body 856A and the lower right rotating body 856B may be configured to be independently movable and relatively movable. Of course, each of them may be configured to be individually movable in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the front-rear direction, and the like. Also, each of them may be configured to be individually movable from the front region to the rear region of the game board 30 , or each may be configured to be individually movable in the rear region of the game board 30 .

In addition, a plurality of patterns of movement paths, movement speeds, rotation speeds, etc., of the lower rotors 856A, 856B are set, and the movement paths, movement speeds, rotation speeds, etc. of the lower rotors 856A, 856B are changed as appropriate. good too. In addition, the configuration may include a route changing means capable of executing processing for changing the route along which the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B move. For example, a predetermined lottery may be held to change the movement path, and the movement paths of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B may be determined based on the lottery results.

(f-6) The rotational driving source of the second rotating means (second rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are configured to rotate using the lower rotating body drive motors 855A and 855B as the driving sources. An actuator may be employed.

Further, a predetermined movable member is provided which can come into contact with the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B and can change the movement of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B. may be configured.

For example, by colliding a predetermined movable member (for example, a hammer-shaped accessory, etc.) against the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B in the stopped state, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B start moving and rotating. may be

(f-7) In the above embodiment, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, which are the second rotating means, rotate on the front side of the display portion (liquid crystal display portion) 42a of the effect display device 42, which is the effect area (predetermined area). However, as with the first rotating means, the area in which the second rotating means rotates is not limited to this.

For example, in the front area of the center frame 47, the inner area of various winning devices such as the variable winning device 32, and the front area (game area) of the game board 30, the second rotating means is rotatable and movable. good too. Further, in the rear area of the game board 30, the second rotating means may rotate.

(g) The configuration related to the rotating body effect, such as when the rotating body effect using the first rotating means and the second rotating means (the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) is performed, is limited to the above embodiment. However, other configurations may be adopted.

(g-1) In the above embodiment, as an additional effect when the continuous support effect (roulette effect) is performed, a rotating effect using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that, for example, a rotating body effect using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B is performed in different scenes, such as an additional effect of the ready-to-win effect.

For example, the no-development pattern (the rotation effect of only the upper rotating body 820 without the lower role object effect) may be used for a one-shot announcement effect for notifying the player of winning the jackpot lottery.

(g-2) In the above-described embodiment, a lottery effect of a lottery (number of times of support) to determine whether or not to continue the support mode after the end of the big win is performed. , a type lottery for determining the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot state is performed based on the entry of a ball into a predetermined ball entry means, and as an effect for teaching the result of the lottery, for example, A configuration may be adopted in which rotating body effects such as the various developmental effect patterns described above (effects using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) are performed.

In addition, in the case where the rotating body effect is performed during or at the end of the jackpot state, for example, if the lottery result suspended when the ball is entered into the predetermined ball entry means during the jackpot state includes the jackpot winning result (so-called pending consecutive occurs), out of both the information description portions 856Aa and 856Ab of the lower left rotating body 856A (or both the information describing portions 856Ba and 856Bb of the lower right rotating body 856B), the first information description portion 856Aa of “strong/SMALL ” (or “strong/BIG” in the first information description portion 856Ba) may be enlarged and stopped, or may be easily enlarged and displayed. On the other hand, when the jackpot winning result is not included in the withheld lottery result (when no so-called reserved series occurs), the second information description part 856Ab "weak / SMALL" (or the second information description part 856Bb " "Weak/BIG") may be enlarged and stopped, or may be easily enlarged and displayed.

(g-3) In the above embodiment, depending on the degree of expectation that the high support mode will continue to be given (the degree of expectation that the game value can be given), the role production and further development production (upper rotating body 820 and lower It is configured such that the rate at which the rotating body effect using the rotating bodies 856A and 856B is performed changes.

Not limited to this, for example, if a winning result is obtained by a predetermined lottery process (a result of giving a game value such as a big hit or a small hit, a high probability mode, a high support mode, etc.) , the ratio of the character performance and further development performance (the rotating body performance using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) is greater than when no winning result is obtained.

Also, only when the high support mode is continued (when the game value is given), or when the winning result is obtained by the predetermined lottery process (jackpot or small win, high probability mode, high support mode Only when a result of giving a game value such as a game value) is obtained, the role production or its development production (rotating body production using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) is a fixed production. It is good also as a structure performed.

(h) In the above embodiment, the upper rotating body, which is the first rotating means, is applied to the acted portions (information writing portions 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, 856Bb) of the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means. Although the action portion (magnifying lens portion 828) of 820 is configured to act, the configuration in which the first rotating means and the second rotating means act on each other is not limited to this, and other configurations are possible. may be adopted.

(h-1) For example, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, which are the second rotating means, may act on the affected portion of the upper rotating body 820, which is the first rotating means. As a specific configuration, for example, in the upper rotating body 820, instead of the "magnifying lens part 828", a "specific information writing part (for example, characters such as "win")" is provided as an acted part, and in the lower left rotating body 856A, A "reduction lens section" is provided as a first working section in place of the "first information writing section 856Aa", and a "magnifying lens section" is provided as a second working section in place of the "second information writing section 856Ab". Under this configuration, the lower left rotating body 856A is configured to rotate and stop at a position forward of the upper rotating body 820, and when the upper rotating body 820 and the lower left rotating body 856A are stopped, the specific information description part ("hit , etc.) may be magnified and displayed by the 'magnifying lens unit' or reduced and displayed by the 'reducing lens unit'.

Furthermore, here, when acting in the second mode (when enlarged by the "magnifying lens section") than when acting in the first mode (when displayed in reduced size by the "reduction lens section") It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the ratio of the predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player increases. Alternatively, the ratio of the second advantageous state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, is higher in the case of acting in the second mode than in the case of acting in the first mode. may be configured.

(h-2) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, the upper rotating body 820 as the first rotating means and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B as the second rotating means are mutually close to each other. configured to remain spaced apart.

For example, the upper rotating body 820, which is the first rotating means, and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means, may contact each other when they are close to each other.

For example, when the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are stopped, the peripheral edge of the acting portion (magnifying lens portion 828) of the upper rotating body 820 is larger than the peripheral edge of the information writing portion 856Aa of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B. It is good also as a structure which a part contacts. As a result, gaps are less likely to occur between the peripheral edge portions of the information writing portions 856Aa and the like of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B and the peripheral edge portions of the action portions (magnifying lens portions 828) of the upper rotating body 820. FIG. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as light leaking through the gaps, making it difficult to see the information writing portion 856Aa or the like due to the leaked light, or lowering the luminance of the information writing portion 856Aa or the like.

(i) In the above embodiment, the effect button 125 that can be pressed by the player is provided as an operation means for effect. The configuration of the operating means and the effect using this are not limited to the above embodiments.

(i-1) In the above embodiment, when the player operates the effect button 125, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, which are the second rotating means, start operating, and the development effect (the upper rotating body 820 and a rotating body effect using the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B). Not limited to this, it may be configured such that the development effect is started in accordance with a predetermined effect program without being triggered by the operation of the operating means.

(i-2) The operation mode of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B may be changed according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

For example, a slide lever is provided as a first operation unit capable of adjusting the lateral movement amount of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, and a second operating section capable of determining the start timing and stop timing of the upward movement of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B is provided. A production button 125 may be provided as an operation unit, and the coordinate positions at which the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B rotate may be two-dimensionally adjustable up, down, left, and right.

Further, in the stage of performing the development effect, the lower rotors 856A and 856B are pushed downward while the character is displayed on the display unit 42a in connection with the upward movement of the lower rotors 856A and 856B to execute the development effect. A display performance to block is performed, and in response to this, the player repeatedly hits the performance button 125 to stop the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B which are about to be pushed downward. may be configured to perform

(i-3) A configuration may be provided with a return regulating means (for example, a ratchet mechanism) capable of regulating the return of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B guided to the rendering area to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position). This allows the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B to operate more stably in the rendering area.

(j) In the above-described embodiment, various effects related to rotating body effects are performed by controlling the operation (motor control, etc.) of the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B in accordance with a predetermined effect program. It is configured to be done.

Not limited to this, provided with a detection means capable of detecting the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B passing through a predetermined position in the rendering area (predetermined area), and based on the detection of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B by the detecting means, The configuration may be such that various effects related to the rotating body effect can be executed.

For example, in the case where the player can two-dimensionally determine the coordinate positions at which the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B rotate as described above, the position of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B determined by the player is determined by the player. A coordinate position may be specified by a plurality of detection means, and the rotation mode of the upper rotating body 820 and the stop position of the magnifying lens portion 828 may be changed according to the specified coordinate position.

Any type of detection means can be used as long as it can detect the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B. Preferably, it is of a type capable of detecting the presence or absence of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B in a non-contact manner, such as a distance measuring sensor.

(k) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, rotating bodies such as the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B may be charged with static electricity due to friction or the like during rotation. In view of this, it is also possible to adopt a configuration having a ground structure for releasing static electricity charged in the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B.

For example, in the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, a conductive portion having conductivity is provided, and a predetermined conductive member having conductivity is provided outside the production region (predetermined region) such as the center frame 47. The conductive portions of the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B may contact conductive members such as the center frame 47 when the rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are in a standby state or the like. By electrically connecting the conductive member such as the center frame 47 to a predetermined ground terminal (not shown), static electricity charged on the upper rotor 820 and the lower rotors 856A and 856B can be removed.

Here, the lower rotors 856A and 856B, which are relatively simply configured, may be configured such that at least a portion or the entirety thereof is made of a conductive metal material. Alternatively or additionally, the surfaces of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B may be plated or the like.

In addition, along a part of the route along which the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B move from the predetermined standby position to the effect area (predetermined area), an elongated conductive member made of a conductive material is arranged. may be

Furthermore, at least the conductive portions of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B that come into contact with the conductive member may be curved in a spherical shape so as to protrude outward. In other words, a configuration including a hemispherically convex conductive portion may be employed.

[Appendix]
Technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiments will be described below together with their effects.

Conventional problem VA. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is conducted based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball-entering means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a game state advantageous to the player is generated. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are those that produce a production effect by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in the conventional game machine, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means only lights up and flashes in accordance with the rotation of the rotating means, and the effect of the rotating means is monotonous. It is easy to become, and further improvement of interest was desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

Means VA1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
In a predetermined area, it is rotatable with the front-rear direction (the player's line of sight direction) as its axial direction, and is configured to be able to change its state between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state, and has a light-transmissive portion. 1 rotation means;
and a light emitting means capable of emitting predetermined light,
a second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means;
The relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means in a front view of a predetermined area is
a first positional relationship (non-proximity state) in which at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means do not overlap; configured to be changeable to a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion overlaps,
In the first positional relationship,
At least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship,
A game machine characterized in that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the translucent part of the first rotating means. .

It should be noted that examples of the above-mentioned "predetermined opportunity" include, for example, "a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means provided within the game area" (the same applies to various means below). .

In addition, giving "game value" includes, for example, paying out game media such as prize balls, and giving a special game state (win state, game mode, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. (The same applies to the various means below).

Further, the configuration in which the second rotating means is "rotatable in a predetermined manner" includes, for example, a configuration in which the second rotating means is rotatable with the front-rear direction as the axial direction, similar to the first rotating means (various means described below). but same). Of course, the second rotating means may be configured to be rotatable in a manner different from this (the same applies to various means below). For example, the second rotating means may be configured to be rotatable with the left-right direction as its axial direction.

Further, the configuration in which "the second rotating means is relatively movable with respect to the first rotating means" means, for example, the center position (rotation It means a configuration in which the center position (position of the rotation axis) of the second rotating means can move in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, etc. with reference to the position of the shaft (the same applies to various means below). Therefore, when viewed from the front in a predetermined area, the positional relationship between the center position of the first rotating means and the center position of the second rotating means does not change, that is, the centers of the two rotating means are arranged on the same longitudinal axis. However, a configuration in which the positional relationship in a front view is fixed and the relative positional relationship between the two rotating means varies only in the circumferential direction is not included.

According to the above means VA1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes are superimposed or separated from each other, thereby providing a more lively game effect. can be executed.

Particularly, in this means, at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. That is, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control for lighting/blinking the light emitting means.

This makes it possible to perform an effect using light together with the motion effect of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Incidentally, as one of the effect devices that use the rotating means to produce a game effect, the rotating means is equipped with a plurality of light emitting means, and while the rotating means is rotated, the light emitting means blinks in a predetermined pattern, resulting in an afterimage. Versawriter and the like for displaying characters, figures, etc. are known as such.

However, in a configuration in which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on a rotating means, such as a Versalighter, the rotating means may become large and heavy, and the operability of the rotating means may deteriorate.

Furthermore, when a plurality of light-emitting means are mounted on a rotating means that is driven to rotate, a signal line connecting between the light-emitting means mounted on the rotating means and a control device installed outside the rotating means is usually used. and power lines must be electrically connected via a slip ring or the like, which may complicate wiring and control.

Therefore, in such an effect device, the operability of the rotating means is low, and the motion effect of the rotating means tends to be monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the present means, since it is possible to change the viewing mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means by changing the relative positional relationship between the two rotating means, the light emitting means is not mounted on the rotating means. , the increase in size and weight of the rotating means can be suppressed, and the operability of each rotating means can be enhanced.

In addition, if one rotating means is used and the diameter of the rotating means is increased in order to increase the switching speed of the light viewing mode (the speed of the outer peripheral portion of the rotating means), the effect of inertia, etc. There is a risk that the load on the means, the motor, etc., will increase.

On the other hand, according to this means, by stacking the two rotating means, it is possible to increase the switching speed of the light viewing mode without increasing the load on the rotating means, the motor, or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the rotating means, the motor, and the like.

Means VA2. than when the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the first second positional relationship (proximity state),
When the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state),
A game machine according to means VA1, characterized in that the game machine is constructed so as to increase the ratio of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player.

According to the means VA2, it is possible to perform a game effect such that the ratio of a predetermined advantageous state changes depending on the difference in the positional relationship (proximity state) between the two rotating means.

As a result, the player will watch the operation of the second rotating means with anticipation, and the player's interest can be improved.

Means VA3. A first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state can be generated,
than when the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the first second positional relationship (proximity state),
When the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state),
A game machine according to means VA1, characterized in that the ratio of said second advantageous state is higher than said first advantageous state.

According to the means VA3, the same effect as the means VA2 can be obtained.

Means VA4. When the predetermined condition is met, compared to when it is not met,
Any one of the means VA1 to VA3, wherein the ratio (frequency) of the first rotation means and the second rotation means to be in the second positional relationship (proximity state) increases. The game machine described.

According to the above means VA4, when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when a winning result is obtained by a predetermined lottery process), compared to when it is not met (for example, when a winning result is not obtained by a predetermined lottery process) , the ratio of the second positional relationship (close state) between the first rotating means and the second rotating means increases.

In other words, the ratio of the second positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means changes according to the game situation. As a result, the game can be varied, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Means VA5. wherein the plurality of second rotating means are individually movable in the predetermined area and the plurality of second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable;
The plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually operable with respect to the first rotating means (at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means can approach individually). The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA4, characterized by:

According to the means VA5, a plurality of second rotating means are provided which are relatively movable with respect to each other, and these are configured to be individually operable with respect to the first rotating means, thereby further diversifying the game effects. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

Here, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined second rotating means among the plurality of second rotating means can act on other second rotating means. As a result, further diversification of game effects can be achieved.

Means VA6. In the first rotating means, a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting portions are arranged at equal intervals (for example, at predetermined intervals around the rotation axis) in the circumferential direction of the first rotating means. arranged at an angle of 360°/N equiangular intervals),
A light emission control means capable of controlling the light emission means,
The game machine according to any one of the means VA1 to VA5, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be capable of controlling blinking of the light emission means.

According to the above means VA6, by adjusting (changing) the rotation period of the first rotation means and the blinking period of the light emitting means, it is possible to perform a rotation means presentation using a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect), etc. It is possible to change the apparent operation mode of the rotating means (translucent portion). As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and improve the interest of the player.

Here, the "blinking control" refers to control in which the light-emitting means periodically repeats a lighting state and a lighting-out state.

For example, flashing control in which the flashing period of the light emitting means is shorter than the light transmitting portion movement period (period in which the light transmitting portions move by one formation pitch interval) in which the N light transmitting portions move a distance corresponding to the predetermined interval. is executed, the light-transmitting part which is visually recognized by the player when the light-emitting means is turned on at a predetermined timing has not yet reached the distance of one formation pitch interval at the next timing when the light-emitting means is turned on. It will be visually recognized at the front side position where there is no.

With such a configuration, it is possible to produce a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect) in which the rotating means (translucent portion) appears to be rotating in a direction opposite to the actual rotating direction. As a result, it is possible to produce a visual effect that gives the player the illusion that the rotating means, which is rotating in the forward direction, has suddenly reversed, for example.

There is a mechanical limit to the rotational drive control of the rotating means using a motor or the like. For this reason, depending on the mode of action, etc., the action may appear sluggish, which may reduce the interest of the player.

For example, it is extremely difficult to perform drive control for rapidly reversing the rotation direction of a rotating means (motor) rotating in the forward direction to the opposite direction without providing a deceleration period due to the influence of inertia and the like. In addition, if the direction of rotation of the rotating means (motor) is suddenly reversed, the load on the rotating means, the motor, etc. may increase significantly. As a result, there is a risk that durability will be reduced, for example, rattling will occur in the assembled state of the rotating means and the motor.

On the other hand, according to the above configuration, it is possible to perform an effect as if the rotating means rotating in the normal direction suddenly reversed direction without increasing the load on the rotating means, the motor, or the like. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and improve the interest of the player.

Means VA7. The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA6, wherein the diameter of the second rotating means in a front view of the predetermined area is at least smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means.

If the diameter of the second rotating means that moves within the predetermined area is relatively large, the load on the drive mechanism, etc., may increase due to the influence of inertia, etc., and it may become difficult to control the movement of the second rotating means. be.

In this respect, according to the means VA7, it is possible to improve the braking performance and suppress the occurrence of the above problems.

Means VA8. The second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting part capable of reflecting irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light from the front (including light irradiated from the outside of the game machine) through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflecting portion of the second rotating means that overlaps the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means. ) is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VA8, the same effect as the means VB1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA8, similarly to the means VB3, ``the first rotating means is provided rotatably on the front side of a predetermined translucent member capable of transmitting light''. good. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VB3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA8, as in means VB4, "at least the reflecting section (at least part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA8, similarly to means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to a polishing process". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA8, similarly to the means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chromium plating)." good too. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VB6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA8, as in the means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA8, as in means VB8, "at least the reflecting part (at least part of the second rotating means) has an information writing part in which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written. It may be said that Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 can be obtained.

Means VA9. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The game machine according to any one of the means VA1 to VA8, wherein the operation mode of the second rotating means can be changed according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VA9, the same effect as the means VC1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA9, as in the case of the means VC2, "the second rotating means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operating means by the player". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration of the means VA9, similarly to the means VC3, "based on at least the operation displacement amount of the operation means, the amount of movement of the second rotating means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction ) is configured to be changeable”. This provides the same effect as the means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA9, like the means VC4, it may be possible to "provide a movement restricting means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more". Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VC4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA9, like the means VC5, "the guide means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area may be provided". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA9, similarly to the means VC6, "return restricting means capable of restricting the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area from returning to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position) is provided. It may be said that This provides the same effect as the means VC6.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA9, similarly to the means VC7, "the operation means includes at least a first operation section capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a predetermined movement of the second rotation means. and a second operation unit that can select whether or not to execute an action." This provides the same effect as the means VC7.

Means VA10. In the predetermined area,
A detecting means capable of detecting the second rotating means that has passed through a predetermined position,
A gaming machine according to any one of the means VA1 to VA9, characterized in that a predetermined effect can be executed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means.

According to the means VA10, the same effect as the means VD1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA10, similarly to the means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotating means by the detecting means, the light emitting means It is also possible to say that the light emitting mode is made changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 can be obtained.

In addition, as in the means VD3, it is possible to "provide a predetermined display means as the light emitting means, and to change the display mode of the display means as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA10, similarly to the means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the detection means at the plurality of locations the second rotation means is detected, It may be "configured to be able to execute different effects". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA10, similarly to the means VD6, it is assumed that "in the predetermined area, the plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually movable and individually passable through the predetermined position." good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 can be obtained.

Means VA11. The second rotating means has at least a portion thereof having a conductive portion (at least a portion of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means are configured to be able to contact or approach each other,
Any one of the means VA1 to VA10, wherein in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotating means is configured to be in contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VA11, the same effect as the means VE1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA11, as in the means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". As a result, the same effect as the means VE2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA11, as with the means VE3, "the conductive member is arranged along a part of the route along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." It is also possible to say "to be". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA11, as in the means VE4, ``the conductive member is an elongated member arranged along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves.'' may be As a result, the same effect as the means VE4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA11, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 can be obtained.

Means VA12. one of the first rotating means and the second rotating means has at least one acted portion that receives an action from the other rotating means;
When the other rotating means acts on the affected portion of the one rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one rotating means can perform a predetermined operation in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined manner. The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA11, wherein

According to the means VA12, the same effect as the means VF1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA12, as in the case of the means VF2, "when the one rotating means acts on the acted portion in the first mode, the first rotating means When the other rotating means acts on the operated portion in the second mode, the second motion in accordance with the second mode is performed. configured to operate in a manner". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA12, as in the case of the means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode more than the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode." It may be configured such that the proportion of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher when the action is performed. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VF3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA12, as with the means VF4, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur. and when the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode, the first rotation is more likely than when the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode. It may be configured such that the ratio of being in the second advantageous state is higher than in the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA12, as in the case of the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the affected portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA12, similarly to the means VF6, it is also possible to say that "a predetermined movable member is provided which can come into contact with the second rotating means and can change the movement of the second rotating means". good. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF6 can be obtained.

Means VA13. The game board is composed of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VA1 to VA12, wherein the second rotating means is movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and is movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VA13, the same effect as the means VG1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA13, as in the means VG2, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means may individually be configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA13, like the means VG3, ``a plurality of paths are provided so that the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA13, like the means VG4, "in the front area of the game board, a path changing means capable of changing the path along which the second rotating means moves" may be provided. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA13, as with the means VG5, it may be possible to provide "rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotating means moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position". . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA13, like the means VG6, "the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotating means may be configured to be variable". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 can be obtained.

Conventional problem VB. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is conducted based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball-entering means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a game state advantageous to the player is generated. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are those that produce a production effect by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385). For example, while the rotating means is being rotated, there is an effect such as lighting and blinking of the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means.

Instead of this, for example, it is conceivable to provide a rotating means and a light emitting means separately and rotate the rotating means at a position in front of the light emitting means to perform various game effects.

However, under such a configuration, if at least part of the rotating means is made of a light-shielding material that does not allow light to pass through, the front-side design surface of that part appears dark to the player's eyes, and the design surface is dark. may become difficult to see.

As a result, there is a risk that the design of the rotating means will be degraded, and that players will find it less interesting.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

Means VB1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
In a predetermined area, it is rotatable with the front-rear direction (the player's line of sight direction) as its axial direction, and is configured to be able to change its state between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state, and has a light-transmissive portion. 1 rotating means,
a second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means;
The relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means in a predetermined area front view (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-proximity state) in which at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means do not overlap; configured to be changeable to a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion overlaps,
The second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting part capable of reflecting irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light from the front (including light irradiated from the outside of the game machine) through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflecting portion of the second rotating means that overlaps the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means. ) is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the above means VB1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes are superimposed or separated from each other, thereby providing a more lively game effect. can be executed.

Furthermore, according to this means, in the second positional relationship (close state) where at least a part of the first rotating means and at least a part of the second rotating means overlap, the second rotating means overlapping the translucent portion of the first rotating means Light (including light emitted from the outside of the game machine) is irradiated from the front through the translucent portion of the first rotating means to at least part of the reflecting portion of the second rotating means.

As a result, even if at least part of the second rotating means is made of a light-blocking material, the front side design surface of that part appears dark to the eyes of the player, and the design is not visible to the player. The problem that the surface becomes difficult to see becomes less likely to occur.

As a result, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the design, and thereby improve the interest of the player.

Means VB2. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting predetermined light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
The means VB1 is characterized in that at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded by at least part of the second rotating means that overlaps the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VB2, at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. That is, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control for lighting/blinking the light emitting means.

This makes it possible to perform an effect using light together with the motion effect of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB2, as in the case of the means VA2, "the above-mentioned When the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state), the ratio of the predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player increases. It is also possible to say that Thereby, the same effect as the means VA2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB2, as with the means VA3, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are generated." and the first rotating means and the second rotating means are more likely to move than when the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the first second positional relationship (proximity state). The second positional relationship (proximity state) is configured so that the ratio of the second advantageous state is higher than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB2, similarly to the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state) as compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied." It may be configured so that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effect as the means VA4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB2, similarly to the means VA5, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually operable with respect to the first rotating means (at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means can approach individually). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB2, as in the case of the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 1) of the light-transmitting parts arranged around the circumference of the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at regular intervals in a direction (e.g., equal angular intervals of 360°/N equal angles around a rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means, wherein the light emission control means is and being configured to be able to execute blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB2, as in the case of the means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in a predetermined area viewed from the front may be at least smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 can be obtained.

Means VB3. The gaming machine according to means VB1 or VB2, wherein the first rotating means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member capable of transmitting light.

When a light-transmitting member is arranged between the light-emitting means and the first rotating means, the brightness of the light emitted from the light-emitting means is reduced by passing through the light-transmitting member.

For example, in a configuration such as an illumination device in which a translucent member such as a cover member is disposed on the front side of an LED or the like as a light emitting means, the brightness of light emitted from the LED or the like is determined by the cover member or the like. decrease by passing through

Similarly, in a configuration such as a liquid crystal display device in which a liquid crystal panel formed by laminating various translucent members is arranged in front of a backlight as a light emitting means, the light emitted from the backlight is Luminance is reduced by passing through various translucent members.

Therefore, under the configuration according to this means VB3, the effects of the means VB1 and the like are more effective.

Means VB4. The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB3, wherein at least the reflecting portion (at least part of the second rotating means) is made of a metal material.

According to the means VB4, the rigidity of the second rotating means can be increased, and durability and wear resistance can be improved. Furthermore, the reflecting portion can be formed only by polishing a predetermined portion of the second rotating means, and the manufacturing process can be simplified. Further, the reflecting portion (at least a portion of the second rotating means) may be configured to be subjected to antirust treatment or the like.

Means VB5. The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB4, wherein at least the reflecting portion (at least part of the second rotating means) is polished.

According to the means VB5, polishing (mirror finish) is performed to form a more glossy reflecting portion. As a result, the effects of the means VB1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Means VB6. The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB5, wherein at least the reflecting portion (at least part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chrome plating).

According to the means VB6, the reflectance of light in the reflecting portion can be increased, and the effects of the means VB1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Means VB7. The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB6, wherein at least the reflecting portion (at least part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward).

According to the means VB7, not only the light emitted from the front side of the game machine (outside the game machine), but also the light emitted from various directions such as the sides of the game board can be reflected to the front side of the game machine. As a result, the effects of the means VB1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Means VB8. The method according to any one of means VB1 to VB7, wherein at least the reflecting part (at least part of the second rotating means) has an information writing part on which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written. game machine.

According to the above means VB8, the player can visually recognize the predetermined information written in the information writing section of the reflecting section through the translucent section of the first rotating section.

As a result, it is possible to further diversify the game effects using the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means), and to further enhance the effects of the means VB1.

Means VB9. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The game machine according to any one of the means VB1 to VB8, wherein the operation mode of the second rotating means can be changed according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VB9, the same effect as the means VC1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, as in the case of the means VC2, "the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the player's operation of the operation means". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, similarly to the means VC3, "based on at least the operation displacement amount of the operation means, the amount of movement of the second rotating means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction ) is configured to be changeable”. This provides the same effect as the means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, as with the means VC4, it may be possible to "provide a movement restricting means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more". Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VC4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, like the means VC5, it may be possible to ``provide a guide means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area''. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, similarly to the means VC6, "return restricting means capable of restricting the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area from returning to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position) is provided. It may be said that This provides the same effect as the means VC6.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, similarly to the means VC7, "the operation means includes at least a first operation section capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a predetermined movement of the second rotation means. and a second operation unit that can select whether or not to execute an action." This provides the same effect as the means VC7.

Means VB10. In the predetermined area,
A detecting means capable of detecting the second rotating means that has passed through a predetermined position,
A game machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB9, characterized in that a predetermined effect can be executed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means.

According to the means VB10, the same effect as the means VD1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB10, similarly to the means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotating means by the detecting means, the light emitting means It is also possible to say that the light emitting mode is made changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 can be obtained.

In addition, as in the means VD3, it is possible to "provide a predetermined display means as the light emitting means, and to change the display mode of the display means as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB10, similarly to the means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the detection means at the plurality of locations the second rotation means is detected, It may be "configured to be able to execute different effects". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB10, similarly to the means VD6, it is assumed that "a plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and individually pass through the predetermined position". good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 can be obtained.

Means VB11. The second rotating means has at least a portion thereof having a conductive portion (at least a portion of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means are configured to be able to contact or approach each other,
Any one of the means VB1 to VB10, wherein in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotating means is configured to be in contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VB11, effects similar to those of the means VE1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB11, as in the case of the means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in an area different from the predetermined area (outside the predetermined area)". As a result, the same effect as the means VE2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB11, as in the case of the means VE3, "the conductive member is arranged along a part of the route along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." It is also possible to say "to be". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB11, as in the means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member arranged along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." may be As a result, the same effect as the means VE4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB11, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 can be obtained.

Means VB12. one of the first rotating means and the second rotating means has at least one acted portion that receives an action from the other rotating means;
When the other rotating means acts on the affected portion of the one rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one rotating means can perform a predetermined operation in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined manner. The game machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB11, wherein the game machine is configured as follows.

According to the means VB12, the same effect as the means VF1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB12, as in the case of the means VF2, "when the one rotating means acts on the acted portion in the first mode, the first rotating means When the other rotating means acts on the operated portion in the second mode, the second motion in accordance with the second mode is performed. configured to operate in a manner". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB12, as in the case of the means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode more than the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode." It may be configured such that the proportion of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher when the action is performed. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VF3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB12, as with the means VF4, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are generated." and when the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode, the first rotation is more likely than when the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode. It may be configured such that the ratio of being in the second advantageous state is higher than in the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB12, as in the case of the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the affected portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB12, similarly to the means VF6, it is also possible to say that "a predetermined movable member is provided which can come into contact with the second rotating means and can change the movement of the second rotating means". good. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF6 can be obtained.

Means VB13. The game board is composed of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VB1 to VB12, wherein the second rotating means is movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and is movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VB13, the same effect as the means VG1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB13, similarly to the means VG2, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means may individually be configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB13, like the means VG3, ``a plurality of paths are provided so that the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB13, like the means VG4, it may be possible to provide "in the front area of the game board, a path changing means capable of changing the moving path of the second rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB13, like the means VG5, it may be possible to ``provide a rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotating means moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position''. . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB13, like the means VG6, "the rotation axis direction of the second rotating means may be configured to be variable". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 can be obtained.

Conventional problem VC. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is conducted based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball-entering means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a game state advantageous to the player is generated. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are those that produce a production effect by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in the conventional game machine, for example, when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the rotating means rotates in a preset motion. For this reason, the presentation of the rotating means tends to be monotonous, and the player tends to lose interest in the operation of the rotating means. In this regard, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

Means VC1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (the line-of-sight direction of the player) as an axial direction and capable of changing the state between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
a second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means;
The relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means in a predetermined area front view (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-proximity state) in which at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means do not overlap; configured to be changeable to a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion overlaps,
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine, wherein the operation mode of the second rotating means can be changed according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the above means VC1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes are superimposed or separated from each other, thereby providing a more lively game effect. can be executed.

Further, according to this means, the operation mode of the second rotating means is changed according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player. As a result, the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means can be changed. As a result, the player is more aware of his/her active participation in the game, and can improve interest in the game.

Here, the "operation mode of the operation means" includes, for example, the number of operations and the amount of operation displacement. For example, it includes the number of times a button-type operating means has been pressed and the amount of operation displacement of a movable operating means such as a jog dial or a slide lever.

Means VC2. The gaming machine according to means VC1, wherein the second rotating means starts a predetermined movement based on the operation of the operating means by the player.

According to the above means VC2, the player himself/herself can determine the operation start timing of the second rotating means which has been in the standby state until then. This makes it possible for the player to become more aware that he/she is actively participating in the game, and to further improve interest in the game.

Means VC3. Means VC1 or VC1, characterized in that the amount of movement of the second rotating means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction) of the second rotating means is configured to be variable based on at least the amount of operation displacement of the operating means; A gaming machine described in VC2.

According to the means VC3, the player can change the movement amount of the second rotation means based on the operation displacement amount of the operation means. This makes it possible for the player to become more aware that he/she is actively participating in the game, and to further improve interest in the game.

Means VC4. A gaming machine according to any one of the means VC1 to VC3, further comprising a movement restricting means capable of restricting movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more.

Under the configuration related to the means VC1 and the like, if a configuration is adopted in which the amount of movement of the second rotating means can be changed as the player desires, the amount of movement of the second rotation means may be larger than the amount of movement planned by the developer. There is a risk that a player will try to move the two rotating means. If an attempt is made to move the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more, the second rotating means may collide with a predetermined portion, and the second rotating means or the predetermined portion may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the means VC4, by providing the movement restricting means, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of the problems as described above.

Means VC5. The gaming machine according to any one of means VC1 to VC4, further comprising guide means for guiding said second rotating means to said predetermined area.

Under the configuration related to the above means VC1 and the like, if a configuration is adopted in which the amount of movement of the second rotating means can be changed as desired by the player, the predetermined area that is the rendering area of the first rotating means There is a risk that the second rotating means will not be properly guided.

On the other hand, according to the means VC5, by providing the guide means, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of the problems as described above.

Means VC6. The means VC3 to VC5 according to any one of the means VC3 to VC5, further comprising a return restricting means capable of restricting the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area from returning to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position). game machine.

Under the configuration related to the means VC1 and the like, if the second rotating means can be operated as desired by the player, the second rotating means once guided to the predetermined area can be moved again. There is a risk that the player will return to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position) and the rotating means effect will not be performed properly.

On the other hand, according to the means VC6, by providing the return restricting means, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of the problems as described above.

Means VC7. The operation means includes a first operation section capable of changing at least the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a second operation section capable of selecting whether or not to cause the second rotation means to execute a predetermined operation. The gaming machine according to any one of means VC1 to VC6, characterized by comprising:

According to the above-mentioned means VC7, the player can decide many actions by himself/herself, further strengthen the awareness that the player is actively participating in the game, and further improve interest. can.

Means VC8. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting predetermined light,
The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
A means VC1 characterized in that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the translucent part of the first rotating means. The game machine according to any one of VC7.

According to the means VC8, at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. That is, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control for lighting/blinking the light emitting means.

This makes it possible to perform an effect using light together with the motion effect of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC8, as in the case of the means VA2, "the above-mentioned When the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state), the ratio of the predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player increases. It is also possible to say that Thereby, the same effect as the means VA2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC8, as with the means VA3, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are generated." and the first rotating means and the second rotating means are more likely to move than when the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the first second positional relationship (proximity state). The second positional relationship (proximity state) is configured so that the ratio of the second advantageous state is higher than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC8, similarly to the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state) as compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied." It may be configured so that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effect as the means VA4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC8, similarly to the means VA5, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually operable with respect to the first rotating means (at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means can approach individually). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC8, similarly to the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts arranged around the circumference of the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at regular intervals in a direction (e.g., equal angular intervals of 360°/N equal angles around a rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means, wherein the light emission control means is and being configured to be able to execute blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC8, as in the case of the means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in a predetermined area viewed from the front may be at least smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 can be obtained.

Means VC9. The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting part capable of reflecting irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light from the front (including light irradiated from the outside of the game machine) through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflecting portion of the second rotating means that overlaps the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means. ) is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VC9, the same effect as the means VB1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC9, similarly to the means VB3, ``the first rotating means is provided rotatably on the front side of a predetermined translucent member capable of transmitting light''. good. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VB3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC9, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material" as in the means VB4. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC9, similarly to means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to a polishing process". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC9, similarly to the means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chromium plating)." good too. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VB6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC9, as in the means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC9, as in the means VB8, "at least the reflecting part (at least a part of the second rotating means) has an information writing part on which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written. It may be said that Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 can be obtained.

Means VC10. In the predetermined area,
A detecting means capable of detecting the second rotating means that has passed through a predetermined position,
A game machine according to any one of means VC1 to VC9, characterized in that a predetermined effect can be executed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means.

According to the means VC10, the same effect as the means VD1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC10, similarly to the means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotating means by the detecting means, the light emitting means It is also possible to say that the light emitting mode is made changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 can be obtained.

In addition, as in the means VD3, it is possible to "provide a predetermined display means as the light emitting means, and to change the display mode of the display means as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC10, similarly to the means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the detection means at the plurality of locations the second rotation means is detected, It may be "configured to be able to execute different effects". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC10, similarly to the means VD6, it is assumed that "in the predetermined area, the plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually movable and individually pass through the predetermined position". good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 can be obtained.

Means VC11. The second rotating means has at least a portion thereof having a conductive portion (at least a portion of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means are configured to be able to contact or approach each other,
Any one of the means VC1 to VC10, wherein in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotating means is configured to be in contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VC11, the same effect as the means VE1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC11, as in the means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". As a result, the same effect as the means VE2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC11, as with the means VE3, "the conductive member is arranged along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." It is also possible to say "to be". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC11, as in the means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member arranged along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." may be As a result, the same effect as the means VE4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC11, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 can be obtained.

Means VC12. one of the first rotating means and the second rotating means has at least one acted portion that receives an action from the other rotating means;
When the other rotating means acts on the affected portion of the one rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one rotating means can perform a predetermined operation in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined manner. The game machine according to any one of means VC1 to VC11, characterized in that:

According to the means VC12, the same effect as the means VF1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC12, as in the case of the means VF2, "when the one rotating means acts on the acted portion in the first mode, the first rotating means When the other rotating means acts on the operated portion in the second mode, the second motion in accordance with the second mode is performed. configured to operate in a manner". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC12, as in the case of the means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode more than the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode." It may be configured such that the proportion of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher when the action is performed. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VF3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC12, as with the means VF4, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are generated." and when the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode, the first rotation is more likely than when the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode. It may be configured such that the ratio of being in the second advantageous state is higher than in the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC12, as in the case of the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the affected portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC12, similarly to the means VF6, it is also possible to say that "a predetermined movable member is provided which can come into contact with the second rotating means and can change the movement of the second rotating means". good. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF6 can be obtained.

Means VC13. The game board is composed of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VC1 to VC12, wherein the second rotating means is movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and is movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VC13, the same effect as the means VG1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC13, similarly to the means VG2, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means may individually be configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC13, as with the means VG3, ``a plurality of paths are provided so that the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC13, like the means VG4, ``in the front area of the game board, a path changing means capable of changing the path along which the second rotating means moves'' may be provided. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC13, similarly to the means VG5, it may be possible to ``provide a rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotating means moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position''. . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC13, similarly to the means VG6, "the rotation axis direction of the second rotating means may be configured to be variable". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 can be obtained.

Conventional problem VD. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is conducted based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball-entering means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a game state advantageous to the player is generated. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are those that produce a production effect by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in the conventional game machine, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the rotating means performs a predetermined rotating operation, or the light-emitting means mounted on the rotating means only lights or blinks. For this reason, the presentation of the rotating means tends to become monotonous, and further enhancement of interest has been desired.

In view of this, for example, it is conceivable to perform an effect in which a plurality of movable bodies including rotating means are interlocked. , there is a possibility that a state may arise in which it is not possible to interlock or stop in the effect mode desired to be visually recognized by the player. If such a state occurs, there is a risk that the interest of the player will be significantly reduced.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

Means VD1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (the line-of-sight direction of the player) as an axial direction and capable of changing the state between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
a second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means;
The relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means in a predetermined area front view (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-proximity state) in which at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means do not overlap; configured to be changeable to a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion overlaps,
In the predetermined area,
A detecting means capable of detecting the second rotating means that has passed through a predetermined position,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a predetermined effect based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means.

According to the above means VD1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes are superimposed or separated from each other, thereby providing a more lively game effect. can be executed.

However, under the configuration in which the second rotating means moves in a predetermined area, there is a possibility that the second rotating means may be displaced due to an assembly error, aged deterioration, or the like. If such a positional deviation occurs, the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means will not be appropriate, and there is a risk that the above-described effect will not be produced appropriately.

Conventionally, detection means for detecting the movable body at the standby position (reference position) is often provided in order to grasp the position of the movable body. However, with such a configuration alone, the position of the movable body in the rendering area (predetermined area) where the rendering is actually performed cannot be grasped, so there is a possibility that the problem described above may occur.

On the other hand, according to the means VD1, a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing through the predetermined position is provided in the predetermined area serving as the rendering area, and the second rotation means is detected by the detection means. Based on, it has a configuration that can execute a predetermined effect.

As a result, when the effect is executed in the predetermined area, a time lag is less likely to occur between the operation mode of the rotating means and the start timing of the predetermined effect, and the occurrence of the above problems can be suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

Means VD2. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting predetermined light,
The game machine according to means VC1, wherein the light emission mode of the light emitting means can be changed based on the detection of the second rotating means by the detecting means.

According to the means VD2, it is possible to execute, at appropriate timing, an effect that produces a visual effect such as changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means.

Means VD3. Predetermined display means is provided as the light emitting means,
The game machine according to means VD2 is characterized in that the display mode of the display means can be changed as the light emission mode of the light emission means.

According to the above means VD3, it is possible to execute, at an appropriate timing, an effect that produces a visual effect such as changing the display mode of the display means.

Means VD4. The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VD2 characterized in that at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded by at least part of the second rotating means that overlaps the translucent portion of the first rotating means. or VD3.

According to the means VD4, at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. That is, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control for lighting/blinking the light emitting means.

This makes it possible to perform an effect using light together with the motion effect of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD4, as in the case of the means VA2, "the above-mentioned When the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state), the ratio of the predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player increases. It is also possible to say that Thereby, the same effect as the means VA2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD4, similarly to the means VA3, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur. and the first rotating means and the second rotating means are more likely to move than when the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the first second positional relationship (proximity state). The second positional relationship (proximity state) is configured so that the ratio of the second advantageous state is higher than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD4, similarly to the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state) as compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied." It may be configured so that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effect as the means VA4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD4, similarly to the means VA5, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually operable with respect to the first rotating means (at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means can approach individually). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD4, as in the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts arranged around the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at regular intervals in a direction (e.g., equal angular intervals of 360°/N equal angles around a rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means, wherein the light emission control means is and being configured to be able to execute blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD4, as in the case of the means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in a predetermined area viewed from the front may be at least smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 can be obtained.

Means VD5. The detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means VD1 to VD4, characterized in that different effects can be executed depending on which of the plurality of detecting means detects the second rotating means.

According to the above means VD5, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and further improve the interest.

Means VD6. A gaming machine according to any one of means VD1 to VD5, wherein the plurality of second rotating means are individually movable in the predetermined area and individually pass through the predetermined position.

According to the above means VD6, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and further improve the interest.

Means VD7. The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting part capable of reflecting irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light from the front (including light irradiated from the outside of the game machine) through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflecting portion of the second rotating means that overlaps the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means. ) is configured to be able to emit light.

According to the means VD7, the same effect as the means VB1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD7, similarly to the means VB3, ``the first rotating means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member capable of transmitting light''. good. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VB3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material" as in the means VB4. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD7, as in the means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be polished". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD7, similarly to the means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chromium plating)." good too. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VB6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD7, as in the means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD7, as in the means VB8, "at least the reflecting part (at least a part of the second rotating means) has an information writing part in which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written. It may be said that Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 can be obtained.

Means VD8. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means VD1 to VD7, wherein the operation mode of the second rotating means can be changed according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VD8, the same effect as the means VC1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD8, as in the case of the means VC2, "the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD8, similarly to the means VC3, "based on at least the operation displacement amount of the operation means, the amount of movement of the second rotating means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction ) is configured to be changeable”. This provides the same effect as the means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD8, like the means VC4, it may be possible to "provide a movement restricting means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more". Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VC4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD8, like the means VC5, "the guide means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area may be provided". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD8, similarly to the means VC6, "return restricting means capable of restricting the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area from returning to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position) is provided. It may be said that This provides the same effect as the means VC6.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD8, similarly to the means VC7, "the operation means includes at least a first operation section capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a predetermined movement of the second rotation means. and a second operation unit that can select whether or not to execute an action." This provides the same effect as the means VC7.

Means VD9. The second rotating means has at least a portion thereof having a conductive portion (at least a portion of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means are configured to be able to contact or approach each other,
Any one of the means VD1 to VD8, wherein in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotating means is configured to be in contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VD9, the same effect as the means VE1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD9, "the conductive member may be provided in an area different from the predetermined area (outside the predetermined area)" as in the case of the means VE2. As a result, the same effect as the means VE2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD9, as in the means VE3, "the conductive member is arranged along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." It is also possible to say "to be". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD9, as in the means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member arranged along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." may be As a result, the same effect as the means VE4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD9, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 can be obtained.

Means VD10. one of the first rotating means and the second rotating means has at least one acted portion that receives an action from the other rotating means;
When the other rotating means acts on the affected portion of the one rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one rotating means can perform a predetermined operation in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined manner. The gaming machine according to any one of the means VD1 to VD9, wherein the gaming machine is configured as follows.

According to the means VD10, the same effect as the means VF1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD10, as in the case of the means VF2, "when the one rotating means acts on the acted portion in the first mode, the first rotating means When the other rotating means acts on the operated portion in the second mode, the second motion in accordance with the second mode is performed. configured to operate in a manner". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD10, as in the case of the means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode more than the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode." It may be configured such that the proportion of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher when the action is performed. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VF3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD10, as with the means VF4, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur. and when the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode, the first rotation is more likely than when the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode. It may be configured such that the ratio of being in the second advantageous state is higher than in the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD10, as in the case of the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the affected portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD10, similarly to the means VF6, it is also possible to say that "a predetermined movable member is provided which can come into contact with the second rotating means and can change the movement of the second rotating means". good. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF6 can be obtained.

Means VD11. The game board is composed of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VD1 to VD10, wherein the second rotating means is movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and is movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VD11, the same effect as the means VG1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, similarly to the means VG2, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means may individually be configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, as with the means VG3, "a plurality of paths are provided so that the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, as with the means VG4, it may be possible to provide ``in the front area of the game board, a path changing means capable of changing the path along which the second rotating means moves''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, similarly to the means VG5, it may be possible to ``provide a rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotating means moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position''. . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, like the means VG6, "the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotating means may be configured to be variable". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 can be obtained.

Conventional problem VE. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is conducted based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball-entering means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a game state advantageous to the player is generated. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are those that produce a production effect by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, the rotating means may be charged with static electricity due to friction or the like during rotation. Then, when the rotating means is configured to be movable, static electricity flows to the electrical equipment when the rotating means contacts or approaches other electrical equipment (including other rotating means), There is a possibility that the electronic device itself, as well as the game machine, may be greatly affected.

For example, there are concerns such as disturbance of the screen of the display device, noise mixing in the control signal, etc., and in severe cases, various problems such as damage to the electrical equipment and malfunction of the electrical equipment may occur. There is

As a result, the game presentation may not be performed appropriately, and the interest of the player may decrease.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

Means VE1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (the line-of-sight direction of the player) as an axial direction and capable of changing the state between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
a second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means;
The relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means in a predetermined area front view (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-proximity state) in which at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means do not overlap; configured to be changeable to a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion overlaps,
The second rotating means has at least a portion thereof having a conductive portion (at least a portion of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means are configured to be able to contact or approach each other,
A gaming machine, wherein in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotating means is configured to be in contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity.

According to the above means VE1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes are superimposed on each other or separated from each other, thereby producing a more lively game effect. can be executed.

Further, according to this means, the second rotating means has a conductive portion at least in part thereof, and is provided with a conductive member (earth member) capable of contacting the conductive portion of the second rotating means.

As a result, the static electricity charged on the second rotating means can be released via the conductive member, and the occurrence of the various troubles caused by the static electricity can be suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of various production devices such as movable accessories and display devices, and to suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

Means VE2. A gaming machine according to means VE1, wherein the conductive member is provided in an area (outside the predetermined area) different from the predetermined area.

If the conductive member were to be placed in the predetermined area that would be the rendering area, the conductive member would be visible to the player, and the design might be degraded.

In contrast, according to the means VE2, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such problems.

Means VE3. The game machine according to means VE1 or VE2, wherein the conductive member is arranged along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area.

According to the means VE3, the static electricity charged in the second rotating means can be released during the movement of the stage prior to contact with the first rotating means, etc., and the effects of the means VE1 and the like can be further enhanced. .

Means VE4. The game machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE3, wherein the conductive member is an elongated member arranged along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves.

According to the means VE4, the second rotating means can easily come into contact with the conductive member, and static electricity can be released more reliably.

Means VE5. The gaming machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE4, wherein at least the conductive portion (at least part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward).

According to the means VE5, it is possible to reduce the contact area between the conductive portion of the second rotating means and the predetermined conductive member, thereby reducing the frictional resistance during movement of the second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to smoothly move the second rotating means, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Means VE6. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting predetermined light,
The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
The means VE1 is characterized in that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps the translucent part of the first rotating means. The game machine according to any one of VE5.

According to the means VE6, at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. That is, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control for lighting/blinking the light emitting means.

This makes it possible to perform an effect using light together with the motion effect of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE6, as in the case of the means VA2, "the above-mentioned When the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state), the ratio of the predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player increases. It is also possible to say that Thereby, the same effect as the means VA2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE6, as with means VA3, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are generated. and the first rotating means and the second rotating means are more likely to move than when the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the first second positional relationship (proximity state). The second positional relationship (proximity state) is configured so that the ratio of the second advantageous state is higher than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE6, similarly to the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state) as compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied." It may be configured so that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effect as the means VA4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE6, as in the means VA5, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually operable with respect to the first rotating means (at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means can approach individually). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE6, as in the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts arranged around the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at regular intervals in a direction (e.g., equal angular intervals of 360°/N equal angles around a rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means, wherein the light emission control means is and being configured to be able to execute blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE6, it may be possible that ``the diameter of the second rotating means in a predetermined area viewed from the front is at least smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means'', as in the case of the means VA7. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 can be obtained.

Means VE7. The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting part capable of reflecting irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light from the front (including light irradiated from the outside of the game machine) through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflecting portion of the second rotating means that overlaps the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means. ) is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VE7, the same effect as the means VB1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE7, similarly to the means VB3, ``the first rotating means is provided rotatably on the front side of a predetermined translucent member capable of transmitting light''. good. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VB3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material" as in the case of the means VB4. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE7, similarly to the means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be polished." Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE7, similarly to the means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chrome plating)" good too. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VB6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE7, as in the means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE7, as in the means VB8, "at least the reflecting part (at least a part of the second rotating means) has an information writing part in which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written. It may be said that Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 can be obtained.

Means VE8. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The game machine according to any one of the means VE1 to VE7, wherein the operation mode of the second rotating means can be changed according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VE8, the same effect as the means VC1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE8, as in the case of the means VC2, "the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration of the means VE8, similarly to the means VC3, "based on at least the operation displacement amount of the operation means, the amount of movement of the second rotating means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction ) is configured to be changeable”. This provides the same effect as the means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE8, like the means VC4, it may be possible to "provide a movement restricting means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more". Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VC4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE8, like the means VC5, "the guide means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area may be provided". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE8, similarly to the means VC6, "return restricting means capable of restricting the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area from returning to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position) is provided. It may be said that This provides the same effect as the means VC6.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE8, similarly to the means VC7, "the operation means includes at least a first operation section capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a predetermined movement of the second rotation means. and a second operation unit that can select whether or not to execute an action." This provides the same effect as the means VC7.

Means VE9. In the predetermined area,
A detecting means capable of detecting the second rotating means that has passed through a predetermined position,
A game machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE8, characterized in that a predetermined effect can be executed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means.

According to the means VE9, the same effect as the means VD1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE9, similarly to the means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotating means by the detecting means, the light emitting means It is also possible to say that the light emitting mode is made changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 can be obtained.

In addition, as with the means VD3, it may be "provided with predetermined display means as the light emitting means, and configured so that the display mode of the display means can be changed as the light emission mode of the light emitting means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE9, similarly to the means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the detection means at the plurality of locations the second rotation means is detected, It may be "configured to be able to execute different effects". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE9, similarly to the means VD6, it is assumed that "a plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and individually pass through the predetermined positions". good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 can be obtained.

Means VE10. one of the first rotating means and the second rotating means has at least one acted portion that receives an action from the other rotating means;
When the other rotating means acts on the affected portion of the one rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one rotating means can perform a predetermined operation in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined manner. The gaming machine according to any one of the means VE1 to VE9, wherein the gaming machine is configured as follows.

According to the means VE10, the same effects as those of the means VF1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE10, similarly to the means VF2, "when the one rotating means acts on the acted portion in the first mode, the first rotating means When the other rotating means acts on the operated portion in the second mode, the second motion in accordance with the second mode is performed. configured to operate in a manner". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE10, as in the case of the means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode more than the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode." It may be configured such that a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is more likely to occur when performing an action. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VF3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE10, as with the means VF4, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are generated." and when the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode, the first rotation is more likely than when the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode. It may be configured such that the ratio of being in the second advantageous state is higher than in the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE10, as in the case of the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the affected portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE10, similarly to the means VF6, it is also possible to say that "a predetermined movable member is provided which can come into contact with the second rotating means and can change the movement of the second rotating means". good. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF6 can be obtained.

Means VE11. The game board is composed of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VE1 to VE10, wherein the second rotating means is movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and is movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VE11, the same effect as the means VG1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE11, similarly to the means VG2, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means may individually be configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE11, as with the means VG3, "a plurality of paths are provided so that the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE11, like the means VG4, "in the front area of the game board, a path changing means capable of changing the path along which the second rotating means moves" may be provided. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE11, similarly to the means VG5, it may be possible to provide "rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotating means moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position". . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE11, like the means VG6, "the rotation axis direction of the second rotating means may be configured to be variable". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 can be obtained.

Conventional problem VF. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is conducted based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball-entering means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a game state advantageous to the player is generated. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are those that produce a production effect by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in the conventional game machine, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means only lights up and flashes in accordance with the rotation of the rotating means, and the effect of the rotating means is monotonous. It is easy to become, and further improvement of interest was desired.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of rotating means. improvement was desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

Means VF1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (the line-of-sight direction of the player) as an axial direction and capable of changing the state between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
a second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means;
The relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means in a predetermined area front view (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-proximity state) in which at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means do not overlap; configured to be changeable to a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion overlaps,
one of the first rotating means and the second rotating means has at least one acted portion that receives an action from the other rotating means;
When the other rotating means acts on the affected portion of the one rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one rotating means can perform a predetermined operation in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above means VF1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes are superimposed or separated from each other, thereby providing a more lively game effect. can be executed.

Furthermore, according to the present means VF1, when the other rotating means (for example, the first rotating means) acts in a predetermined manner on the affected portion of one rotating means (for example, the second rotating means), the The one rotating means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined operation in an operation mode according to a predetermined mode.

That is, one of the rotating means operates in a different manner due to a difference in the manner in which the other rotating means acts on the affected portion of the one rotating means.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the operation modes of the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means), thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

Means VF2. The one rotating means is
When the other rotating means acts on the operated portion in the first mode, it operates in the first mode of operation corresponding to the first mode,
It is characterized in that, when the other rotating means acts on the operated portion in a second mode, it is configured to operate in a second operation mode corresponding to the second mode. The gaming machine described in means VF1.

According to the means VF2, the effect of the means VF1 can be further enhanced.

Means VF3. When the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode, more than when the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode,
A gaming machine according to means VF2, characterized in that the gaming machine is constructed so as to increase the ratio of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player.

According to the above-mentioned means VF3, it is possible to perform a game effect such that the rate at which a predetermined advantageous state occurs changes depending on the difference in the operation mode of the rotating means. As a result, the player will watch the operation of the rotating means with anticipation, and the player's interest can be improved.

Means VF4. A first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state can be generated,
When the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode, more than when the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode,
A game machine according to means VF2, characterized in that the ratio of said second advantageous state is higher than said first advantageous state.

According to the means VF4, the same effects as those of the means VF3 are achieved.

Means VF5. The gaming machine according to any one of the means VF1 to VF4, wherein the other rotating means is constructed so as to be able to come into contact with the operated portion of the one rotating means.

If a gap is formed between the other rotating means and the affected part of the one rotating means in the case where the affected part is configured as a translucent part capable of transmitting light, the light will pass through the gap. The leaked light may make it difficult to see the operated portion or reduce the luminance of the operated portion itself.

In contrast, according to the means VF5, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a problem.

Means VF6. A gaming machine according to any one of means VF1 to VF5, characterized by comprising a predetermined movable member capable of coming into contact with said second rotating means and capable of causing a change in movement of said second rotating means.

According to the means VF6, when the movable body comes into contact with the second rotating means, the operation mode of the second rotating means is changed. As a result, it is possible to diversify the operation modes of the rotating means and the like, and to improve the interest of the player.

For example, the second rotating means may start operating when a predetermined movable member (for example, a hammer-shaped accessory) acts on the second rotating means in a stopped state.

Means VF7. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting predetermined light,
The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VF1 characterized in that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps the translucent part of the first rotating means. The game machine according to any one of VF6.

According to the means VF7, at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. That is, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control for lighting/blinking the light emitting means.

This makes it possible to perform an effect using light together with the motion effect of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF7, as in the case of the means VA2, "the above-mentioned When the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state), the ratio of the predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player increases. It is also possible to say that Thereby, the same effect as the means VA2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF7, similarly to the means VA3, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur. and the first rotating means and the second rotating means are more likely to move than when the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the first second positional relationship (proximity state). The second positional relationship (proximity state) is configured so that the ratio of the second advantageous state is higher than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF7, similarly to the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is met, the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state) as compared to when the predetermined condition is not met." It may be configured so that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effect as the means VA4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF7, similarly to the means VA5, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually operable with respect to the first rotating means (at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means can approach individually). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF7, as in the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts arranged around the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at regular intervals in a direction (e.g., equal angular intervals of 360°/N equal angles around a rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means, wherein the light emission control means is and being configured to be able to execute blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF7, as in the case of the means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in a predetermined area viewed from the front may be at least smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 can be obtained.

Means VF8. The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting part capable of reflecting irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light from the front (including light irradiated from the outside of the game machine) through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflecting portion of the second rotating means that overlaps the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means. ) is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VF8, the same effect as the means VB1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF8, similarly to the means VB3, ``the first rotating means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member capable of transmitting light''. good. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VB3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF8, "at least the reflecting portion (at least part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material" as in the case of the means VB4. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF8, similarly to means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to a polishing process". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF8, similarly to the means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chromium plating)." good too. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VB6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF8, as in the means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF8, as in the means VB8, "at least the reflecting part (at least a part of the second rotating means) has an information writing part in which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written. It may be said that Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 can be obtained.

Means VF9. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means VF1 to VF8, wherein the operation mode of the second rotating means can be changed according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VF9, effects similar to those of the means VC1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, as in the case of the means VC2, "the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, similarly to the means VC3, "based on at least the operation displacement amount of the operation means, the amount of movement of the second rotating means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction ) is configured to be changeable”. This provides the same effect as the means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, as with the means VC4, it may be possible to "provide a movement restricting means capable of restricting movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more". Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VC4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, like the means VC5, "the guide means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area may be provided". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, similarly to the means VC6, "return restricting means capable of restricting the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area from returning to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position) is provided. It may be said that This provides the same effect as the means VC6.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, similarly to the means VC7, "the operation means includes at least a first operation section capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a predetermined movement of the second rotation means. and a second operation unit that can select whether or not to execute an action." This provides the same effect as the means VC7.

Means VF10. In the predetermined area,
A detecting means capable of detecting the second rotating means that has passed through a predetermined position,
A game machine according to any one of the means VF1 to VF9, characterized in that a predetermined effect can be executed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means.

According to the means VF10, the same effect as the means VD1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF10, similarly to the means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotating means by the detecting means, the light emitting means It is also possible to say that the light emitting mode is made changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 can be obtained.

In addition, as in the means VD3, it is possible to "provide a predetermined display means as the light emitting means, and to change the display mode of the display means as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF10, similarly to the means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the detection means at the plurality of locations the second rotation means is detected, It may be "configured to be able to execute different effects". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF10, similarly to the means VD6, it is assumed that "in the predetermined area, the plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually movable and individually passable through the predetermined position." good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 can be obtained.

Means VF11. The second rotating means has at least a portion thereof having a conductive portion (at least a portion of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means are configured to be able to contact or approach each other,
Any one of the means VF1 to VF10, wherein in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotating means is configured to be in contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VF11, effects similar to those of the means VE1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF11, as in the means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". As a result, the same effect as the means VE2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF11, as with the means VE3, "the conductive member is arranged along a part of the route along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." It is also possible to say "to be". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF11, as in the means VE4, ``the conductive member is an elongated member arranged along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves.'' may be As a result, the same effect as the means VE4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF11, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 can be obtained.

Means VF12. The game board is composed of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VF1 to VF11, wherein the second rotating means is movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and is movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VF12, the same effect as the means VG1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, similarly to the means VG2, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means may individually be configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, like the means VG3, "a plurality of paths are provided so that the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, like the means VG4, "in the front area of the game board, a path changing means capable of changing the moving path of the second rotating means" may be provided. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, similarly to the means VG5, it may be possible to provide "rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotating means moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position". . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, like the means VG6, "the rotation axis direction of the second rotating means may be configured to be variable". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 can be obtained.

Conventional problem VG. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is conducted based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball-entering means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a game state advantageous to the player is generated. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are those that produce a production effect by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in the conventional game machine, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the rotating means performs a predetermined rotating operation, or the light-emitting means mounted on the rotating means only lights or blinks. For this reason, the presentation of the rotating means tends to become monotonous, and further enhancement of interest has been desired.

In view of this, it is conceivable to perform an effect using a plurality of relatively displaceable rotating means. is limited, and it may become difficult to perform dynamic production.

As a result, the presentation using the rotating means tends to become monotonous, and further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

Means VG1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (the line-of-sight direction of the player) as an axial direction and capable of changing the state between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
a second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means;
The relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means in a front view of a predetermined area is
a first positional relationship (non-proximity state) in which at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means do not overlap; configured to be changeable to a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion overlaps,
The game board is composed of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
A gaming machine, wherein the second rotating means is movable from a front area to a rear area of the game board and is movable in the rear area of the game board.

According to the above means VG1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes are superimposed or separated from each other, thereby providing a more lively game effect. can be executed.

Incidentally, if both the first rotating means and the second rotating means are collectively arranged in the front area (or the rear area) of the game board, it is possible for the two rotating means to pass each other due to the relationship between the front and rear spaces. There is a risk that the operation of both rotating means will be restricted, such as not being able to rotate.

In this regard, according to this means VG1, the second rotating means is configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board. The second rotating means can be freely operated at the rear position of the game board without being restricted by the first rotating means arranged in the area.

In addition, the player can visually recognize the operation of the second rotating means through the game board made of the translucent member.

As a result, it is possible to perform a more dynamic and diverse game presentation, and to further improve the interest of the player.

Means VG2. wherein the plurality of second rotating means are individually movable in the predetermined area and the plurality of second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable;
The means VG1 is characterized in that the plurality of second rotating means are individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and are movable in the rear area of the game board. game machine.

According to the means VG2, a plurality of second rotating means are provided which are relatively movable relative to each other, and these are configured to be individually movable to the rear area of the game board, thereby further diversifying the game performance. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

Means VG3. A game machine according to means VG1 or VG2, wherein a plurality of paths are provided so that the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board.

According to the means VG3, the operation mode of the second rotating means is diversified, and it is possible to further improve interest.

Means VG4. The gaming machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG3, further comprising path changing means capable of changing the path along which the second rotating means moves in the front region of the game board.

According to the above means VG4, it is possible to further diversify the operation mode of the second rotating means, and to further improve interest.

Means VG5. The game machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG4, further comprising rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotating means moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position.

Since many devices such as display devices and production devices are arranged in the rear area of the game board, the space for moving the movable body is limited compared to the front area of the game board. It is required to move two rotating means.

On the other hand, according to the means VG5, the second rotating means can be accurately guided to a predetermined position by providing the rear guiding means.

Means VG6. A game machine according to any one of the means VG1 to VG5, wherein the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotation means is variable.

If the direction of the axis of rotation is fixed and an effect of simply changing the direction of rotation is performed, the game effect may become monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the means VG6, since the direction of the rotation axis can be changed, it becomes possible to execute more diverse presentations, and it is possible to further improve the entertainment.

Means VG7. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting predetermined light,
The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VG1 characterized in that at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded by at least part of the second rotating means that overlaps the translucent part of the first rotating means. The gaming machine according to any one of VG6.

According to the means VG7, at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. That is, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control for lighting/blinking the light emitting means.

This makes it possible to perform an effect using light together with the motion effect of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG7, as in the case of the means VA2, "the above-mentioned When the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state), the ratio of the predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player increases. It is also possible to say that Thereby, the same effect as the means VA2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG7, as with the means VA3, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur. and the first rotating means and the second rotating means are more likely to move than when the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the first second positional relationship (proximity state). The second positional relationship (proximity state) is configured so that the ratio of the second advantageous state is higher than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG7, similarly to the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state) as compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied." It may be configured so that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effect as the means VA4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG7, similarly to the means VA5, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually operable with respect to the first rotating means (at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means can approach individually). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG7, similarly to the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 1) of the light-transmitting parts arranged around the circumference of the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at regular intervals in a direction (e.g., equal angular intervals of 360°/N equal angles around a rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means, wherein the light emission control means is and being configured to be able to execute blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG7, it may be possible that ``the diameter of the second rotating means in a predetermined area viewed from the front is at least smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means'', as in the case of the means VA7. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 can be obtained.

Means VG8. The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting part capable of reflecting irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light from the front (including light irradiated from the outside of the game machine) through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflecting portion of the second rotating means that overlaps the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means. ) is configured to be able to emit light.

According to the means VG8, the same effect as the means VB1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG8, similarly to the means VB3, ``the first rotating means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member capable of transmitting light''. good. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VB3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG8, as in the case of the means VB4, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG8, similarly to means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to a polishing process". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG8, similarly to the means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chromium plating)." good too. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VB6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG8, as in the means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG8, as in the means VB8, "at least the reflecting part (at least a part of the second rotating means) has an information writing part in which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written. It may be said that Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 can be obtained.

Means VG9. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means VG1 to VG8, wherein the operation mode of the second rotating means can be changed according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VG9, the same effect as the means VC1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG9, as in the case of the means VC2, "the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG9, similarly to the means VC3, "based on at least the operation displacement amount of the operation means, the amount of movement of the second rotating means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction ) is configured to be changeable”. This provides the same effect as the means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG9, like the means VC4, it may be possible to "provide a movement restricting means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more". Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VC4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG9, it may be possible to ``provide a guide means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area'' as in the case of the means VC5. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG9, similarly to the means VC6, "return restricting means capable of restricting the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area from returning to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position) is provided. It may be said that This provides the same effect as the means VC6.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG9, similarly to the means VC7, "the operation means includes at least a first operation section capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a predetermined movement of the second rotation means. and a second operation unit that can select whether or not to execute an action." This provides the same effect as the means VC7.

Means VG10. In the predetermined area,
A detecting means capable of detecting the second rotating means that has passed through a predetermined position,
A game machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG9, characterized in that a predetermined effect can be executed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means.

According to the means VG10, effects similar to those of the means VD1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG10, similarly to the means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotating means by the detecting means, the light emitting means It is also possible to say that the light emitting mode is made changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 can be obtained.

In addition, as in the means VD3, it is possible to "provide a predetermined display means as the light emitting means, and to change the display mode of the display means as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG10, similarly to the means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the detection means at the plurality of locations the second rotation means is detected, It may be "configured to be able to execute different effects". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG10, similarly to the means VD6, it is assumed that "the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and individually pass through the predetermined position". good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 can be obtained.

Means VG11. The second rotating means has at least a portion thereof having a conductive portion (at least a portion of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means are configured to be able to contact or approach each other,
Any one of the means VG1 to VG10, wherein in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotating means is configured to be in contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VG11, the same effect as the means VE1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG11, as in the means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in an area different from the predetermined area (outside the predetermined area)". As a result, the same effect as the means VE2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG11, as in the means VE3, "the conductive member is arranged along a part of the route along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." It is also possible to say "to be". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG11, as in the means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member arranged along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." may be As a result, the same effect as the means VE4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG11, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 can be obtained.

Means VG12. one of the first rotating means and the second rotating means has at least one acted portion that receives an action from the other rotating means;
When the other rotating means acts on the affected portion of the one rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one rotating means can perform a predetermined operation in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined manner. The game machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG11, wherein the gaming machine is configured as follows.

According to the means VG12, effects similar to those of the means VF1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG12, as in the case of the means VF2, "when the one rotating means acts on the acted portion in the first mode, the first rotating means When the other rotating means acts on the operated portion in the second mode, the second motion in accordance with the second mode is performed. configured to operate in a manner". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG12, as in the case of the means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode more than the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode." It may be configured such that the proportion of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher when the action is performed. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VF3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG12, as with the means VF4, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are generated." and when the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode, the first rotation is more likely than when the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode. It may be configured such that the ratio of being in the second advantageous state is higher than in the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG12, as in the case of the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the affected portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG12, similarly to the means VF6, it is also possible to ``provide a predetermined movable member capable of coming into contact with the second rotating means and causing a change in the movement of the second rotating means''. good. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF6 can be obtained.

In addition, for a gaming machine having a configuration of any part or all of the above means VA1 to VA13, a configuration of any part or all of the means VA1 to VA13 and the configuration of the means VB1 to VB13 Configuration of any part or all, configuration of any part or all of the means VC1 to means VC13, configuration of any part or all of the means VD1 to means VD11, or means VE1 to VE11 Any part or all of the above, any part or all of the means VF1 to VF12, and any part or all of the means VG1 to VG12 or at least one configuration may be implemented in any combination.

Similarly, for a game machine having a part or all of the configuration of any one of the means VB1 to VB13, a part or all of the configuration of any one of the means VA1 to VA13, the means VB1 to VB13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means VC1 to means VC13, configuration of any part or all of the means VD1 to means VD11, the means VE1 to means any part or all of the configuration of VE11, any part or all of the means VF1 to VF12, and any part or all of the means VG1 to VG12 Any combination of at least one configuration may be implemented.

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means VC1 to VC13, any part or all of the means VA1 to VA13, the means VB1 to VB13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means VC1 to means VC13, configuration of any part or all of the means VD1 to means VD11, the means VE1 to means any part or all of the configuration of VE11, any part or all of the means VF1 to VF12, and any part or all of the means VG1 to VG12 Any combination of at least one configuration may be implemented.

Similarly, for a game machine having a part or all of the configuration of any one of the means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the configuration of any one of the means VA1 to VA13, the means VB1 to VB13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means VC1 to means VC13, configuration of any part or all of the means VD1 to means VD11, the means VE1 to means any part or all of the configuration of VE11, any part or all of the means VF1 to VF12, and any part or all of the means VG1 to VG12 Any combination of at least one configuration may be implemented.

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means VE1 to VE11, any part or all of the means VA1 to VA13, the means VB1 to VB13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means VC1 to means VC13, configuration of any part or all of the means VD1 to means VD11, the means VE1 to means any part or all of the configuration of VE11, any part or all of the means VF1 to VF12, and any part or all of the means VG1 to VG12 Any combination of at least one configuration may be implemented.

Similarly, for a game machine having a part or all of the means VF1 to VF12, any part or all of the means VA1 to VA13, the means VB1 to VB13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means VC1 to means VC13, configuration of any part or all of the means VD1 to means VD11, the means VE1 to means any part or all of the configuration of VE11, any part or all of the means VF1 to VF12, and any part or all of the means VG1 to VG12 Any combination of at least one configuration may be implemented.

Similarly, for a game machine having a part or all of the configuration of any one of the means VG1 to VG12, a part or all of the configuration of any one of the means VA1 to VA13, the means VB1 to VB13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means VC1 to means VC13, configuration of any part or all of the means VD1 to means VD11, the means VE1 to means any part or all of the configuration of VE11, any part or all of the means VF1 to VF12, and any part or all of the means VG1 to VG12 Any combination of at least one configuration may be implemented.

The basic configuration of various game machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

(b) The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine. As a more detailed example of a mode, "an operation means (shooting handle, etc.) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting device, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, and the shot A game area (game board, etc.) to which game balls are guided, and predetermined ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, A pinball game machine configured so that a game ball flowing down the game area can be visually recognized.

(b) The game machine in each of the above means or each pinball game machine is a pachinko machine or a game machine conforming to a pachinko machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 30... Game board, 42... Effect display device, 42a... Display unit, 811... Upper movable accessory, 820... Upper rotating body, 825... Movable piece, 828... Magnifying lens unit, 851... Lower movable part Objects 856A... Lower left rotating body 856Aa... First information writing part 856Ab... Second information writing part 856B... Right lower rotating body 856Ba... First information writing part 856Bb... Second information writing part.

Claims (1)

a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter;
a special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined ball is entered in the special ball entry means, the gaming machine comprising:
a first trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter;
a second trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter;
a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific region can flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means and cannot flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific region can flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means and cannot flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means;
route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route;
It is possible to flow down to the special ball entry means by changing the state in the internal area of the variable ball entry means between at least an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state. a variable means capable of changing the value of the game ball flowing down a predetermined route,
The variable means, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery process executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first opportunity ball entry means or the second opportunity ball entry means, a predetermined configured to be able to execute the advantageous state based on the establishment of a switching condition,
This game machine is
When the predetermined switching condition is established, the value of the game ball flowing down the predetermined route is changed by the variable means,
The specific area is provided only at one location through which game balls can pass one by one,
A ball passage capable of guiding game balls one by one to the specific area is provided only at one place,
In the specific area, while allowing the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction, a regulation means is provided that regulates the passage of the game ball in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
A game ball that has entered the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means is configured to be unable to flow down to the special ball-entering means after that,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the special game state is granted by being controlled to the advantageous state by the variable means, the predetermined type of game most advantageous to the player is given, rather than being controlled to the non-advantageous state by the variable means. It has a structure that makes it easy to determine the special game state,
making the period from at least a predetermined trigger to the control to the advantageous state by the variable means variable;
At least when controlled to the advantageous state by the variable means, effect means capable of executing a preceding effect corresponding to the operation standby period,
The effect means is configured to execute the preceding effect corresponding to the type of the operation standby period to be executed when executing the preceding effect,
A game machine comprising a delay means capable of delaying the flow speed of a game ball in the first route or the second route .

Images